FOREWORD
READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY
Before driving your vehicle please read this Own-
er’s Manual carefully. This will ensure familiarity
with controls and maintenance requirements, as-
sisting you in the safe operation of your vehicle.
Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN
owners. This vehicle is delivered to you with
confidence. It was produced using the latest
techniques and strict quality control.
MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE
This vehicle should not be modified.
Modification could affect its
performance, safety or durability, and
may even violate governmental
regulations. In addition, damage or per-
formance problems resulting from
modifications may not be covered under
NISSAN warranties.
This manual was prepared to help you under-
stand the operation and maintenance of your
vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles (kilome-
ters) of driving pleasure. Please read through this
manual before operating your vehicle.
WARNING
IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION RE-
MINDERS FOR SAFETY!
Follow these important driving rules to
help ensure a safe and complete trip for
you and your passengers!
A separate Warranty Information Booklet
explains details about the warranties cov-
ering your vehicle. The “NISSAN Service
and Maintenance Guide” explains details
about maintaining and servicing your ve-
hicle. Additionally, a separate Customer
Care/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) will
explain how to resolve any concerns you
may have with your vehicle, as well as
clarify your rights under your state’s lemon
law.
● NEVER drive under the influence of al-
cohol or drugs.
● ALWAYS observe posted speed limits
and never drive too fast for conditions.
● ALWAYS use your seat belts and appro-
priate child restraint systems. Preteen
children should be seated in the rear
seat.
Your NISSAN dealership knows your vehicle
best. When you require any service or have any
questions, they will be glad to assist you with the
extensive resources available to them.
● ALWAYS provide information about the
proper use of vehicle safety features to
all occupants of the vehicle.
● ALWAYS review this owner’s manual for
important safety information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM
NISSAN CARES . . .
Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are
our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.
However, if there is something that your NISSAN
dealer cannot assist you with or you would like to
provide NISSAN directly with comments or
questions, please contact the NISSAN Con-
sumer Affairs Department using our toll-free
number:
The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for the
following information:
You can write to NISSAN with the information at:
For U.S. customers
– Your name, address, and telephone number
Nissan North America, Inc.
Consumer Affairs Department
P.O. Box 191
– Vehicle identification number (attached to the
top of the instrument panel on the driver’s
side)
Gardena, California 90248-0191
For U.S. customers
1-800-NISSAN-1
(1-800-647-7261)
For Canadian customers
Nissan Canada Inc.
5290 Orbitor Drive
– Date of purchase
– Current odometer reading
– Your NISSAN dealer’s name
– Your comments or questions
OR
For Canadian customers
1-800-387-0122
Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5
We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of
Contents
Illustrated table of contents
0
1
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Instruments and controls
2
Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems
Starting and driving
3
4
5
In case of emergency
6
Appearance and care
7
Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Technical and consumer information
8
9
Index
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
0 Illustrated table of contents
Airbags, seat belts and child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-2
Exterior front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-3
Exterior rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-4
Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-5
Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-6
Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-8
Warning/indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AIRBAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD
RESTRAINTS
1. Top tether strap anchor (P. 1-25)
2. Rear seat belts (P. 1-9)
3. Supplemental curtain side-impact air
bags (P. 1-34)
4. Supplemental side impact air bags
(P. 1-34)
5. Front head restraint (P. 1-7, P. 1-8)
6. Front seat belts (P. 1-9)
7. Supplemental front impact air bags
(P. 1-34)
8. Seats (P. 1-2)
9. Occupant classification sensor (pres-
sure sensor) (P.1-42)
10. Seat belt pretensioners (P. 1-48)
11. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) (P. 1-24)
See the page number indicated in paren-
theses for operating details.
LII0068
0-2 Illustrated table of contents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EXTERIOR FRONT
1. Engine hood (P. 3-9)
2. Headlight and turn signal switch
(P. 2-21)
3. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-31)
4. Windshield wiper and washer switch
(P. 2-19)
5. Windshield (P. 8-25)
6. Power windows (P. 2-37)
7. Door locks, keyfob, keys
(P. 3-3, 3-5, 3-2)
8. Mirrors (P. 3-15)
9. Tire pressure (P. 8-40)
10. Flat tire (P. 6-2)
11. Tire chains (P. 8-48)
12. Fog light switch (if so equipped)
(P. 2-25)
13. Tie down/towing hooks (P. 6-11)
See the page number indicated in paren-
theses for operating details.
LII0044
Illustrated table of contents 0-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EXTERIOR REAR
1. Rear window defroster switch (P. 2-20)
2. Trunk lid (P. 3-10)
3. Vehicle loading (P.9-12)
4. Interior trunk lid release (P. 3-11)
5. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-31)
6. Fuel-filler cap, fuel recommendation
(P. 3-12, P. 9-3)
7. Fuel-filler door (P. 3-12)
8. Child safety locks (P. 3-5)
LII0023
0-4 Illustrated table of contents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
1. Glove box (P. 2-33)
2. Automatic anti-glare inside mirror
(if so equipped) (P. 3-15)
3. Sun visors (P. 3-14)
4. Interior lights, illuminated entry (P. 2-40)
5. Front seat (P. 1-2)
6. Sunroof (if so equipped) (P. 2-39)
7. Interior trunk access (P. 1-6)
8. Rear seat (P. 1-6)
9. Front console (P. 2-33)
10. Front cup holders (P. 2-32)
11. Parking brake, parking on hills
(P. 5-14, P. 5-18)
12. HomeLinkா (if so equipped) (P. 2-42)
See the page number indicated in paren-
theses for operating details.
LII0026
Illustrated table of contents 0-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Driver, center and passenger ventila-
tors (P. 4-11)
Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn
signal switch (P. 2-21)
Steering wheel switch for audio control
(if so equipped) (P. 4-40)
Driver supplemental air bag/horn
(P. 1-34, 2-26)
5.
6.
Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)
Cruise control main/set switch
(if so equipped) (P. 5-15)
Windshield wiper/washer switch
(P. 2-19)
7.
8.
9.
Storage (if so equipped) (P. 2-30)
Glove box (P. 2-33)
10. Front passenger supplemental air bag
(P. 1-34)
11. Heater and air conditioner (manual or
automatic) (P. 4-11, P. 4-20)
12. Power outlet or cigarette lighter
(if so equipped) (P. 2-28, P. 2-29)
13. Heated seat switch (if so equipped)
(P. 2-27)
14. Shift selector lever (P. 5-7)
15. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 2-26)
16. Storage or ashtray (if so equipped)
(P. 2-30, P. 2-29)
WIC0902
0-6 Illustrated table of contents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
17 Front passenger air bag status light
(P. 1-43)
18. Audio system controls (if so equipped)
(P. 4-23)
19. Ignition switch (P. 5-4)
20. Tilt/telescopic steering wheel controls
(P. 3-13)
21. Traction control system (TCS) off
switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-28)
22. Instrument brightness control (P. 2-24)
23. Trunk opener (P. 3-10)
24. Meters and guages (if so equipped)
(P. 2-3)
25. Navigation system* (if so equipped)
(P. 4-2)
26. Navigation system* controls
(if so equipped) (P. 4-2)
*: Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-
er’s Manual.
See the page number indicated in paren-
theses for operating details.
Illustrated table of contents 0-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS
QR25DE engine
1. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-16)
2. Spark plug caps (P. 8-21)
3. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-17)
4. Clutch fluid reservoir (M/T model)
(P. 8-17)
5. Air cleaner (P. 8-22)
6. Battery (P. 8-18)
7. Fuse/fusible link box (P. 8-27)
8. Transmission dipstick (A/T models)
(P. 8-14)
9. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-10)
10. Radiator cap (P. 8-9)
11. Drive belt location (P.8-20)
12. Fuse block (P. 8-27)
13. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
(P. 8-18)
14. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-9)
15. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-10)
NOTE:
Engine cover removed for clarity.
See the page number indicated in paren-
theses for operating details.
WDI0488
0-8 Illustrated table of contents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VQ35DE engine
1. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-16)
2. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-10)
3. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-17)
4. Clutch fluid reservoir (M/T model)
(P. 8-17)
5. Air cleaner (P. 8-22)
6. Battery (P. 8-18)
7. Fuse/fusible link box (P. 8-27)
8. Transmission dipstick (A/T models)
(P. 8-16)
9. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-10)
10. Radiator cap (P. 8-9)
11. Drive belt location (P.8-20)
12. Fuse block (P. 8-27)
13. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
(P. 8-18)
14. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-9)
NOTE:
Engine cover removed for clarity.
See the page number indicated in paren-
theses for operating details.
WDI0489
Illustrated table of contents 0-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS
Warning
light
Name
Page
2-11
Warning
light
Name
Page
2-13
Indicator
light
Name
Page
5-15
Anti-lock brake
warning light (if so
equipped)
Low windshield
washer fluid warning
light
Cruise SET switch
indicator light (if so
equipped)
or
Seat belt warning
light and chime
2-13
1-49
2-14
Front passenger air
bag status light
2-14
2-14
2-14
2-15
2-15
Automatic transmis-
sion check warning
light (if so equipped)
2-12
2-12
Supplemental air
bag warning light
High beam indicator
light (blue)
Brake warning light
Trunk lid open warn-
ing light
Malfunction indica-
tor light (MIL)
or
Slip indicator light (if
so equipped)
Indicator
light
Name
Page
5-4
Charge warning
light
2-12
2-12
2-12
2-13
Traction control sys-
tem off indicator
light (if so equipped)
Automatic transmis-
sion position indica-
tor light (A/T mod-
els)
Door open warning
light
Turn signal/hazard
indicator lights
2-15
Engine oil pressure
warning light
CRUISE main
switch indicator light
(if so equipped)
5-15
Low fuel warning
light
0-10 Illustrated table of contents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Front manual seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Front power seat adjustment
Child restraint installation on rear seat center
or outboard positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24
Top tether strap child restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-25
Child restraint installation on front passenger
(if so equipped for driver’s seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Folding rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Head restraint adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Active head restraint (front seats). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Precautions on seat belt usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Child safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-11
Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13
Injured persons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13
Three-point type seat belt with retractor. . . . . . . . . .1-13
Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16
Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16
Child restraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17
Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17
seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-26
Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-29
Precautions on booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-29
Booster seat installation on rear seat center
or outboard positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-32
Booster seat installation on front passenger
seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-33
Supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-34
Precautions on supplemental restraint
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-34
Supplemental air bag warning labels. . . . . . . . . . . . .1-49
Supplemental air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEATS
WARNING
● Do not adjust the driver’s seat while
driving so full attention may be given to
vehicle operation. The seat may move
suddenly and could cause loss of con-
trol of the vehicle.
ARS1152
● For the most effective protection when
the vehicle is in motion, the seat should
be upright. Always sit well back in the
seat with both feet on the floor and
adjust the seat properly. See “Precau-
tions on Seat Belt Usage” later in this
section.
WARNING
● Do not ride in a moving vehicle when
the seatback is reclined. This can be
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not
be against your body. In an accident,
you could be thrown into it and receive
neck or other serious injuries. You
could also slide under the lap belt and
receive serious internal injuries.
FRONT MANUAL SEAT
ADJUSTMENT
WARNING
After adjustment, gently rock in the seat to
make sure it is securely locked.
1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING
After adjustment, gently rock in the seat to
make sure it is securely locked.
WRS0175
WRS0176
Forward and backward
Reclining
Pull the lever up and hold it while you slide the
seat forward or backward to the desired position.
Release the lever to lock the seat in position.
To recline the seatback, pull the lever up and lean
back. To bring the seatback forward, pull the lever
up and lean your body forward. Release the lever
to lock the seatback in position.
The reclining feature allows adjustment of the
seatback for occupants of different sizes for
added comfort and to help obtain proper seat
belt fit. See “Precautions on seat belt usage”later
in this section. Also, the seatback can be reclined
to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is
stopped.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WRS0131
WRS0163
Seat lifter (if so equipped for driver’s
FRONT POWER SEAT
ADJUSTMENT (if so equipped for
driver’s seat)
● Do not leave children unattended inside
the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-
tivate switches or controls. Unattended
children could become involved in seri-
ous accidents.
seat)
Turn either dial to adjust the angle and height of
the seat cushion to the desired position.
WARNING
Operating tips
● Do not adjust the driver’s seat while
driving so full attention may be given to
vehicle operation. The seat may move
suddenly and could cause loss of con-
trol of the vehicle.
●
The power seat motor has an auto-reset
overload protection circuit. If the motor
stops during operation, wait 30 seconds,
then reactivate the switch.
●
Do not operate the power seat switch for a
long period of time when the engine is off.
This will discharge the battery.
1-4 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Forward and backward
Moving the switch forward or backward will slide
the seat forward or backward to the desired
position.
Reclining
Move the recline switch backward until the de-
sired angle is obtained. To bring the seatback
forward again, move the switch forward and
move your body forward. The seatback will move
forward.
The reclining feature allows adjustment of the
seatback for occupants of different sizes for
added comfort and to help obtain proper seat
belt fit (see “Precautions on seat belt usage”later
in this section). Also, the seatback can be re-
clined to allow occupants to rest when the ve-
hicle is stopped.
WRS0164
WRS0389
Seat lifter (if so equipped for driver’s
Lumbar support (if so equipped for
seat)
driver’s seat)
Push the front or rear end of the switch up or
down to adjust the angle and height of the seat
cushion.
The lumbar support feature provides lower back
support to the driver. Move the lever forward or
backward to adjust the seat lumbar area.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
Push down on the button on the rear parcel
shelf.
᭺
● Closely supervise children when they
are around cars to prevent them from
playing and becoming locked in the
trunk where they could be seriously in-
jured. Keep the car locked, with the rear
seatback and trunk lid securely latched
when not in use, and prevent children’s
access to car keys.
2
Fold down the passenger side seatback.
᭺
WARNING
● Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo
area or on the rear seat when it is in the
fold-down position. Use of these areas
by passengers without proper restraints
could result in serious injury in an acci-
dent or sudden stop.
● Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding or
shifting. Do not place cargo higher than
the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col-
lision, unsecured cargo could cause
personal injury.
● When returning the seatbacks to the
upright position, be certain they are
completely secured in the latched posi-
tion. If they are not completely secured,
passengers may be injured in an acci-
dent or sudden stop.
WRS0166
FOLDING REAR SEAT
Interior trunk access
The trunk can be accessed from the passenger
side of the rear seat for loading and unloading, as
shown.
1-6 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LRS0225
WRS0167
WRS0133
To fold down the driver side of the rear seat, reach
Center armrest
HEAD RESTRAINT ADJUSTMENT
1
through the opening and pull on the strap
᭺
Pull the armrest forward until it is horizontal.
To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower,
push and hold the lock knob and push the head
restraint down.
located behind the seat.
The rear seats can be locked using the master
key to prevent unauthorized access. The valet key
cannot be used to lock or unlock the release
button. For more information on keys, refer to
“Keys” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjust-
ments” section of this manual.
WARNING
Head restraints should be adjusted prop-
erly as they may provide significant pro-
tection against injury in an accident. Do
not remove them. Check the adjustment
after someone else uses the seat.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
● Do not attach anything to the head re-
straint stalks. Doing so could impair
active head restraint function.
The head restraint moves forward utilizing the
force that the seatback receives from the occu-
pant in a rear-end collision. The movement of the
head restraint helps support the occupant’s head
by reducing its backward movement and helping
absorb some of the forces that may lead to whip-
lash type injuries.
Active head restraints are effective for collisions
at low to medium speeds in which it is said that
whiplash injury occurs most.
WRS0134
SPA1025
Active head restraints operate only in certain
rear-end collisions. After the collision, the head
restraints return to their original positions.
Adjust the head restraint so the center is level
with the center of your ears.
ACTIVE HEAD RESTRAINT (front
seats)
Properly adjust the active head restraints as de-
scribed earlier in this section.
WARNING
● Always adjust the head restraints prop-
erly as specified in the previous section.
Failure to do so can reduce the effec-
tiveness of the active head restraint.
● Active head restraints are designed to
supplement other safety systems. Al-
ways wear seat belts. No system can
prevent all injuries in any accident.
1-8 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEAT BELTS
SSS0136
PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT
USAGE
If you are wearing your seat belt properly ad-
justed and you are sitting upright and well back in
your seat, your chances of being injured or killed
in an accident and/or the severity of injury may be
greatly reduced. NISSAN strongly encourages
you and all of your passengers to buckle up every
time you drive, even if your seating position in-
cludes a supplemental air bag.
Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces
or territories specify that seat belts be worn
at all times when a vehicle is being driven.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SSS0134
SSS0016
WARNING
WARNING
● Every person who drives or rides in this
vehicle should use a seat belt at all
times. Children should be properly re-
strained in the rear seat and, if appro-
priate, in a child restraint.
● The seat belt should be properly ad-
justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so may
reduce the effectiveness of the entire
restraint system and increase the
chance or severity of injury in an acci-
dent. Serious injury or death can occur
if the seat belt is not worn properly.
1-10 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
● Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely
fastened to the proper buckle.
● All seat belt assemblies, including re-
tractors and attaching hardware,
should be inspected after any collision
by a NISSAN dealer. NISSAN recom-
mends that all seat belt assemblies in
use during a collision be replaced un-
less the collision was minor and the
belts show no damage and continue to
operate properly. Seat belt assemblies
not in use during a collision should also
be inspected and replaced if either
damage or improper operation is noted.
● Do not wear the seat belt inside out or
twisted. Doing so may reduce its
effectiveness.
● Do not allow more than one person to
use the same seat belt.
● Never carry more people in the vehicle
than there are seat belts.
● If the seat belt warning light glows con-
tinuously while the ignition is turned
ON with all doors closed and all seat
belts fastened, it may indicate a mal-
function in the system. Have the system
checked by a NISSAN dealer.
● All child restraints and attaching hard-
ware should be inspected after any col-
lision. Always follow the restraint
manufacturer’s inspection instructions
and replacement recommendations.
The child restraints should be replaced
if they are damaged.
SSS0014
WARNING
● Always route the shoulder belt over
your shoulder and across your chest.
Never run the belt behind your back,
under your arm or across your neck. The
belt should be away from your face and
neck, but not falling off your shoulder.
● Once the pre-tensioner seat belt has
activated, it cannot be reused and must
be replaced together with the retractor.
See your NISSAN dealer.
CHILD SAFETY
● Removal and installation of the pre-
tensioner seat belt system components
should be done by a NISSAN dealer.
Children need adults to help protect them.
They need to be properly restrained.
● Position the lap belt as low and snug as
possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE
WAIST. A lap belt worn too high could
increase the risk of internal injuries in
an accident.
In addition to the general information in this
manual, child safety information is available from
many other sources, including doctors, teachers,
government traffic safety offices, and community
organizations. Every child is different, so be sure
to learn the best way to transport your child.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There are three basic types of child restraint
systems:
for infants and small children. See “Child Re-
straints” later in this section.
placed in a forward facing child restraint. Refer to
the manufacturer’s instructions for minimum and
maximum weight and height recommendations.
NISSAN recommends that small children be
placed in child restraints that comply with Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Mo-
tor Vehicle Safety Standards. You should choose
a child restraint that fits your vehicle and always
follow the manufacturer’s instructions for instal-
lation and use.
●
●
●
Rear facing child restraint
Front facing child restraint
Booster seat
Also, there are other types of child restraints
available for larger children for additional protec-
tion.
NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens
and children be restrained in the rear seat.
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seat than in the front seat.
The proper restraint depends on the child’s size.
Generally, infants up to about 1 year and less
than 20 pounds (9 kg) should be placed in rear
facing child restraints. Front facing child re-
straints are available for children who outgrow
rear facing child restraints and are at least 1 year
old. Booster seats are used to help position a
vehicle lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no
longer use a front facing child restraint.
Larger children
This is especially important because your
vehicle has a supplemental restraint sys-
tem (Air bag system) for the front passen-
ger. See “Supplemental restraint system”
later in this section.
Children who are too large for child restraints
should be seated and restrained by the seat belts
which are provided. The seat belt may not fit
properly if the child is less than 4 feet 9 inches
(142.5 cm) tall and weighs between 40 lbs (18
kg) and 80 lbs (36 kg). A booster seat should be
used to obtain proper seat belt fit.
Infants
WARNING
Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed
in a rear facing child restraint. NISSAN recom-
mends that infants be placed in child restraints
that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards. You should choose a child restraint
that fits your vehicle and always follow the manu-
facturer’s instructions for installation and use.
Infants and children need special protec-
tion. The vehicle’s seat belts may not fit
them properly. The shoulder belt may
come too close to the face or neck. The
lap belt may not fit over their small hip
bones. In an accident, an improperly fit-
ting seat belt could cause serious or fatal
injury. Always use appropriate child
restraints.
NISSAN recommends that a child be placed in a
commercially available booster seat if the shoul-
der belt in the child’s seating position fits close to
the face or neck or if the lap portion of the seat
belt goes across the abdomen. The booster seat
should raise the child so that the shoulder belt is
properly positioned across the top, middle por-
tion of the shoulder and the lap belt is low on the
hips. A booster seat can only be used in seating
positions that have a three-point type seat belt.
The booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and
Small Children
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or terri-
tories require the use of approved child restraints
Children that are over one year old and weigh
between 20 lbs (9 kg) and 40 lbs (18 kgs) can be
1-12 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
have a label certifying that it complies with Fed-
eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. Once the child
has grown so the shoulder belt is no longer on or
near the face and neck, use the shoulder belt
without the booster seat.
THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT
WITH RETRACTOR
WARNING
● Every person who drives or rides in this
vehicle should use a seat belt at all
times.
WARNING
● Do not ride in a moving vehicle when
the seatback is reclined. This can be
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not
be against your body. In an accident,
you could be thrown into it and receive
neck or other serious injuries. You
could also slide under the lap belt and
receive serious internal injuries.
Never let a child stand or kneel on any
seat and do not allow a child in the cargo
areas while the vehicle is moving. The
child could be seriously injured or killed in
an accident or sudden stop.
WRS0174
PREGNANT WOMEN
Manual front seat shown
NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use
seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug,
and always position the lap belt as low as pos-
sible around the hips, not the waist. Place the
shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your
chest. Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your
abdominal area. Contact your doctor for specific
recommendations.
Fastening the seat belts
● For the most effective protection when
the vehicle is in motion, the seat should
be upright. Always sit well back in the
seat with both feet on the floor and
adjust the seat belt properly.
1
Adjust the seat. See “Seats” earlier in this
section.
᭺
INJURED PERSONS
NISSAN recommends that injured persons use
seat belts. Check with your doctor for specific
recommendations.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
fully retracted. Once retracted, the seat belt is in
the emergency locking mode. See “Child re-
straints” later in this section for more information.
The automatic locking mode should be
used only for child restraint installation.
During normal seat belt use by a passen-
ger, the locking mode should not be acti-
vated. If it is activated it may cause uncom-
fortable seat belt tension. It can also
change the operation of the front passen-
ger air bag. See “Front passenger air bag
and status light” later in this section.
WARNING
WRS0137
WRS0138
When fastening the seat belts, be certain
that the seatbacks are completely se-
cured in the latched position. If they are
not completely secured, passengers may
be injured in an accident or sudden stop.
2
3
Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor
and insert the tongue into the buckle until
you hear and feel the latch engage.
Position the lap belt portion low and snug
on the hips as shown.
᭺
᭺
4
Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the
retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the
shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder
and across your chest.
᭺
●
●
The retractor is designed to lock during
a sudden stop or on impact. A slow
pulling motion permits the seat belt to
move, and allows you some freedom of
movement in the seat.
The front passenger seat and the rear seating
positions three-point seat belts have a locking
mechanism for child restraint installation. It is
referred to as the automatic locking mode or child
restraint mode.
If the seat belt cannot be pulled from
its fully retracted position, firmly pull
the belt and release it. Then smoothly
pull the belt out of the retractor.
When automatic locking mechanism is activated
the seat belt cannot be extended again until the
seat belt tongue is detached from the buckle and
1-14 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To increase your confidence in the seat belts,
check the operation as follows.
●
Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward
quickly. The retractor should lock and re-
strict further belt movement.
If the retractor does not lock during this check or
if you have any questions about seat belt opera-
tion, see a NISSAN dealer.
WRS0139
WRS0171
Unfastening the seat belts
Shoulder belt height adjustment (Front
seats)
1
To unfasten the seat belt, press the button on
the buckle. The seat belt automatically re-
tracts.
᭺
The shoulder belt anchor height should be ad-
justed to the position best for you. (See “Precau-
tions on seat belt usage” earlier in this section.)
The belt should be away from your face and neck,
but not falling off your shoulder.
Checking seat belt operation
Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt
movement by two separate methods:
To adjust the shoulder belt anchor height:
●
When the seat belt is pulled quickly from the
retractor.
1
Push in the adjustment button.
᭺
●
When the vehicle slows down rapidly.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
Move the shoulder belt anchor to the desired
position so the belt passes over the center of
the shoulder. Release the adjustment button
to lock the shoulder belt anchor into position.
●
Periodically check to see that the seat
belt and the metal components, such as
buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires
and anchors, work properly. If loose parts,
deterioration, cuts or other damage on the
webbing is found, the entire seat belt as-
sembly should be replaced.
᭺
WARNING
● Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, made
by the same company which made the
original equipment seat belts, should
be used with NISSAN seat belts.
WARNING
● Adults and children who can use the
standard seat belt should not use an
extender. Such unnecessary use could
result in serious personal injury in the
event of an accident.
● After adjustment, release the adjust-
ment button and try to move the shoul-
der belt anchor up and down to make
sure it is securely fixed in position.
● The shoulder belt anchor height should
be adjusted to the position best for you.
Failure to do so may reduce the effec-
tiveness of the entire restraint system
and increase the chance or severity of
injury in an accident.
● Never use seat belt extenders to install
child restraints. If the child restraint is
not secured properly, the child could be
seriously injured in a collision or a sud-
den stop.
SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE
SEAT BELT EXTENDERS
●
To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a
mild soap solution or any solution recom-
mended for cleaning upholstery or carpet.
Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat
belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow the
seat belts to retract until they are completely
dry.
If, because of body size or driving position, it is
not possible to properly fit the lap-shoulder belt
and fasten it, an extender is available which is
compatible with the installed seat belts. The ex-
tender adds approximately 8 inches (200 mm) of
length and may be used for either the driver or
front passenger seating position. See a NISSAN
dealer for assistance if an extender is required.
●
If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt
guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat
belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder
belt guide with a clean, dry cloth.
1-16 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHILD RESTRAINTS
● Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System, never install a rear-facing
child restraint in the front seat. An in-
flating supplemental front air bag could
seriously injure or kill your child. A rear-
facing child restraint must only be used
in the rear seat.
● NISSAN recommends that the child re-
straint be installed in the rear seat. Ac-
cording to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seat than in the front seat.
● An improperly installed child restraint
could lead to serious injury or death in
an accident.
ARS1098
WRS0256
PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD
RESTRAINTS
WARNING
In general, child restraints are designed to be
installed with the lap portion of a lap/shoulder
seat belt. In addition, this vehicle is equipped with
a universal child restraint lower anchor system,
referred to as the LATCH (Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren) system. Some child re-
straints include two rigid or webbing-mounted
attachments that can be connected to these
lower anchors. For details, see the “LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) sys-
tem” later in this section.
● Infants and small children should never
be carried on your lap. It is not possible
for even the strongest adult to resist the
forces of a severe accident. The child
could be crushed between the adult and
parts of the vehicle. Also, do not put the
same seat belt around both your child
and yourself.
WARNING
● Infants and small children should al-
ways be placed in an appropriate child
restraint while riding in the vehicle.
Failure to use a child restraint can re-
sult in serious injury or death.
Child restraints for infants and small children of
various sizes are offered by several manufactur-
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ers. When selecting any child restraint, keep the
following points in mind:
● Follow all of the child restraint manu-
facturer’s instructions for installation
and use. When purchasing a child re-
straint, be sure to select one which will
fit your child and vehicle. It may not be
possible to properly install some types
of child restraints in your vehicle.
● If you must install a front facing child
restraint in the front seat, see “Child
restraint installation on front passenger
seat” later in this section.
●
Choose only a restraint with a label certifying
that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
● When your child restraint is not in use,
keep it secured with a seat belt to pre-
vent it from being thrown around in
case of a sudden stop or accident.
●
●
Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be
sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat
and seat belt system.
● If the child restraint is not anchored
properly, the risk of a child being in-
jured in a collision or a sudden stop
greatly increases.
CAUTION
If the child restraint is compatible with your
vehicle, place your child in the child restraint
and check the various adjustments to be
sure the child restraint is compatible with
your child. Choose a child restraint that is
designed for your child’s height and weight.
Always follow all recommended procedures.
Remember that a child restraint left in a
closed vehicle can become very hot.
Check the seating surface and buckles
before placing your child in the child
restraint.
● Adjustable seatbacks should be posi-
tioned to fit the child restraint, but as
upright as possible.
● After attaching the child restraint, test it
before you place the child in it. Push it
from side to side. Try to tug it forward
and check to see if the belt holds the
restraint in place. The child restraint
should not move more than 1 inch (25
mm). If the restraint is not secure,
tighten the belt as necessary, or put the
restraint in another seat and test it
again. You may need to try a different
child restraint. Not all child restraints fit
in all types of vehicles.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require that infants and small
children be restrained in an approved child
restraint at all times while the vehicle is
being operated.
WARNING
● Improper use of a child restraint can
increase the risk or severity of injury for
both the child and other occupants of
the vehicle.
1-18 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION
ON REAR SEAT CENTER OR
OUTBOARD POSITIONS
WARNING
● The three-point seat belt in your vehicle
is equipped with an automatic locking
mode retractor which must be used
when installing a child restraint.
● Failure to use the retractor’s locking
mode will result in the child restraint
not being properly secured. The re-
straint could tip over or otherwise be
unsecured and cause injury to the child
in a sudden stop or collision.
LRS0413
LRS0412
Front Facing (center) — step 1
Front Facing (outboard) — step 1
Front facing
● When installing a child restraint system
in the rear center position, both the
center seat belt connector tongue and
buckle tongue must be secured.
When you install a child restraint in the rear seat,
follow these steps:
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-
ways follow the restraint manufacturer’s in-
structions. The back of the child restraint
should be secured against the vehicle seat
back. If necessary, adjust or remove the head
restraint to obtain the correct child restraint
fit. See “Head restraint adjustment” earlier in
this section. If the head restraint is removed,
store it in a secure place. Be sure to install
the head restraint when the child restraint is
removed. If the seating position does not
have an adjustable head restraint and it is
interfering with the proper child restraint fit,
try another seating position or a different
child restraint.
᭺
WRS0250
LRS0458
Front Facing — step 2
Front Facing — step 3
2
3
Route the seat belt tongue through the child
restraint and insert it into the buckle until you
hear and feel the latch engage.
Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the belt is
fully extended. At this time, the seat belt
retractor is in the automatic locking mode
(child restraint mode). It reverts back to
emergency locking mode when the seat belt
is fully retracted.
᭺
᭺
Be sure to follow the child restraint manu-
facturer’s instructions for belt routing.
1-20 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Check that the retractor is in the automatic
locking mode by trying to pull more seat belt
out of the retractor. If you cannot pull any
more belt webbing out of the retractor, the
retractor is in the automatic locking mode.
7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3
through 6.
After the child restraint is removed and the seat
belt is fully retracted, the automatic locking mode
(child restraint mode) is canceled.
LRS0457
WRS0252
Front Facing — step 4
Front Facing — step 5
4
5
Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the
shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.
Before placing the child in the child restraint,
use force to push the child restraint from
side to side, and tug it forward to make sure
that it is securely held in place. It should not
move more than 1 inch (25 mm). If it does
move more than 1 inch (25 mm), pull again
on the shoulder belt to further tighten the
child restraint. If unable to properly secure
the restraint move the restraint to another
rear seating position and try again , or try a
different child restraint. Not all child re-
straints fit in all types of vehicles.
᭺
᭺
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LRS0407
LRS0406
LRS0408
Rear Facing (center) — step 1
Rear Facing (outboard) — step 1
Rear Facing — step 2
2
Route the seat belt tongue through the child
restraint and insert it into the buckle until you
hear and feel the latch engage.
Rear facing
᭺
When you install a child restraint in the rear seat,
follow these steps:
Be sure to follow the child restraint manu-
facturer’s instructions for belt routing.
1
Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-
ways follow the restraint manufacturer’s in-
structions.
᭺
1-22 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LRS0409
LRS0410
LRS0411
Rear Facing — step 3
Rear Facing — step 4
Rear Facing — step 5
3
4
5
Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the belt is
fully extended. At this time, the seat belt
retractor is in the automatic locking mode
(child restraint mode). It reverts to emer-
gency locking mode when the seat belt is
fully retracted.
Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the
shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.
Before placing the child in the child restraint,
use force to push the child restraint from
side to side, and tug it forward to make sure
that it is securely held in place. It should not
move more than 1 inch (25 mm). If it does
move more than 1 inch (25 mm), pull again
on the shoulder belt to further tighten the
child restraint. If unable to properly secure
the restraint move the restraint to another
rear seating position and try again , or try a
different child restraint. Not all child re-
straints fit in all types of vehicles.
᭺
᭺
᭺
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Check that the retractor is in the automatic
locking mode by trying to pull more seat belt
out of the retractor. If you cannot pull any
more seat belt webbing out of the retractor,
the retractor is in the automatic locking
mode.
WARNING
● Attach LATCH system compatible child
restraints only at the locations shown. If
a child restraint is not secured properly,
your child could be seriously injured or
killed in an accident.
7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the belt
is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6.
● Do not secure a child restraint in the
center rear seating position using the
LATCH system anchors. The child re-
straint will not be secured properly.
After the child restraint is removed and the seat
belt fully retracted, the automatic locking mode
(child restraint mode) is canceled.
● The LATCH system anchors are de-
signed to withstand only those loads
imposed by correctly fitted child re-
straints. Under no circumstance are
they to be used for adult seat belts or
harnesses.
WRS0440
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren) SYSTEM
The LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) anchor points are located in the seat
cushions of the rear outboard seating positions
only. Do not attempt to install a child restraint in
the center position using the LATCH anchors.
Some child restraints include two rigid or
webbing-mounted attachments that can be con-
nected to two anchors located at certain seating
positions in your vehicle. This system is known as
the LATCH system. This system may also be
referred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible
system. With this system, you do not have to use
a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint.
Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor
points that are used with LATCH system compat-
ible child restraints. Check your child restraint for
a label stating that it is compatible with the
The LATCH system anchors are located at the
rear of the seat cushion near the seatback. A
label is attached to the seatback to help you
locate the LATCH system anchors.
1-24 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LATCH system. This information may also be in
the instructions provided by the child restraint
manufacturer. If you have such a child restraint,
refer to the illustration for the seating positions
equipped with LATCH system anchors which can
be used to secure the child restraint.
1. To install the LATCH system compatible
child restraint, insert the child restraint
LATCH system anchor attachments into the
anchor points on the seat. If the child re-
straint is equipped with a top tether, see
“Top tether strap child restraint” later in this
section for installation instructions.
LATCH child restraints generally require the use
of a top tether strap. See “Top tether strap child
restraint” later in this section for installation in-
structions.
2. After attaching the child restraint and before
placing the child in it, use force to push the
child restraint from side to side and tug it
forward to make sure that the child restraint
is securely held in place. It should not move
more than 1 inch (25 mm).
When installing a child restraint, carefully read
and follow the instructions in this manual and
those supplied with the child restraint.
3. Check to make sure that the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use.
WRS0435
When you install a LATCH system compatible
child restraint to the lower anchor attachments,
follow these steps:
TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD
RESTRAINT
If your child restraint has a top tether strap, it must
be secured to the provided anchor point. First,
secure the child restraint with the rear seat belt.
WARNING
Inspect the lower anchors by inserting
your fingers into the lower anchor area
and feeling to make sure there are no
obstructions over the LATCH system an-
chors, such as seat belt webbing or seat
cushion material. The child restraint will
not be secured properly if the LATCH sys-
tem anchors are obstructed.
Flip up the anchor cover from the anchor point
which is located directly behind the child seat.
Position the top tether strap over the top of the
1
seatback
and secure it to the tether anchor
᭺
bracket that provides the straightest installation.
Tighten the strap according to the manufactur-
er’s instructions to remove any slack.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING
Child restraint anchor points are designed
to withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used for
adult seat belts or harnesses.
Anchor point locations
Anchor points are located on the rear parcel shelf
finisher.
If you have any questions when installing a
top strap child restraint on the rear seat,
consult your NISSAN dealer for details.
WRS0256
WRS0378
CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION
ON FRONT PASSENGER SEAT
● NISSAN recommends that child re-
straints be installed in the rear seat.
However, if you must install a forward
facing child restraint in the front pas-
senger seat, move the passenger seat
to the rearmost position. Also, be sure
the front passenger air bag status light
is illuminated to indicate the passenger
air bag is OFF. See “Front passenger air
bag and status light” later in this sec-
tion for details.
WARNING
● Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System, never install a rear-facing
child restraint in the front passenger
seat. Supplemental front air bags in-
flate with great force. A rear-facing
child restraint could be struck by the
supplemental front air bag in a crash
and could seriously injure or kill your
child.
● A child restraint with a top tether strap
should not be used in the front passen-
ger seat.
1-26 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
necessary, adjust or remove the head re-
straint to obtain the correct child restraint fit.
See “Head restraint adjustment” earlier in
this section. If the head restraint is removed,
store it in a secure place. Be sure to install
the head restraint when the child restraint is
removed. If the seating position does not
have an adjustable head restraint and it is
interfering with the proper child restraint fit,
try another seating position or a different
child restraint.
● The three-point seat belt in your vehicle
is equipped with an automatic locking
mode retractor which must be used
when installing a child restraint.
● Failure to use the retractor’s locking
mode will result in the child restraint
not being properly secured. The re-
straint could tip over or otherwise be
unsecured and cause injury to the child
in a sudden stop or collision. Also, it can
change the operation of the front pas-
senger air bag. See “Front passenger
air bag and status light” later in this
section.
WRS0379
Front Facing — step 1
If you must install a child restraint in the front seat,
follow these steps:
1
Position the child restraint on the front pas-
᭺
senger seat. It should be placed in a
front-facing direction only. Move the
seat to the rearmost position. Adjust the
head restraint to its highest position. Always
follow the child restraint manufacturer’s in-
structions. Child restraints for infants
must be used in the rear-facing direc-
tion and therefore must not be used in
the front seat.
The back of the child restraint should be
secured against the vehicle seat back. If
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WRS0159
WRS0160
LRS0457
Front Facing — step 2
Front Facing — step 3
Front Facing — step 4
2
3
4
Route the seat belt tongue through the child
restraint and insert it into the buckle until you
hear and feel the latch engage.
Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the belt is
fully extended. At this time, the seat belt
retractor is in the automatic locking mode
(child restraint mode). It reverts to emer-
gency locking mode when the seat belt is
fully retracted.
Allow the seat belt to retract slightly. Pull up
on the shoulder belt to remove any slack in
the belt.
᭺
᭺
᭺
Be sure to follow the child restraint manu-
facturer’s instructions for belt routing.
1-28 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BOOSTER SEATS
6. Check that the retractor is in the automatic
locking mode by trying to pull more seat belt
out of the retractor. If you cannot pull any
more belt webbing out of the retractor, the
retractor is in the automatic locking mode.
PRECAUTIONS ON BOOSTER
SEATS
WARNING
● Infants and small children should al-
ways be placed in an appropriate child
restraint while riding in the vehicle.
7. Check to make sure the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3
through 6.
Failure to use
a
child restraint or
booster seat can result in serious injury
or death.
8. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
The passenger air bag status light
should illuminate. If this light is not illumi-
nated see “Front passenger air bag and
status light” in this section. Move the child
restraint to another seating position.
Have the system checked by a NISSAN
dealer.
● Infants and small children should never
be carried on your lap. It is not possible
for even the strongest adult to resist the
forces of a severe accident. The child
could be crushed between the adult and
parts of the vehicle. Also, do not put the
same seat belt around both your child
and yourself.
WRS0380
Front Facing — step 5
5
Before placing the child in the child restraint,
use force to push the child restraint from
side to side, and tug it forward to make sure
that it is securely held in place. It should not
move more than 1 inch (25 mm). If it does
move more than 1 inch (25 mm), pull again
on the shoulder belt to further tighten the
child restraint. If unable to properly secure
the restraint move the restraint to another
seating position and try again , or try a differ-
ent child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in
all types of vehicles.
᭺
After the child restraint is removed and the seat
belt is fully retracted, the automatic locking mode
(child restraint mode) is canceled.
● NISSAN recommends that the booster
seat be installed in the rear seat. Ac-
cording to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seat than in the front seat.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
● A booster seat must only be installed in
a
seating position that has
a
a
a
lap/shoulder belt. Failure to use
three-point type seat belt with
booster seat can result in a serious in-
jury in sudden stop or collision.
● An improperly installed booster seat
could lead to serious injury or death in
an accident.
LRS0455
LRS0453
Booster seats of various sizes are offered by
several manufacturers. When selecting any
booster seat, keep the following points in mind:
WARNING
● Do not use towels, books, pillows or
other items in place of a booster seat.
Items such as these may move during
normal driving or a collision and result
in serious injury or death. Booster seats
●
Choose only a booster seat with a label
certifying that it complies with Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
are designed to be used with
a
lap/shoulder belt. Booster seats are de-
signed to properly route the lap and
shoulder portions of the seat belt over
the strongest portions of a child’s body
to provide the maximum protection dur-
ing a collision.
●
●
Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be
sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat
and seat belt system.
Make sure the child’s head will be properly
supported by the booster seat or vehicle
seat. The seat back must be at or above the
center of the child’s ears. For example, if a
1-30 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require that infants and small
children be restrained in an approved child
restraint at all times while the vehicle is
being operated.
● After placing the child in the booster
seat and fastening the seat belt, make
sure the shoulder portion of the belt is
away from the child’s face and neck and
the lap portion of the belt does not
cross the abdomen.
WARNING
● Do not put the shoulder belt behind the
child or under the child’s arm. If you
must install a booster seat in the front
seat, see “Booster seat installation on
front passenger seat” later in this
section.
● Improper use of a booster seat can in-
crease the risk or severity of injury for
both the child and other occupants of
the vehicle.
● Follow all of the booster seat manufac-
turer’s instructions for installation and
use. When purchasing a booster seat,
be sure to select one which will fit your
child and vehicle. It may not be possible
to properly install some types of
booster seats in your vehicle.
● When your booster seat is not in use,
keep it secured with a seat belt to pre-
vent it from being thrown around in
case of a sudden stop or accident.
LRS0464
1
low back booster seat
is chosen, the
᭺
vehicle seat back must be at or above the
center of the child’s ears. If the seat back is
lower than the center of the child’s ears, a
2
CAUTION
high back booster seat
should be used.
᭺
● If the booster seat and seat belt is not
used properly, the risk of a child being
injured in a collision or a sudden stop
greatly increases.
Remember that a booster seat left in a
closed vehicle can become very hot.
Check the seating surface and buckles
before placing your child in the booster
seat.
●
If the booster seat is compatible with your
vehicle, place your child in the booster seat
and check the various adjustments to be
sure the booster seat is compatible with your
child. Always follow all recommended pro-
cedures.
● Adjustable seatbacks should be posi-
tioned to fit the booster seat, but as
upright as possible.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. The booster seat should be positioned on
the vehicle seat so that it is stable. If neces-
sary, adjust or remove the head restraint to
obtain the correct booster seat fit. See
“Head restraint adjustment” earlier in this
section. If the head restraint is removed,
store it in a secure place. Be sure to install
the head restraint when the booster seat is
removed. If the seating position does not
have an adjustable head restraint and it is
interfering with the proper booster seat fit,
try another seating position or a different
booster seat.
3. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low
and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure to
follow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-
structions for adjusting the belt routing.
LRS0452
LRS0451
Outboard position
Center position
1. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only
place it in a front facing direction. Always
follow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-
structions.
BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION ON
REAR SEAT CENTER OR
4. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt
toward the retractor to take up extra slack.
Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned
across the top, middle portion of the child’s
shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat
manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the
belt routing.
OUTBOARD POSITIONS
CAUTION
Do not use a lap/shoulder belt automatic
locking mode when using a booster seat
with the seat belts. When you install a
booster seat in the rear seat follow these
steps:
5. Follow the warnings, cautions and instruc-
tions for properly fastening a seat belt
shown in the “Three-point seat belt with
retractor” earlier in this section.
1-32 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only
place it in a front facing direction. Always
follow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-
structions.
6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instruc-
tions for properly fastening a seat belt
shown in the “Three-point seat belt with
retractor” earlier in this section.
7. When the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position, the passenger air bag status
3. The booster seat should be positioned on
the vehicle seat so that it is stable. If neces-
sary, adjust or remove the head restraint to
obtain the correct booster seat fit. See
“Head restraint adjustment” earlier in this
section. If the head restraint is removed,
store it in a secure place. Be sure to install
the head restraint when the booster seat is
removed. If the seating position does not
have an adjustable head restraint and it is
interfering with the proper booster seat fit,
try another seating position or a different
booster seat.
light
may or may not be illuminated,
depending on the size of the child and the
type of booster seat being used. See “Front
passenger air bag and status light” later in
this section.
LRS0454
BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION ON
FRONT PASSENGER SEAT
4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low
and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure to
follow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-
structions for adjusting the belt routing.
WARNING
NISSAN recommends that child restraints
be installed in the rear seat. However, if
you must install a booster seat in the front
passenger seat, move the passenger’s
seat to the rearmost position.
5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt
toward the retractor to take up extra slack.
Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned
across the top, middle portion of the child’s
shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat
manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the
belt routing.
If you must install a booster seat in the front seat,
follow these steps:
1. Move the seat to the rear-most position.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM
These supplemental restraint systems are de-
signed to supplement the crash protection pro-
vided by the driver and front passenger seat belts
and are not a substitute for them. Seat belts
should always be correctly worn and the occu-
pant seated a suitable distance away from the
steering wheel, instrument panel and door finish-
ers. (See “Seat belts” earlier in this section for
instructions and precautions on seat belt usage.)
PRECAUTIONS ON
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM
This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) sec-
tion contains important information concerning
the driver and passenger supplemental front air
bags (NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System),
supplemental side air bags, curtain side-impact
air bags and pre-tensioner seat belts.
The supplemental air bags operate only
when the ignition switch is in the ON or
START position.
Supplemental front impact air bag system:
The NISSAN advanced air bag system can help
cushion the impact force to the head and chest of
the driver and front passenger in certain frontal
collisions.
After turning the ignition key to the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
warning light will turn off after about 7
seconds if the system is operational.
Supplemental side-impact air bag system
(if so equipped): This system can help cushion
the impact force to the chest and pelvic area of
the driver and front passenger in certain side
impact collisions. The supplemental side air bag
is designed to inflate on the side where the
vehicle is impacted.
Supplemental curtain side-impact air bag
system (if so equipped): This system can help
cushion the impact force to the head of occu-
pants in front and rear outboard seating positions
in certain side impact collisions. The curtain side-
impact air bags are designed to inflate on the side
where the vehicle is impacted.
1-34 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
● The seat belts and the supplemental
front air bags are most effective when
you are sitting well back and upright in
the seat. The front air bags inflate with
great force. Even with the NISSAN Ad-
vanced Air Bag System, if you are unre-
strained, leaning forward, sitting side-
ways or out of position in any way, you
are at greater risk of injury or death in a
crash. You may also receive serious or
fatal injuries from the supplemental
front air bag if you are up against it
when it inflates. Always sit back against
the seatback and as far away as practi-
cal from the steering wheel or instru-
ment panel. Always use the seat belts.
WRS0031
WARNING
● The driver and front passenger seat belt
buckles are equipped with sensors that
detect if the seat belts are fastened. The
advanced air bag system monitors the
severity of a collision and seat belt us-
age then inflates the air bags. Failure to
properly wear seat belts can increase
the risk or severity of injury in an
accident.
● The supplemental front air bags ordi-
narily will not inflate in the event of a
side impact, rear impact, rollover, or
lower severity frontal collision. Always
wear your seat belts to help reduce the
risk or severity of injury in various kinds
of accidents.
● The front passenger air bag will not
inflate if the passenger air bag status
light is lit or if the front passenger seat
is unoccupied. See “Front passenger air
bag and status light” later in this
section.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
● The front passenger seat is equipped
with an occupant classification sensor
(pressure sensor) that turns the front
passenger air bag OFF under some
conditions. This sensor is only used in
this seat. Failure to be properly seated
and wearing the seat belt can increase
the risk or severity of injury in an acci-
dent. See “Front Passenger air bag and
status light” later in this section.
● Keep hands on the outside of the steer-
ing wheel. Placing them inside the
steering wheel rim could increase the
risk that they are injured when the
supplemental front air bag inflates.
ARS1133
1-36 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ARS1041
ARS1042
ARS1043
WARNING
● Never let children ride unrestrained or
extend their hands or face out of the
window. Do not attempt to hold them in
your lap or arms. Some examples of
dangerous riding positions are shown
in the illustrations.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ARS1044
ARS1045
ARS1046
WARNING
● Children may be severely injured or
killed when the supplemental front air
bags, side air bags or curtain side-
impact air bags inflate if they are not
properly restrained. Pre-teens and chil-
dren should be properly restrained in
the rear seat, if possible.
1-38 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
● Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System, never install a rear-facing
child restraint in the front seat. An in-
flating supplemental front air bag could
seriously injure or kill your child. See
“Child restraints” earlier in this section
for details.
SSS0101
SSS0188
Do not lean against the door.
Do not lean against the door.
WARNING
Supplemental side air bag and curtain
side-impact air bag (if so equipped):
● The supplemental side air bag and cur-
tain side-impact air bag ordinarily will
not inflate in the event of a frontal im-
pact, rear impact, rollover or lower se-
verity side collision. Always wear your
seat belts to help reduce the risk or
severity of injury in various kinds of
accidents.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING
● The seat belts, the supplemental side
air bags and curtain side-impact air
bags are most effective when you are
sitting well back and upright in the seat.
The side air bag and curtain side-impact
air bag inflate with great force. Do not
allow anyone to place their hand, leg or
face near the side air bag on the side of
the seatback of the front seat or near
the side roof rails. Do not allow anyone
sitting in the front seats or rear out-
board seats to extend their hand out of
the window or lean against the door.
Some examples of dangerous riding
positions are shown in the previous
illustrations.
WRS0032
SSS0159
WARNING
● When sitting in the rear seat, do not
hold onto the seatback of the front seat.
If the side air bag inflates, you may be
seriously injured. Be especially careful
with children, who should always be
properly restrained. Some examples of
dangerous riding positions are shown
in the illustrations.
● Do not use seat covers on the front
seatbacks. They may interfere with
supplemental side air bag inflation.
1-40 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SSS0162
WRS0466
4. Diagnosis sensor unit
5. Supplemental front air bag modules
6. Crash zone sensor
1. SRS curtain side-impact air bag mod-
ules (if so equipped)
2. SRS curtain side-impact air bags (if so
7. Occupant classification system control
equipped)
unit
3. Supplemental side air bag modules (if
so equipped)
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an
indication of proper supplemental front air bag
system operation.
dealer. If you are considering modification of your
vehicle due to a disability, you may also contact
NISSAN. Contact information is contained in the
front of this Owner’s Manual.
8. Seat belt buckle switches on driver’s
and passenger’s side
9. Occupant classification sensor (pres-
sure sensor)
The NISSAN advanced air bag system has dual
stage inflators. It also monitors information from
the crash zone sensor, the diagnosis sensor unit,
seat belt buckle sensors, occupant classification
sensor (pressure sensor) and passenger seat
belt tension sensor. Inflator operation is based on
the severity of a collision and seat belt usage for
the driver. For the front passenger, it additionally
monitors the weight of an occupant or object on
the seat and seat belt tension. Based on informa-
tion from the sensors, only one front air bag may
inflate in a crash, depending on the crash severity
and whether the front occupants are belted or
unbelted. Additionally, the front passenger air
bag may be automatically turned OFF under
some conditions, depending on the weight de-
tected on the passenger seat and how the seat
belt is used. If the front passenger air bag is OFF,
the passenger air bag status light will be illumi-
nated (if the seat is unoccupied, the light will not
be illuminated, but the air bag will be off). See
“Front passenger air bag and status light” later in
this section for further details. One front air bag
inflating does not indicate improper performance
of the system.
10. Seat belt pre-tensioner retractor
11. Side satellite sensor
12. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
When a supplemental front air bag inflates, a
fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by the
release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and
does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken to
not inhale it, as it may cause irritation and chok-
ing. Those with a history of a breathing condition
should get fresh air promptly.
CHildren)
NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System
(front seats)
This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN ad-
vanced air bag system for the driver and front
passenger seats. This system is designed to
meet certification requirements under U.S. regu-
lations. It is also permitted in Canada. However,
all of the information, cautions and warn-
ings in this manual still apply and must be
followed.
Supplemental front air bags, along with the use of
seat belts, help to cushion the impact force on
the face and chest of the front occupants. They
can help save lives and reduce serious injuries.
However, an inflating front air bag may cause
facial abrasions or other injuries. Front air bags
do not provide restraint to the lower body.
Even with NISSAN advanced air bags, seat belts
should be correctly worn and the driver and pas-
senger seated upright as far as practical away
from the steering wheel or instrument panel. The
supplemental front air bags inflate quickly in order
to help protect the front occupants. Because of
this, the force of the front air bag inflating can
increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too
close to, or is against, the front air bag module
during inflation.
The driver supplemental front air bag is located in
the center of the steering wheel. The passenger
supplemental front air bag is mounted in the
dashboard above the glove box. The supplemen-
tal front air bags are designed to inflate in higher
severity frontal collisions, although they may in-
flate if the forces in another type of collision are
similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact.
They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions.
If you have any questions about your air bag
system, please contact NISSAN or your NISSAN
The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision.
1-42 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The supplemental front air bags operate
only when the ignition switch is in the ON
or START position.
Status light
The front passenger air bag status light
located under the climate controls. The light op-
erates as follows:
is
After turning the ignition key to the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
warning light will turn off after about 7
seconds if the system is operational.
●
●
Unoccupied passenger’s seat: The
OFF and the front passenger air bag is OFF
and will not inflate in a crash.
is
Passenger’s seat occupied by a small adult,
child or child restraint as outlined in this
section: The
illuminates to indicate
that the front passenger air bag is OFF and
will not inflate in a crash.
LRS0316
●
Occupied passenger seat and the passen-
ger meets the conditions outlined in this
Front passenger air bag and status light
section: The light
that the front passenger air bag is opera-
tional.
is OFF to indicate
WARNING
The front passenger air bag is designed to
automatically turn OFF under some con-
ditions. Read this section carefully to
learn how it operates. Proper use of the
seat, seat belt and child restraints is nec-
essary for most effective protection. Fail-
ure to follow all instructions in this
manual concerning the use of seats, seat
belts and child restraints can increase the
risk or severity of injury in an accident.
Front passenger air bag
The front passenger air bag is designed to auto-
matically turn OFF when the vehicle is operated
under some conditions as described below in
accordance with U.S. regulations. If the front
passenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate in a
crash. The driver air bag and other air bags in your
vehicle are not part of this system.
The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce
the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
to certain front passenger seat occupants, such
as children, by requiring the air bag to be auto-
matically turned OFF. Certain sensors are used
to meet the requirements.
Front passenger seat adult occupants who are
properly seated and using the seat belt as out-
lined in this manual should not cause the passen-
ger air bag to be automatically turned OFF. For
small adults it may be turned OFF, however if the
occupant takes his/her weight off the seat cush-
ion (for example, by not sitting upright, by sitting
on an edge of the seat, or by otherwise being out
of position), this could cause the sensor to turn
the air bag OFF. In addition, if the occupant
improperly uses the seat belt in the automatic
locking mode (child restraint mode), this could
cause the air bag to be turned OFF. Always be
sure to be seated and wearing the seat belt
properly for the most effective protection by the
seat belt and supplemental air bag.
of being OFF. See “Child restraints” earlier in this
section for proper use and installation.
If the front passenger seat is not occupied the
passenger air bag is designed not to inflate in a
crash. However, heavy objects placed on the
seat could result in air bag inflation, because of
the object’s weight detected by the occupant
classification sensor. Other conditions could also
result in air bag inflation, such as if a child is
standing on the seat, or if two children are on the
seat, contrary to the instructions in this manual.
Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants
are seated and restrained properly.
One sensor used is the occupant classification
sensor (pressure sensor). It is in the bottom of the
front passenger seat cushion and is designed to
detect an occupant and objects on the seat by
weight. It works together with seat belt sensors
described later. For example, if a child is in the
front passenger seat, the advanced air bag sys-
tem is designed to turn the passenger air bag
OFF in accordance with the regulations. Also, if a
child restraint of the type specified in the regula-
tions is on the seat, its weight and the child’s
weight can be detected and cause the air bag to
turn OFF. Occupant classification sensor opera-
tion can vary depending on the front passenger
seat belt sensors.
Using the passenger air bag status light, you can
monitor when the front passenger air bag is au-
tomatically turned OFF with the seat occupied.
The light will not illuminate when the front pas-
senger seat is unoccupied.
NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and chil-
dren be properly restrained in a rear seat.
NISSAN also recommends that appropriate child
restraints and booster seats be properly installed
in a rear seat. If this is not possible, the occupant
classification sensor and seat belt sensors are
designed to operate as described above to turn
the front passenger air bag OFF for specified
child restraints as required by the regulations.
Failing to properly secure child restraints and to
use the automatic locking mode (child restraint
mode) may allow the restraint to tip or move in an
accident or sudden stop. This can also result in
the passenger air bag inflating in a crash instead
If an adult occupant is in the seat but the passen-
ger air bag status light is illuminated (indicating
that the air bag is OFF), it could be that the
person is a small adult, or is not sitting on the seat
properly or not using the seat belt properly.
The front passenger seat belt sensors are de-
signed to detect if the seat belt is buckled and the
amount of tension on the seat belt, such as when
it is in the automatic locking mode (child restraint
mode). Based on the weight on the seat detected
by the occupant classification sensor and the belt
tension detected on the seat belt, the advanced
air bag system determines whether the front pas-
senger air bag should be automatically turned
OFF as required by the regulations.
If a child restraint must be used in the front seat,
the passenger air bag status light may or may not
be illuminated, depending on the size of the child
and the type of child restraint being used. If the
passenger air bag status light is not illuminated
(indicating that the air bag might inflate in a
1-44 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
crash), it could be that the child restraint or seat
belt is not being used properly. In rare cases, the
passenger air bag status light will not illuminate
even though the air bag is OFF.
Other supplemental front air bag precau-
tions
● Tampering with the supplemental front
air bag system may result in serious
personal injury. Tampering includes
changes to the steering wheel and the
instrument panel assembly by placing
material over the steering wheel pad
and above the instrument panel or by
installing additional trim material
around the air bag system.
WARNING
If such situations happen, properly position and
restrain the occupant or child restraint. Other-
wise reposition the occupant or child restraint in
a rear seat. If you have any questions about
whether your passenger air bag is working as
designed, your NISSAN dealer can confirm that it
is working properly by using a special tool.
● Do not place any objects on the steer-
ing wheel pad or on the instrument
panel. Also, do not place any objects
between any occupant and the steering
wheel or instrument panel. Such ob-
jects may become dangerous projec-
tiles and cause injury if the supplemen-
tal front air bag inflates.
● Modifying or tampering with the front
passenger seat may result in serious
personal injury. For example, do not
change the front seats by placing mate-
rial on the seat cushion or by installing
additional trim material, such as seat
covers, on the seat that are not specifi-
cally designed to assure proper air bag
operation. Additionally, do not stow any
objects under the front passenger seat
or the seat cushion and seatback. Such
objects may interfere with the proper
operation of the occupant classifica-
tion sensor (pressure sensor).
The air bag system and passenger air bag status
light will take a few seconds to register a change
in the passenger seat status. For example, if a
large adult who is sitting in the front passenger
seat exits the vehicle, the passenger air bag
status light will go from OFF to ON for a few
seconds and then to OFF. This is normal system
operation and does not indicate a malfunction.
● Immediately after inflation, several
front air bag system components will be
hot. Do not touch them; you may se-
verely burn yourself.
● No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the supplemental air bag system. This is
to prevent accidental inflation of the
supplemental air bag or damage to the
supplemental air bag system.
If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air
bag system, the supplemental air bag warning
light
, located in the meter and gauges area
in the center of the instrument panel, will blink.
Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.
● Do not make unauthorized changes to
your vehicle’s electrical system, sus-
pension system or front end structure.
This could affect proper operation of
the supplemental front air bag system.
● No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the seat belt system. This may affect the
supplemental front air bag system.
Tampering with the seat belt system
may result in serious personal injury.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
severity side collisions, although they may inflate
if the forces in another type of collision are similar
to those of a higher severity side impact. They are
designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle
is impacted. They may not inflate in certain side
collisions.
● Work on and around the supplemental
front air bag system should be done by
a NISSAN dealer. Installation of electri-
cal equipment should also be done by a
NISSAN dealer. The Supplemental Re-
straint System (SRS) wiring should not
be modified or disconnected. Unautho-
rized electrical test equipment and
probing devices should not be used on
the air bag system.
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an
indication of proper supplemental side air bag
and curtain side-impact air bag operation.
When the supplemental side air bag and curtain
side-impact air bag inflate, a fairly loud noise may
be heard, followed by release of smoke. This
smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire.
Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may
cause irritation and choking. Those with a history
of a breathing condition should get fresh air
promptly.
● A cracked windshield should be re-
placed immediately by a qualified re-
pair facility. A cracked windshield could
affect the function of the supplemental
air bag system.
LRS0259
Supplemental side-impact air bag and
curtain side-impact air bags system (if
so equipped)
● The SRS wiring harness connectors are
yellow
and
orange
for
easy
identification.
Supplemental side air bags, along with the use of
seat belts, help to cushion the impact force on
the chest and pelvic area of the front occupants.
Curtain side-impact air bags help to cushion the
impact force to the head of occupants in the front
and rear outboard seating positions. They can
help save lives and reduce serious injuries. How-
ever, an inflating side air bag and curtain side-
impact air bag may cause abrasions or other
injuries. Supplemental side air bags and curtain
side-impact air bags do not provide restraint to
the lower body.
The supplemental side-impact air bags are lo-
cated in the outside of the seatback of the front
seats. The supplemental curtain side-impact air
bags are located in the side roof rails. These
systems are designed to meet voluntary guide-
lines to help reduce the risk of injury to out-of-
position occupants. However, all of the infor-
mation, cautions and warnings in this
manual still apply and must be followed.
The supplemental side air bags and curtain side-
impact air bags are designed to inflate in higher
When selling your vehicle, we request that you
inform the buyer about the supplemental front air
bag system and guide the buyer to the appropri-
ate sections in this Owner’s Manual.
1-46 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The seat belts should be correctly worn and the
driver and passenger seated upright as far as
practical away from the supplemental side air
bag. Rear seat passengers should be seated as
far away as practical from the door finishers and
side roof rails. The side air bags and curtain
side-impact air bag inflate quickly in order to help
protect the front occupants. Because of this, the
force of the side air bag and curtain side-impact
air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if
the occupant is too close to, or is against, these
air bag modules during inflation. The side air bag
and curtain side-impact air bag will deflate
quickly after the collision is over.
● Tampering with the supplemental side
air bag system may result in serious
personal injury. For example, do not
change the front seats by placing mate-
rial near the seatbacks or by installing
additional trim material, such as seat
covers, around the side air bag.
WARNING
● Do not place any objects near the seat-
back of the front seats. Also, do not
place any objects (an umbrella, bag,
etc.) between the front door finisher
and the front seat. Such objects may
become dangerous projectiles and
cause injury if the supplemental side air
bag inflates.
● Work around and on the curtain air bag
system should be done by a NISSAN
dealer. Installation of electrical equip-
ment should also be done by a NISSAN
dealer. The SRS wiring harnesses*
should not be modified or discon-
nected. Unauthorized electrical test
equipment and probing devices should
not be used on the side air bag or cur-
tain air bag system.
● Right after inflation, several side air bag
and curtain side-impact air bag system
components will be hot. Do not touch
them; you may severely burn yourself.
● No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the side air bag and curtain side-impact
air bag system. This is to prevent acci-
dental inflation of the side air bag and
curtain side-impact air bag or damage
to the side air bag and curtain side-
impact air bag system.
The supplemental side air bags and curtain
side-impact air bags operate only when the
ignition switch is in the ON or START posi-
tions.
* The SRS wiring harness connectors are
yellow and orange for easy identification.
After turning the ignition key to the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
warning light will turn off after about 7
seconds if the system is operational.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you
inform the buyer about the supplemental side air
bag and curtain side-impact air bag system and
guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this
Owner’s Manual.
● Do not make unauthorized changes to
your vehicle’s electrical system, sus-
pension system or side panel. This
could affect proper operation of the
supplemental side air bag and curtain
side-impact air bag system.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
cause irritation and choking. Those with a history
of a breathing condition should get fresh air
promptly.
Pre-tensioner seat belt system (Front
seats)
● Work around and on the pre-tensioner
system should be done by a NISSAN
dealer. Installation of electrical equip-
ment should also be done by a NISSAN
dealer. Unauthorized electrical test
equipment and probing devices should
not be used on the pre-tensioner seat
belt system.
After the pre-tensioner seat belts have activated,
load limiters allow the seat belt to release web-
bing (if necessary) to reduce forces against the
chest.
WARNING
● The pre-tensioner seat belt cannot be
reused after activation. It must be re-
placed together with the retractor and
buckle as a unit.
If any abnormality occurs in the pre-tensioner
system, the supplemental air bag warning
● If you need to dispose of the pre-
tensioner or scrap the vehicle, contact a
NISSAN dealer. Correct pre-tensioner
disposal procedures are set forth in the
appropriate NISSAN Service Manual.
Incorrect disposal procedures could
cause personal injury.
● If the vehicle becomes involved in a
frontal collision but the pre-tensioner is
not activated, be sure to have the pre-
tensioner system checked and, if nec-
essary, replaced by your NISSAN
dealer.
light
will not come on, will flash intermit-
tently or will turn on for 7 seconds and remain on
after the ignition key has been turned to the ON or
START position. In this case, the pre-tensioner
seat belt may not function properly. They must be
checked and repaired. Take your vehicle to the
nearest NISSAN dealer.
● No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the pre-tensioner seat belt system. This
is to prevent accidental activation of
the pre-tensioner seat belt or damage
to the pre-tensioner seat belt operation.
Tampering with the pre-tensioner seat
belt system may result in serious per-
sonal injury.
The front seat pre-tensioner seat belt system
activates in conjunction with the supplemental air
bag systems. Working with the seat belt retrac-
tor, it helps tighten the seat belt when the vehicle
becomes involved in certain types of collisions,
helping to restrain front seat occupants.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you
inform the buyer about the pre-tensioner seat belt
system and guide the buyer to the appropriate
sections in this Owner’s Manual.
The pre-tensioner is encased with the seat belt’s
retractor. These seat belts are used the same as
conventional seat belts.
When the pre-tensioner seat belt activates,
smoke is released and a loud noise may be heard.
This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a
fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may
1-48 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the ignition key is in the ON or START
position, the supplemental air bag warning light
illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns
off. This means the system is operational.
If any of the following conditions occur, the
supplemental front air bag, supplemental side air
bag and curtain side-impact air bag (if so
equipped) and pre-tensioner seat belt systems
need servicing:
●
●
●
The supplemental air bag warning light re-
mains on after approximately 7 seconds.
The supplemental air bag warning light
flashes intermittently.
WRS0169
LRS0100
1. SRS air bag warning labels
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG
WARNING LIGHT
The supplemental air bag warning light does
not come on at all.
2. SRS side air bag warning label (if so
equipped)
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG
WARNING LABELS
Under these conditions, the supplemental front
air bag, supplemental side air bags and curtain
side-impact air bag (if so equipped) or pre-
tensioner seat belt systems may not operate
properly. It must be checked and repaired. Take
your vehicle to the nearest NISSAN dealer.
The supplemental air bag warning light,
displaying in the instrument panel, moni-
tors the circuits of the supplemental front air bag,
supplemental side air bag and curtain side-
impact air bag (if so equipped) and pre-tensioner
seat belt systems. The circuits monitored by the
supplemental air bag warning light are the diag-
nosis sensor unit, crash zone sensor, satellite
sensors, front air bag modules, side air bag mod-
ules, curtain side-impact air bag modules, pre-
tensioner seat belts and all related wiring.
Warning labels about the supplemental front air
bag systems are placed in the vehicle as shown
in the illustration.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING
WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning light
is on, it could mean that the supplemental
front air bag, supplemental side air bag,
curtain side-impact air bag systems (if so
equipped) and/or pre-tensioner seat belt
systems will not operate in an accident. To
help avoid injury to yourself or others,
have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN
dealer as soon as possible.
● Once a supplemental front air bag,
supplemental side air bag or curtain
side-impact air bag has inflated, the air
bag module will not function again and
must be replaced. Additionally, if any of
the supplemental front air bags inflate,
the activated pre-tensioner seat belts
must also be replaced. The air bag mod-
ule and pre-tensioner seat belt system
should be replaced by a NISSAN dealer.
The air bag module and pre-tensioner
seat belt system cannot be repaired.
Repair and replacement procedure
The supplemental front air bags, supplemental
side air bags, curtain side-impact air bags (if so
equipped) and pre-tensioner seat belts are de-
signed to inflate on a one-time-only basis. As a
reminder, unless it is damaged, the supplemental
air bag warning light remains illuminated after
inflation has occurred. Repair and replacement of
these supplemental air bag systems should be
done only by a NISSAN dealer.
● The supplemental front air bag, side air
bag and curtain side-impact air bag sys-
tems, and the pre-tensioner seat belt
system should be inspected by
a
NISSAN dealer if there is any damage to
the front end or side portion of the
vehicle.
● If you need to dispose of the supple-
mental air bag, pre-tensioner seat belt
system or scrap the vehicle, contact a
NISSAN dealer. Correct supplemental
air bag and pre-tensioner seat belt sys-
tem disposal procedures are set forth in
the appropriate NISSAN Service
Manual. Incorrect disposal procedures
could cause personal injury.
When maintenance work is required on the ve-
hicle, the supplemental front air bags, supple-
mental side air bags, curtain side-impact air bags
(if so equipped), pre-tensioner seat belts and
related parts should be pointed out to the person
performing the maintenance. The ignition key
should always be in the LOCK position when
working under the hood or inside the vehicle.
1-50 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MEMO
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Headlight control switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21
Daytime running light system (Canada only) . . . . . .2-24
Trip computer (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Engine oil pressure gauge (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 2-9
Voltmeter (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Fuel consumption gauge (if so equipped) . . . . . . . .2-10
Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . .2-11
Checking bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11
Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Security systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Vehicle security system (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . .2-16
Nissan vehicle immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped)
Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24
Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25
Fog light switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25
Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26
Heated seat (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27
Traction control system (TCS) off switch
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28
Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28
Cigarette lighter and ashtray (if so equipped) . . . . . . . .2-29
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30
Map pockets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30
Seatback pockets (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30
Sunglasses holder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32
Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33
Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33
Instrument panel storage (if so equipped) . . . . . . . .2-34
Covered storage box (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . .2-35
Grocery hooks (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36
defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cargo net (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37
Sunroof (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39
Automatic sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40
Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41
Trunk light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42
HomeLinkா universal transceiver (if so equipped). . . . .2-42
Programming HomeLinkா. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43
Programming HomeLinkா for Canadian
customers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44
Operating the HomeLinkா universal
transceiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44
Programming trouble-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44
Clearing the programmed information. . . . . . . . . . . .2-44
Rolling code programming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44
Reprogramming a single HomeLinkா button . . . . . .2-45
If your vehicle is stolen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Driver, center and passenger ventila-
tors (P. 4-11)
Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn
signal switch (P. 2-21)
Steering wheel switch for audio control
(if so equipped) (P. 4-40)
Driver supplemental air bag/horn
(P. 1-34, 2-26)
5.
6.
Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)
Cruise control main/set switch
(if so equipped) (P. 5-15)
Windshield wiper/washer switch
(P. 2-19)
7.
8.
9.
Storage (if so equipped) (P. 2-30)
Glove box (P. 2-33)
10. Front passenger supplemental air bag
(P. 1-34)
11. Heater and air conditioner (manual or
automatic) (P. 4-11, P. 4-20)
12. Power outlet or cigarette lighter
(if so equipped) (P. 2-28, P. 2-29)
13. Heated seat switch (if so equipped)
(P. 2-27)
14. Shift selector lever (P. 5-7)
15. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 2-26)
16. Storage or ashtray (if so equipped)
(P. 2-30, P .2-29)
WIC0902
2-2 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
METERS AND GAUGES
17. Front passenger air bag status light
(P. 1-43)
18. Audio system controls (if so equipped)
(P. 4-23)
19. Ignition switch (P. 5-4)
20. Tilt/telescopic steering wheel controls
(P. 3-13)
21. Traction control system (TCS) off
switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-28)
22. Instrument brightness control (P. 2-24)
23. Trunk opener (P. 3-10)
24. Meters and gauges (if so equipped)
(P. 2-3)
25. Navigation system* (if so equipped)
(P. 4-2)
26. Navigation system* controls
(if so equipped) (P. 4-2)
*: Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-
er’s Manual.
See the page number indicated in paren-
theses for operating details.
LIC0681
6. Odometer/twin trip odometer/trip com-
puter (if so equipped)
1. Tachometer
2. Warning/indicator lights
3. Speedometer
4. Engine coolant temperature gauge
5. Fuel gauge
Instruments and controls 2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Odometer/Twin trip odometer (if so
equipped)
The odometer/twin trip odometer (if so equipped)
is displayed when the ignition key is in the ON
position.
The odometer records the total distance the ve-
hicle has been driven.
The twin trip odometer (if so equipped) records
the distance of individual trips.
LIC0746
LIC0682
Triple meter (if so equipped):
1. Fuel consumption gauge
2. Engine oil pressure gauge
3. Voltmeter
1. Speedometer
2. Odometer/twin trip display
3. Change button
SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER
Speedometer
The speedometer indicates vehicle speed in
miles per hour (MPH) and kilometers per hour
(km/h).
2-4 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TRIP COMPUTER (if so equipped)
The display of the trip computer is situated in the
speedometer display. When the ignition is turned
to ON, the display scrolls all the modes of the trip
computer and then shows the mode chosen be-
fore the ignition switch is turned OFF.
WIC0601
LIC0719
Display without navigation system
Display with navigation system
Changing the display:
For vehicles equipped with trip computer and
navigation system, pushing the change button
changes the display as follows:
For vehicles equipped with trip computer and
without navigation system, pushing the change
button changes the display as follows:
Trip
→ Trip
→ Trip
→ Outside temperature
Trip
→ Trip
→ Outside temperature
→ Distance to Empty → Average economy →
For vehicles with navigation system, refer to
“How to use the ’trip’ button” in the “Display
screen, heater, air conditioner and audio sys-
tems” section later in this manual.
Average speed → Elapsed time → Trip
For additional information, refer to “Trip com-
puter” later in this section.
Resetting the trip odometer:
Pushing the change button for more than 1 sec-
ond resets the trip odometer to zero.
Instruments and controls 2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
button to toggle to the next mode, if desired. The
ICY indicator will remain illuminated as long as
the temperature remains below 39°F (4°C).
NOTE:
●
If the amount of fuel added while the
ignition switch is OFF is small, the dis-
play just before the ignition switch is
turned OFF may continue to be dis-
played.
The ambient temperature sensor is located in
front of the radiator. The sensor may be affected
by road or engine heat, wind directions and other
driving conditions. The display may differ from the
actual ambient temperature or the temperature
displayed on various signs or billboards.
●
When driving uphill or rounding curves,
the fuel in the tank shifts, which may
momentarily change the display.
Distance to empty (dte—mile or km)
Average fuel consumption (mpg or
l/100km)
The distance to empty (dte) mode provides you
with an estimation of the distance that can be
driven before refueling. The dte is constantly be-
ing calculated, based on the amount of fuel in the
fuel tank and the actual fuel consumption.
The average fuel consumption mode shows the
average fuel consumption since the last reset.
Resetting is done by pressing the trip or change
button for more than approximately 1 second.
The display is updated every 30 seconds. At
about the first 1/3 miles (500 m) after a reset, the
display shows (----).
LIC0683
When the ignition switch is turned to ON, modes
of the trip computer can be selected by pushing
the trip button on the steering wheel switch for
audio controls or by the trip computer change
button located near the speedometer. The fol-
lowing modes can be selected:
The display is updated every 30 seconds.
The dte mode includes a low range warning
feature: when the fuel level is low, the dte mode is
automatically selected and the digits blink in or-
der to draw the driver’s attention. Press the trip or
change button if you wish to return to the mode
that was selected before the warning occurred.
The dte mark (dte) will remain blinking until the
vehicle is refueled.
Average speed (mph or km/h)
Outside air temperature (ICY-°F or °C)
The average speed mode shows the average
vehicle speed since last reset. Resetting is done
by pressing the trip or change button for more
than approximately 1 second. The display is up-
dated every 30 seconds. The first 30 seconds
after a reset, the display shows (----).
The outside air temperature is displayed in °F or
°C.
The outside air temperature mode includes a low
temperature warning feature: below 37°F (3°C),
the outside air temperature mode is automatically
selected and ICY will illuminate in order to draw
the driver’s attention. Press the trip or change
When the fuel level drops even lower, the dte
display will change to (----).
2-6 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Journey time
The journey time mode shows the time since the
last reset. The displayed time can be reset by
pressing the trip or change button for more than
approximately 1 second.
NOTE:
If a low temperature warning and low range
warning occur simultaneously, other dis-
play modes switch automatically to the
outside temperature display.
LIC0684
LIC0715
Type A
Type B
TACHOMETER
The tachometer indicates engine speed in revo-
lutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev engine into
1
the red zone
.
᭺
CAUTION
When engine speed approaches the red
zone, shift to a higher gear. Operating the
engine in the red zone may cause serious
engine damage.
Instruments and controls 2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION
If the gauge indicates coolant tempera-
ture near the hot (H) end of the normal
range, reduce vehicle speed to decrease
temperature. If the gauge is over the nor-
mal range, stop the vehicle as soon as
safely possible. If the engine is over-
heated, continued operation of the ve-
hicle may seriously damage the engine.
See “If your vehicle overheats” in the “In
case of emergency”section for immediate
action required.
LIC0685
LIC0686
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
GAUGE
FUEL GAUGE
The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level
in the tank.
The gauge indicates the engine coolant tempera-
ture. The engine coolant temperature is within the
The gauge may move slightly during braking,
turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.
1
normal range
within the zone shown in the illustration.
when the gauge needle points
᭺
The gauge needle returns to E (Empty) after the
ignition key is turned to OFF.
The engine coolant temperature varies with the
outside air temperature and driving conditions.
The low fuel warning light comes on when the
amount of fuel in the tank is getting low.
Refill the fuel tank before the gauge regis-
ters E (Empty).
2-8 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The
indicates that the fuel-filler door is
located on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
CAUTION
● If the vehicle runs out of fuel,
the
(MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon as
possible. After few driving trips,
the light should turn off. If the
malfunction indicator light
a
light remains on after a few driving
trips, have the vehicle inspected by a
NISSAN dealer.
LIC0749
LIC0752
● For additional information, see “Mal-
function indicator light (MIL)” later in
this section.
Type A
Type B
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE (if
so equipped)
CAUTION
● This gauge is not designed to indicate
low engine oil level. Use the dipstick to
check the oil level. (See “Engine oil” in
the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”
section.)
The gauge indicates the engine lubrication sys-
tem oil pressure while the engine is running.
When the engine speed is high, the engine oil
pressure is also high. When the engine speed is
low, the gauge may indicate low oil pressure.
● If the gauge needle does not move with
the proper amount of engine oil, have
the vehicle checked by
a
NISSAN
dealer. Continued vehicle operation in
such a condition could cause serious
damage to the engine.
Instruments and controls 2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LIC0751
LIC0803
LIC0750
Type A
Type B
VOLTMETER (if so equipped)
FUEL CONSUMPTION GAUGE (if so
equipped)
When the ignition key is turned to the ON posi-
tion, the voltmeter indicates the battery voltage.
When the engine is running, it indicates the gen-
erator voltage.
This gauge shows the APPROXIMATE fuel con-
sumption while you are driving.
While cranking the engine, the volts drop below
the normal range. If the needle is not in the normal
The vehicle speed must be 7 mph (11.2 km/h) or
greater for the gauge to give a reading.
1
range (12 - 14.5 volts)
while the engine is
᭺
running, it may indicate that the charging system
is not functioning properly. Have the system
checked by a NISSAN dealer.
2-10 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND
AUDIBLE REMINDERS
or
Anti-lock braking warning light
(if so equipped)
Low windshield washer fluid warning light
Seat belt warning light and chime
Supplemental air bag warning light
Trunk lid open warning light
Front passenger air bag status light
High beam indicator light (Blue)
Malfunction indicator light (MIL)
Slip indicator light (if so equipped)
Automatic transmission check warning light
(if so equipped)
or
Brake warning light
Charge warning light
Door open warning light
Engine oil pressure warning light
Low fuel warning light
Automatic transmission position indicator light
(A/T models)
Traction control system off indicator light
(if so equipped)
CRUISE main switch indicator light
(if so equipped)
Turn signal/hazard indicator lights
Cruise SET switch indicator light
(if so equipped)
The following lights come on briefly and then go
off:
CHECKING BULBS
WARNING LIGHTS
or Anti-lock braking
With all doors closed, apply the parking brake
and turn the ignition key to the ON position
without starting the engine. The following lights
will come on:
or
,
,
,
,
warning light (if so
equipped)
If any light fails to come on, it may indicate
a burned-out bulb or an open circuit in the
electrical system. Have the system repaired
promptly.
If the light comes on while the engine is running,
it may indicate the anti-lock braking system is not
functioning properly. Have the system checked
by a NISSAN dealer.
,
or
,
,
,
Instruments and controls 2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a malfunction occurs in the system, the anti-
lock function is turned off, but the regular braking
system continues to operate.
1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid
as necessary. See “Brake fluid”in the “Main-
tenance and do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
Charge warning light
If this light comes on while the engine is running,
it may indicate the charging system is not func-
tioning properly. Turn the engine off and check
the generator belt. If the belt is loose, broken,
missing, or if the light remains on, see a NISSAN
dealer immediately.
If the light comes on while you are driving,
contact a NISSAN dealer for repair.
2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the
warning system checked by a NISSAN
dealer.
Automatic transmission check
warning light (if so equipped)
WARNING
CAUTION
When the ignition switch is turned ON, the light
comes on for about 2 seconds. If the light comes
on at any other time, it may indicate the automatic
transmission system is not functioning properly.
Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.
● Your brake system may not be working
properly if the warning light is on. Driv-
ing could be dangerous. If you judge it
to be safe, drive carefully to the nearest
service station for repairs. Otherwise,
have your vehicle towed because driv-
ing it could be dangerous.
Do not continue driving if the generator
belt is loose, broken or missing.
Door open warning light
or
Brake warning light
This light comes on when any of the doors are not
closed securely while the ignition key is in the ON
position.
This light functions for both the parking brake and
the foot brake systems.
● Pressing the brake pedal with the en-
gine stopped and/or a low brake fluid
level may increase your stopping dis-
tance and braking will require greater
pedal effort as well as pedal travel.
Engine oil pressure warning
light
Parking brake indicator
When the ignition key is in the ON position, the
light comes on when the parking brake is applied.
This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If the
light flickers or comes on during normal driving,
pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engine
immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or other
authorized repair shop.
● If the brake fluid level is below the
MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake
fluid reservoir, do not drive until the
brake system has been checked at a
NISSAN dealer.
Low brake fluid warning light
When the ignition key is in the ON position, the
light warns of a low brake fluid level. If the light
comes on while the engine is running with the
parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle and
perform the following:
The engine oil pressure warning light is not
designed to indicate a low oil level. Use the
2-12 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
dipstick to check the oil level. See “Engine oil” in
the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of
this manual.
(if so equipped), and pre-tensioner seat belt sys-
tems need servicing and your vehicle must be
taken to a NISSAN dealer:
Seat belt warning light and
chime
The light and chime remind you to fasten your
seat belts. The light illuminates whenever the
ignition key is turned to the ON or START position
and remains illuminated until the driver’s seat belt
is fastened. At the same time, the chime sounds
for about 6 seconds unless the driver’s seat belt
is securely fastened.
●
●
●
The supplemental air bag warning light re-
mains on after approximately 7 seconds.
CAUTION
Running the engine with the engine oil
pressure warning light on could cause se-
rious damage to the engine almost imme-
diately. Such damage is not covered by
warranty. Turn off the engine as soon as it
is safe to do so.
The supplemental air bag warning light
flashes intermittently.
The supplemental air bag warning light does
not come on at all.
The seat belt warning light may also illuminate if
the front passenger’s seat belt is not fastened
when the front passenger’s seat is occupied (if
so equipped). For 5 seconds after the ignition
switch is in the ON position, the system does not
activate the warning light for the front passenger.
Unless checked and repaired, the supplemental
restraint system (air bag system) and/or the pre-
tensioner seat belts may not function properly.
For additional details see “Supplemental restraint
system” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system” section of this
manual.
Low fuel warning light
This light comes on when the fuel level in the fuel
tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is conve-
nient, preferably before the fuel gauge reaches E
(Empty). There will be a small reserve of fuel
in the tank when the fuel gauge needle
reaches E (Empty).
Refer to “Seat belts” in the “Safety—Seats, seat
belts and supplemental restraint system” section
for precautions on seat belt usage.
WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning light
is on, it could mean that the supplemental
front air bag, supplemental side air bag (if
so equipped), curtain side-impact air bag
systems (if so equipped) and/or pre-
tensioner seat belt systems will not oper-
ate in an accident. To help avoid injury to
yourself or others, have your vehicle
checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible.
Supplemental air bag warning
light
Low windshield washer fluid
warning light
When the ignition key is in the ON or START
position, the supplemental air bag warning light
illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns
off. This means the system is operational.
This light comes on when the windshield washer
fluid is at a low level. Add windshield washer fluid
as necessary. See “Window washer fluid” in the
“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
If any of the following conditions occur, the
supplemental front air bag, supplemental side air
bag (if so equipped), curtain side-impact air bags
Instruments and controls 2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the cruise control system is not functioning prop-
erly. Have the system checked by a NISSAN
dealer.
The malfunction indicator light may also come on
steady if the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, or if
the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make sure
the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed tightly,
and that the vehicle has at least 3 gallons (11.4
liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.
Trunk lid open warning light
This light comes on when the trunk lid is not
securely closed while the ignition key is in the ON
position.
Front passenger air bag
status light
INDICATOR LIGHTS
The front passenger air bag status light (
)
After a few driving trips, the
light should
Automatic transmission
position indicator light (A/T
models)
will be lit and the passenger front air bag will be
OFF depending on how the front passenger seat
is being used.
turn off if no other potential emission control
system malfunction exists.
If this indicator light comes on steady for 20
seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds when
the engine is not running, it indicates that the
vehicle is not ready for an emission control sys-
tem inspection/maintenance test. See “Readi-
ness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test”in the
“Technical and consumer information” section of
this manual.
When the ignition key is turned to the ON posi-
tion, this indicator light shows the automatic
transmission selector lever position. See “Driving
the vehicle” in the “Starting and driving” section
of this manual.
For front passenger air bag status light operation,
see “Front passenger air bag and status light” in
the “Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental
restraint system” section of this manual.
High beam indicator light
(Blue)
Cruise main switch indicator
light (if so equipped)
This blue light comes on when the headlight high
beams are on and goes out when the low beams
are selected.
Operation
The light comes on when the cruise control main
switch is pushed. The light goes out when the
main switch is pushed again. When the cruise
main switch indicator light comes on, the cruise
control system is operational.
The malfunction indicator light will come on in
one of two ways:
The high beam indicator light also comes on
when the passing signal is activated.
●
Malfunction indicator light on steady — An
emission control system malfunction has
been detected. Check the fuel-filler cap. If
the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, tighten
or install the cap and continue to drive the
Cruise set switch indicator
light (if so equipped)
Malfunction indicator light
(MIL)
The light comes on while the vehicle speed is
controlled by the cruise control system. If the light
blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate
If this indicator light comes on steady or blinks
while the engine is running, it may indicate a
potential emission control malfunction.
vehicle. The
a few driving trips. If the
turn off after a few driving trips, have the
light should turn off after
light does not
2-14 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer. You
do not need to have your vehicle towed to
the dealer.
tor light while you are driving, have the traction
control system checked by a NISSAN dealer.
Slip indicator light (if so
equipped)
While the traction control system is operating,
you might feel slight vibration or hear the system
working when starting the vehicle or accelerat-
ing, but this is normal.
This indicator light will blink when the traction
control system is limiting wheel spin. Slippery
road conditions may exist if the slip indicator
blinks on. If this happens, adjust your driving
accordingly.
●
Malfunction indicator light blinking — An en-
gine misfire has been detected which may
damage the emission control system. To re-
duce or avoid emission control system dam-
age:
Turn signal/hazard indicator
lights
The slip indicator light also comes on when you
turn the ignition key to the ON position. The light
will turn off after about 2 seconds if the system is
operational. If the light does not come on or does
not go off, have the traction control system
checked by a NISSAN dealer.
– do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH
(72 km/h).
The appropriate light flashes when the turn signal
switch is activated.
– avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.
– avoid steep uphill grades.
Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turned
on.
– if possible, reduce the amount of cargo
being hauled or towed.
Traction control system off
AUDIBLE REMINDERS
Brake pad wear warning
indicator light (if so equipped)
The malfunction indicator light may stop blinking
and come on steady. Have the vehicle inspected
by a NISSAN dealer. You do not need to have
your vehicle towed to the dealer.
This indicator light comes on when the traction
control off switch is pushed to OFF. This indi-
cates the traction control system is not operating.
The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings.
When a disc brake pad requires replacement, it
makes a high pitched scraping sound when the
vehicle is in motion, whether or not the brake
pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as
soon as possible if the warning sound is heard.
Push the traction control off switch again or re-
start the engine and the system will operate nor-
mally. See “Traction control system (TCS)” in the
“Starting and driving” section of this manual.
CAUTION
Continued vehicle operation without hav-
ing the emission control system checked
and repaired as necessary could lead to
poor driveability, reduced fuel economy,
and possible damage to the emission con-
trol system.
Key reminder chime
The traction control light also comes on when you
turn the ignition key to the ON position. The light
will turn off after about 2 seconds if the traction
control system (TCS) is operational. If the light
stays on or comes on along with the SLIP indica-
A chime sounds if the driver’s door is opened
while the key is left in the ignition switch. Remove
the key and take it with you when leaving the
vehicle.
Instruments and controls 2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECURITY SYSTEMS
The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot
prevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior or
exterior vehicle components in all situations. Al-
ways secure your vehicle even if parking for a
brief period. Never leave your keys in the ignition,
and always lock the vehicle when unattended. Be
aware of your surroundings, and park in secure,
well-lit areas whenever possible.
Light reminder chime
With the ignition switch in the OFF position, a
chime sounds when the driver’s door is opened if
the headlights or parking lights are on.
Turn the headlight control switch off before leav-
ing the vehicle.
Many devices offering additional protection, such
as component locks, identification markers, and
tracking systems, are available at auto supply
stores and specialty shops. Your NISSAN dealer
may also offer such equipment. Check with your
insurance company to see if you may be eligible
for discounts for various theft protection features.
LIC0301
Your vehicle may have two types of security sys-
tems:
How to arm the vehicle security
system
●
●
Vehicle security system (if so equipped)
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
1. Close all windows. (The system can be
armed even if the windows are open.)
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM (if so
equipped)
2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
3. Close the trunk lid and all doors. Lock all
doors. The doors can be locked with the key,
power door lock switch (if the door is
opened, locked, and then closed) or with the
keyfob.
The vehicle security system provides visual and
audible alarm signals if someone opens the doors
or trunk lid when the system is armed. It is not,
however, a motion detection type system that
activates when a vehicle is moved or when a
vibration occurs.
Keyfob operation:
2-16 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
● Push the
button on the keyfob.
●
If the key is turned slowly when locking
the driver’s door, the system may not
arm. Furthermore, if the key is turned
beyond the vertical position toward the
unlock position to remove the key, the
system may be disarmed when the key
is removed. If the indicator light fails to
glow for 30 seconds, unlock the door
once and lock it again.
The alarm is activated by:
All doors lock. The hazard lights flash
twice and the horn beeps once to indicate
all doors are locked.
●
opening the door or trunk lid without using
the key or keyfob (even if the door is un-
locked by releasing the door inside lock
switch).
● When the
button is pushed with
all doors locked, the hazard lights flash
twice and the horn beeps once as a re-
minder that the doors are already locked.
How to stop an activated alarm
The alarm stops only by unlocking the driver’s
door or the trunk lid with the key, or by pressing
For vehicles with navigation system, see
ЉVehicle electronic systemsЉ in the ЉDisplay
screen, heater, air conditioner and audio
systemsЉ section later in this manual. For
vehicles without navigation system, see ЉSi-
lencing the horn beep featureЉ in the ЉPre-
driving checks and adjustmentsЉ section
later in this manual.
●
Even when the driver and/or passen-
gers are in the vehicle, the system will
the
button on the keyfob.
arm with all doors and trunk lid closed NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
and locked with the ignition key in the
SYSTEM
OFF position.
The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not
allow the engine to start without the use of a
registered key.
Vehicle security system activation
The vehicle security system will give the following
alarm:
If the engine fails to start using a registered key
(for example, when interference is caused by
another registered key, an automated toll road
device or automatic payment device on the key
ring), restart the engine using the following pro-
cedures:
4. Confirm that the security indicator light
comes on. The security light stays on for
about 30 seconds. The vehicle security sys-
tem is now pre-armed. After about 30 sec-
onds the vehicle security system automati-
cally shifts into the armed phase. The
security light begins to flash once every 3
seconds. If, during the 30-second pre-arm
time period, the driver’s door is unlocked by
the key or the keyfob, or the ignition key is
turned to ACC or ON, the system will not
arm.
●
The headlights blink and the horn sounds
intermittently.
●
The alarm automatically turns off after ap-
proximately 50 seconds. However, the alarm
reactivates if the vehicle is tampered with
again. The alarm can be shut off by unlocking
the driver’s door or trunk lid with the key, or
1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position
for approximately 5 seconds.
by pressing the
button on the keyfob.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK
position, and wait approximately 10 sec-
onds.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.
Instruments and controls 2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Restart the engine while holding the device
(which may have caused the interference)
separate from the registered key.
If the light still remains on and/or the en-
gine will not start, see a NISSAN dealer for
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ser-
vice as soon as possible. Please bring all
keys that you have when visiting your
NISSAN dealer for service.
If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec-
ommends placing the registered key on a sepa-
rate key ring to avoid interference from other
devices.
Statement related to Section 15 of FCC
Rules for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-
tem (CONT ASSY — IMMOBILIZER, ANT
ASSY — IMMOBILIZER)
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the follow-
ing two conditions;
WIC0270
Security indicator light (NISSAN
Vehicle Immobilizer System)
(1) This device may not cause harmful in-
terference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired opera-
tion of the device.
1
The security indicator light
is located on the
᭺
instrument panel near the windshield.
The security indicator light blinks every 3 sec-
onds whenever the ignition switch is in the
LOCK, OFF or ACC position. This function indi-
cates the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is
operational.
CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EX-
PRESSLY APPROVED BY THE PARTY RE-
SPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCE COULD
VOID THE USER’S AUTHORITY TO OPER-
ATE THE EQUIPMENT.
If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is mal-
functioning, the light will remain on while the
ignition key is in the ON position.
2-18 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER
SWITCH
NOTE:
● Do not fill the window washer reservoir
tank with washer fluid concentrates at
full strength. Some methyl alcohol
based washer fluid concentrates may
permanently stain the grille if spilled
while filling the window washer reser-
voir tank.
You can turn on or turn off the speed de-
pendent wiper function (if so equipped).
Refer to “Vehicle electronic systems” (ve-
hicles with navigation system) in the “Dis-
play screen, heater, air conditioner and au-
dio systems” section later in this manual.
● Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with
water to the manufacturer’s recom-
mended levels before pouring the fluid
into the window washer reservoir tank.
Do not use the window washer reservoir
tank to mix the washer fluid concen-
trate and water.
2
Low — continuous low speed operation
᭺
3
High — continuous high speed operation
᭺
4
Push the lever up
tion of the wiper.
to have one sweep opera-
᭺
5
WIC0854
Pull the lever toward you
washer. The wiper will also operate several times.
to operate the
᭺
SWITCH OPERATION
The windshield wiper and washer switch oper-
ates when the ignition key is in the ON position.
WARNING
In freezing temperatures the washer solu-
tion may freeze on the windshield and
obscure your vision which may lead to an
accident. Warm the windshield with the
defroster before you wash the windshield.
Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the
following speed:
1
Intermittent — intermittent operation can be
᭺
A
adjusted by turning the knob toward
᭺
B
(Slower) or
(Faster). Also, for vehicles
᭺
CAUTION
equipped with speed dependent wipers, the
intermittent operation speed varies in accor-
dance with the vehicle speed. (For example,
when the vehicle speed is high, the intermit-
tent operation speed will be faster.)
● Do not operate the washer continu-
ously for more than 30 seconds.
● Do not operate the washer if the reser-
voir tank is empty.
Instruments and controls 2-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE
MIRROR (if so equipped)
DEFROSTER SWITCH
LIC0720
LIC0689
WIC0725
Type B
Type C
Type A
To defrost the rear window glass and outside
mirrors (if so equipped), start the engine and
push the rear window defroster switch on. The
rear window defroster indicator light on the
switch comes on. Push the switch again to turn
the defroster off.
NOTE:
The top few rows of wires on the rear win-
dow are not part of the rear window de-
froster system. These wires make up the
antenna for the audio system.
The rear window defroster automatically turns off
after approximately 15 minutes.
CAUTION
When cleaning the inner side of the rear
window, be careful not to scratch or dam-
age the rear window defroster.
2-20 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL
SWITCH
(for example, when the vehicle stops at
a traffic signal). Even when the daytime
running lights are active (Canada only),
the xenon headlights do not turn on.
This way the life of the xenon head-
lights is not reduced.
XENON HEADLIGHTS (if so
equipped)
WARNING
HIGH VOLTAGE
Ꮨ
●
If the xenon headlight bulb is close to
burning out, the brightness will drasti-
cally decrease, the light will start blink-
ing, or the color of the light will be-
come reddish. If one or more of the
above signs appear, contact a NISSAN
dealer.
● When xenon headlights are on, they
produce a high voltage. To prevent an
electric shock, never attempt to modify
or disassemble. Always have your xe-
non headlights replaced at a NISSAN
dealer.
● Xenon headlights provide considerably
more light than conventional head-
lights. If they are not correctly aimed,
they might temporarily blind an oncom-
ing driver or the driver ahead of you and
cause a serious accident. If headlights
are not aimed correctly, immediately
take your vehicle to a NISSAN dealer
and have the headlights adjusted
correctly.
LIC0560
Type A
HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH
Lighting
1
When turning the switch to the
posi-
᭺
tion, the front parking, tail, license plate and
instrument panel lights come on.
2
When turning the switch to the
tion, the headlights come on and all the other
lights remain on.
posi-
When the xenon headlight is initially turned on, its
brightness or color varies slightly. However, the
color and brightness will soon stabilize.
᭺
●
The life of xenon headlights will be
shortened by frequent on-off opera-
tion. It is generally desirable not to turn
off the headlights for short intervals
Instruments and controls 2-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LIC0687
LIC0688
LIC0561
Type B
Type C
Autolight system (if so equipped)
CAUTION
The autolight system allows the headlights to be
set so they turn on and off automatically. The
autolight system can:
Use the headlights with the engine run-
ning to avoid discharging the vehicle
battery.
●
Turn on the headlights, front parking, tail,
license plate and instrument panel lights au-
tomatically when it is dark.
●
●
Turn off all the lights when it is light.
Keep all the lights on for 45 seconds after
you turn the key to OFF and all doors are
closed.
2-22 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOTE:
Autolight activation sensitivity and the
time delay for autolight shutoff is adjust-
able for vehicles with navigation system.
See “Vehicle electronic systems” in the
“Display screen, heater, air conditioner and
audio systems”section later in this manual.
To turn on the autolight system:
1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO posi-
1
tion
.
᭺
2. Turn the ignition key to ON.
3. The autolight system automatically turns the
headlights on and off.
WIC0274
LIC0562
Be sure you do not put anything on top of
1
Headlight beam select
Initially, if the ignition switch is turned OFF and a
door is opened and left open, the headlights
remain ON for 5 minutes. If another door is
opened during the 5 minutes, then the 5 minute
timer is reset.
the autolight sensor
located on the top
᭺
1
To select the high beam function, push the
lever forward. The high beam lights come on
side of the instrument panel. The autolight
sensor controls the autolight; if it is cov-
ered, the autolight sensor reacts as if it is
dark out and the headlights will illuminate.
If this occurs while parked with the engine
off and the key in the ON position, your
vehicle’s battery could become discharged.
᭺
and the
light illuminates.
2
Pull the lever back to select the low beam.
᭺
To turn the autolight system off, turn the switch to
3
Pulling and releasing the lever flashes the
headlight high beams on and off.
the OFF,
, or
position.
᭺
Battery saver system
If the ignition switch is turned OFF while the
headlight switch is in the
or
posi-
tion, the headlights will turn off after 5 minutes.
Instruments and controls 2-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION
WARNING
Even though the battery saver feature au-
tomatically turns off the headlights after a
period of time, you should turn the head-
light switch to the OFF position when the
engine is not running to avoid discharging
the vehicle battery.
When the daytime running light system is
active, tail lights on your vehicle are not
on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on your
headlights. Failure to do so could cause
an accident injuring yourself and others.
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM
(Canada only)
The headlights automatically illuminate at a re-
duced intensity when the engine is started with
the parking brake released. The daytime running
lights operate with the headlight switch in the
LIC0392
INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL
OFF position or in the
headlight switch to the
position. Turn the
position for full
illumination when driving at night.
The instrument cluster illuminates when the igni-
tion switch is in ON position.
If the parking brake is applied before the engine is
started, the daytime running lights do not illumi-
nate. The daytime running lights illuminate when
the parking brake is released. The daytime run-
ning lights will remain on until the ignition switch
is turned off.
The instrument brightness control operates when
the headlight control switch is in the
AUTO,
or
position.
Turn the control to adjust the brightness of instru-
ment panel lights when driving at night.
The instrument brightness control will not adjust
the brightness when the headlights or parking
lights are off.
2-24 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The headlights must be on and the low beams
selected for the fog lights to operate. The fog
lights automatically turn off when the high beam
headlights are selected.
LIC0563
LIC0564
FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped)
To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight switch
TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
Turn signal
to the
switch to the
position, then turn the fog light
position.
1
Move the lever up or down to signal the
turning direction. When the turn is com-
pleted, the turn signals cancel automatically.
᭺
To turn the fog lights on with the headlight switch
in the AUTO position (if so equipped), the head-
lights must be on, then turn the fog light switch to
Lane change signal
the
position.
2
To signal a lane change, move the lever up or
down to the point where the indicator light
begins to flash, but the lever does not latch.
᭺
To turn the fog lights off, turn the fog light switch
to the OFF position.
Instruments and controls 2-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
SWITCH
HORN
● Turn signals do not work when the haz-
ard warning flasher lights are on.
The flashers will operate with the ignition switch
in any position.
Some state laws may prohibit the use of
the hazard warning flasher switch while
driving.
LIC0394
LIC0395
To sound the horn, push the center pad area of
the steering wheel.
Push the switch on to warn other drivers when
you must stop or park under emergency condi-
tions. All turn signal lights flash.
WARNING
WARNING
Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so
could affect proper operation of the
supplemental front air bag system. Tam-
pering with the supplemental front air bag
system may result in serious personal
injury.
● If stopping for an emergency, be sure to
move the vehicle well off the road.
● Do not use the hazard warning flashers
while moving on the highway unless
unusual circumstances force you to
drive so slowly that your vehicle might
become a hazard to other traffic.
2-26 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HEATED SEAT (if so equipped)
3. When the seat is warmed or before you
leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the switch
off.
● The battery could run down if the seat
heater is operated while the engine is
not running.
CAUTION
● Do not use the seat heater for extended
periods or when no one is using the
seat.
● Do not put anything on the seat which
insulates heat, such as a blanket, cush-
ion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat
may become overheated.
● Do not place anything hard or heavy on
the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar
object. This may result in damage to the
heater.
LIC0690
The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters (if
so equipped). The switches are located on the
center console.
● Any liquid spilled on the heated seat
should be removed immediately with a
dry cloth.
1. Start the engine.
2. Push the low or high position of the switch,
as desired, depending on the temperature.
The indicator light in the switch will illumi-
nate.
● When cleaning the seat, never use
gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any simi-
lar materials.
● If any abnormalities are found or the
heated seat does not operate, turn the
switch off and have the system checked
by your NISSAN dealer.
The heater is controlled by a thermostat,
automatically turning the heater on and off.
The indicator light will remain on as long as
the switch is on.
Instruments and controls 2-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (TCS)
OFF SWITCH (if so equipped)
POWER OUTLET
LIC0714
WIC0699
LIC0451
Instrument panel (if so equipped)
Console
The vehicle should be driven with the Traction Con-
trol System (TCS) on for most driving conditions.
● Do not use with accessories that ex-
ceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.
Do not use double adapters or more
than one electrical accessory.
The power outlets are for powering electrical
accessories such as cellular telephones. They
are rated at 12 volt, 120W (10A) maximum.
If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the TCS
reduces the engine output to reduce wheel spin.
The engine speed will be reduced even if the
accelerator is depressed to the floor. If maximum
engine power is needed to free a stuck vehicle,
turn the TCS off.
● Use power outlets with the engine run-
ning to avoid discharging the vehicle
battery.
CAUTION
● The outlet and plug may be hot during
or immediately after use.
To turn off the TCS, push the TCS OFF switch.
● Avoid using power outlets when the air
conditioner, headlights or rear window
defroster is on.
● Only certain power outlets are designed
for use with a cigarette lighter unit. Do
not use any other power outlet for an
accessory lighter. See your NISSAN
dealer for additional information.
The
indicator will come on.
Push the TCS OFF switch again or restart the
engine to turn ON the system. See “Traction con-
trol system (TCS)” in the “Starting and driving”
section.
2-28 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CIGARETTE LIGHTER AND ASHTRAY
(if so equipped)
● Before inserting or disconnecting a
plug, be sure the electrical accessory
being used is turned OFF.
CAUTION
● The cigarette lighter should not be used
while driving so full attention may be
given to vehicle operation.
● Push the plug in as far as it will go. If
good contact is not made, the plug may
overheat or the internal temperature
fuse may open.
● The outlet and plug may be hot during
or immediately after use.
● Do not use any other power outlet for an
accessory lighter.
● When not in use, be sure to close the
cap. Do not allow water to contact the
outlet.
● Do not use with accessories that ex-
ceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.
Do not use double adapters or more
than one electrical accessory.
LIC0692
● Use power outlets with the engine run-
ning to avoid discharging the vehicle
battery.
The cigarette lighter operates when the ignition
switch is in the ACC or ON position.
A
Lift the lid
to open.
● Avoid using power outlets when the air
conditioner, headlights or rear window
defroster is on.
᭺
B
Push the lighter
lighter is heated, it will spring out. Return the
lighter to its original position after use.
in all the way. When the
᭺
● Before inserting or disconnecting a
plug, be sure the electrical accessory
being used is turned OFF.
C
Pull out the ashtray
to remove it.
᭺
This power outlet can also be used for powering
electrical accessories such as cellular tele-
phones.
● Push the plug in as far as it will go. If
good contact is not made, the plug may
overheat or the internal temperature
fuse may open.
Instruments and controls 2-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STORAGE
● When not in use, be sure to close the
cap. Do not allow water to contact the
outlet.
LIC0016
WIC0700
Type A
SEATBACK POCKETS (if so
equipped)
MAP POCKETS
The seatback pockets are located on the back of
the driver’s and passenger’s seats. The pockets
can be used to store maps.
2-30 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
● Do not leave sunglasses in the sun-
glasses holder while parking in direct
sunlight. The heat may damage the
sunglasses.
WIC0747
WIC0609
Type B
SUNGLASSES HOLDER
To open the sunglasses holder, push and release.
WARNING
● The sunglasses holder should not be
used while driving so full attention may
be given to vehicle operation.
● Keep the sunglasses holder closed
while driving to prevent an accident.
CAUTION
● Do not use for anything other than
sunglasses.
Instruments and controls 2-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
● Use only soft cups in the cup holder.
Hard objects can injure you in an
accident.
WIC0691
WRS0167
Front
Rear
CUP HOLDERS
WARNING
To open the front cup holders, push the cup
holder lid. To close, lower the cup holder lid and
push down until it clicks in place.
The cup holder should not be used while
driving so full attention may be given to
vehicle operation.
The plastic insert may be removed for cleaning.
CAUTION
The rear cup holders are located in the fold-down
armrest in the rear seat back.
● Avoid abrupt starting and braking when
the cup holder is being used to prevent
spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it
can scald you or your passenger.
The rubber insert may be removed for cleaning.
2-32 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONSOLE BOX
WARNING
The center console box should not be
used while driving so full attention may be
given to vehicle operation.
WIC0374
LIC0701
GLOVE BOX
Upper half
Open the glove box by pulling the handle. Use the
Pull up on the driver’s side latch to open the
upper half of the console box. The felt mat may be
removed for cleaning.
1
2
master key when locking
glove box. The valet key cannot be used to lock or
unlock the glove box.
or unlocking
the
᭺
᭺
The upper half of the console box may be used for
storage of cellular phones. An access hole is
provided at the rear of the upper half of the
console box for phone cord routing to the power
outlet.
WARNING
Keep glove box lid closed while driving to
help prevent injury in an accident or a
sudden stop.
To route a phone cord to the power outlet:
1. Open the upper half of the console box.
2. Remove the felt mat, and then remove the
cutout area from the mat.
Instruments and controls 2-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Remove the access hole cover.
4. Install the felt mat.
5. Route the phone cord through the access
hole and plug into the power outlet.
LIC0702
Lower half
Pull up on the passenger’s side latch to open the
lower half of the console box. A power outlet is
located inside the console box and there is stor-
age for compact discs.
LIC0703
INSTRUMENT PANEL STORAGE (if
so equipped)
To open the storage tray, push upward and re-
lease. The storage tray will automatically move to
the open position.
2-34 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
The inside of the storage tray can get hot. Do
not place objects inside which can melt or
be easily deformed.
WARNING
● The storage tray should not be used
while driving so full attention may be
given to vehicle operation.
● Keep the tray lid closed while driving to
help prevent contents from becoming
projectiles causing injury in an accident
or during a sudden stop.
LIC0721
LIC0694
If so equipped
COVERED STORAGE BOX (if so
equipped)
Push the bottom center of the lid to open.
Instruments and controls 2-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LIC0748
GROCERY HOOKS (if so equipped)
The grocery hooks are located in the trunk and
can be used to hang a standard size plastic
grocery bag.
CAUTION
Do not apply a total load of more than 20
lbs (9 kg) to a single grocery hook.
WIC0733
2-36 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WINDOWS
CARGO NET (if so equipped)
POWER WINDOWS
WARNING
WARNING
● Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding or
shifting. In a sudden stop or collision,
unsecured cargo could cause personal
injury.
● Make sure that all passengers have
their hands, etc. inside the vehicle while
it is in motion and before closing the
windows. Use the window lock switch
to prevent unexpected use of the power
windows.
● Be sure to secure all four hooks into the
retainers. The cargo restrained in the
net must not exceed 30 lbs. (13.6 kg) or
the net may not stay secured.
● Do not leave children unattended inside
the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-
tivate switches or controls and become
trapped in a window. Unattended chil-
dren could become involved in serious
accidents.
LIC0802
CAUTION
To install the cargo net, attach the net to the
retainers.
Do not strike the navigation system map
DVD-ROM player (if so equipped) while
loading the trunk and do not place heavy
objects on the player. Doing so could
cause improper operation or damage the
system.
The power windows operate when the ignition
switch is in the ON position, or for about 45
seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the
OFF position. If the driver’s or passenger’s door
is opened during this period of about 45 sec-
onds, power to the windows is canceled.
To remove the cargo net, detach the net from the
cargo net retainers.
The cargo net helps keep packages in the cargo
area from moving around while the vehicle is in
motion.
Instruments and controls 2-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LIC0705
LIC0695
LIC0718
1. Power door lock switch
2. Window lock button
3. Front passenger side (automatic switch,
Front passenger’s power window
Rear power window switch
switch
The rear power window switches open or close
only the corresponding windows. To open the
The passenger’s window switch operates only
the corresponding passenger’s window. To open
if so equipped)
1
window, push the switch and hold it down . To
᭺
4. Right rear passenger side
5. Left rear passenger side
6. Driver side automatic switch
2
close the window, pull the switch up
.
1
᭺
the window, push the switch and hold it down
.
᭺
2
To close the window, pull the switch up
.
᭺
Locking passengers’ windows
When the window lock button is depressed, only
the driver’s side window can be opened or
closed. Push it again to cancel the window lock
function.
Driver’s side power window switch
The driver’s side control panel is equipped with
switches to open or close all of the windows.
To open a window, push the switch and hold it
down. To close a window, pull the switch up. To
stop the opening or closing function at any time,
simply release the switch.
2-38 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SUNROOF (if so equipped)
Auto-reverse function
If the control unit detects something caught in the
window as it is closing, the window will be imme-
diately lowered.
The auto-reverse function can be activated when
the window is closed by automatic operation
when the ignition key is in the ON position or for
45 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the
OFF position.
Depending on the environment or driving
conditions, the auto-reverse function may
be activated if an impact or load similar to
something being caught in the window oc-
curs.
LIC0717
LIC0679
Automatic operation
AUTOMATIC SUNROOF
WARNING
To fully open a window equipped with automatic
operation, press the window switch down (only
driver’s side shown) to the second detent and
release it; it need not be held. The window auto-
matically opens all the way. To stop the window,
lift the switch up while the window is opening.
The sunroof will only operate when the ignition
key is in the ON position. The automatic sunroof
is operational for about 45 seconds, even if the
ignition key is turned to the ACC or OFF position.
If the driver’s door or the front passenger’s door
is opened during this period of about 45 sec-
onds, power to the sunroof is canceled.
There are some small distances immedi-
ately before the closed position which
cannot be detected. Make sure that all
passengers have their hands, etc., inside
the vehicle before closing the window.
To fully close a window equipped with automatic
operation, pull the switch up to the second detent
and release it; it need not be held.
Sliding the sunroof
To fully open the sunroof, push the switch toward
1
the
position
.
᭺
To fully close the sunroof, push and hold the
2
switch toward the
position
.
᭺
Instruments and controls 2-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INTERIOR LIGHT
To open the sunroof part way, push the switch in
any direction while the sunroof is sliding open to
stop it in the desired position.
WARNING
● In an accident you could be thrown from
the vehicle through an open sunroof.
Always use seat belts and child
restraints.
To close the sunroof part way, push and hold the
switch until the sunroof is in the desired position.
● Do not allow anyone to stand up or
extend any portion of their body out of
the sunroof opening while the vehicle is
in motion or while the sunroof is
closing.
Tilting the sunroof
To tilt the sunroof up, push the tilt switch to
3
the
position
.
᭺
To tilt the sunroof down, push and hold the tilt
4
switch to the
position
.
᭺
CAUTION
Restarting the sunroof sliding switch
● Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand
WIC0264
from the sunroof before opening.
The sliding switch will become inoperable after
the battery terminal is disconnected, the electri-
cal supply interrupted and/or some abnormality
detected. Use the following reset procedure to
return sunroof operation to normal.
The interior light has a three-position switch and
operates regardless of ignition switch position.
● Do not place heavy objects on the sun-
roof or surrounding area.
1
When the switch is in the ON position
, the
᭺
Sunshade
interior lights illuminate, regardless of door posi-
tion. The lights will go off after about 30 minutes
unless the ignition key is in the ACC or ON
position.
Open and close the sunshade by sliding it for-
ward or backward.
1. From any sunroof position (fully open, par-
tially open, closed, partially vented or
vented), push and hold the tilt switch toward
3
If the sunroof does not close
the
position
until the sunroof vents
When the switch is in the center O position, the
interior lights will stay on for about 30 seconds
when:
᭺
in the full-up position.
Have your NISSAN dealer check and repair the
sunroof.
The sunroof should now operate normally.
●
The doors are unlocked by the keyfob (if so
equipped), a key or the power door lock
switch while all doors are closed and the
ignition switch is in the OFF position.
2-40 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAP LIGHTS
●
●
The driver’s door is opened and then closed
while the key is removed from the ignition
switch.
NOTE:
The door step lights illuminate when the
driver and passenger doors are open re-
gardless of the interior light switch posi-
tion. These lights will turn off automatically
after about 30 minutes while doors are
open to prevent the battery from becoming
discharged.
The key is removed from the ignition switch
while all doors are closed.
The lights will turn off while the 30 second timer is
activated when:
●
The driver’s door is locked by the keyfob (if
so equipped), a key, or the power door lock
switch.
CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could result
in a discharged battery.
●
The ignition switch is turned ON.
WIC0289
2
When the switch is in the OFF position
, the
᭺
interior lights do not illuminate, regardless of door
position.
Models without sunroof
To turn the map lights on, press the switches. To
turn them off, press the switches again.
The lights will turn off automatically after 30 min-
utes while doors are open to prevent the battery
from becoming discharged.
CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could result
in a discharged battery.
Instruments and controls 2-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TRUNK LIGHT
HOMELINKா UNIVERSAL
TRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)
The light illuminates when the trunk lid is opened.
When the trunk lid is closed, the light goes off.
The HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver provides a
convenient way to consolidate the functions of up
to three individual hand-held transmitters into
one built-in device.
The light will go off after about 30 minutes if the
trunk lid is left open, unless the ignition key is in
the ACC or ON position.
HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver:
For bulb replacement procedures, refer to “Exte-
rior and interior lights” in the “Maintenance and
do-it-yourself” section of this manual.
●
Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF)
devices such as garage doors, gates, home
and office lighting, entry door locks and se-
curity systems.
●
Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. No
separate batteries are required. If the vehi-
cle’s battery is discharged or is discon-
nected, HomeLinkா will retain all program-
ming.
LIC0696
Models with sunroof
Once the HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver
is programmed, retain the original trans-
mitter for future programming procedures
(Example: new vehicle purchases). Upon
sale of the vehicle, the programmed
HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver buttons
should be erased for security purposes. For
additional information refer to “Program-
ming HomeLinkா” later in this section.
2-42 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Using both hands, simultaneously push the
hand-held transmitter button and the de-
sired HomeLinkா button. Do not release the
buttons until step 4 has been completed.
WARNING
● Do not use the HomeLinkா Universal
Transceiver with any garage door
opener that lacks safety stop and re-
verse features as required by federal
safety standards. (These standards be-
came effective for opener models
manufactured after April 1, 1982). A ga-
rage door opener which cannot detect
an object in the path of a closing garage
door and then automatically stop and
reverse, does not meet current federal
safety standards. Using a garage door
opener without these features in-
creases the risk of serious injury or
death.
NOTE:
Some garage door openers may require the
procedures noted under “Canadian Pro-
gramming.”
4. The HomeLinkா indicator will flash, first
slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator
light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be
released. The rapid flashing light indicates
the HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver has
been successfully programmed.
WIC0291
PROGRAMMING HOMELINKா
To program the remaining two buttons, follow
steps 2 through 4.
1. With the ignition key in the OFF position,
press and hold the two outside buttons, and
release when the indicator light begins to
flash (after 20 seconds). This procedure
erases the factory set default codes and
does not have to be followed when program-
ming additional hand-held transmitters.
● During the programming procedure
your garage door or security gate will
open and close (if the transmitter is
within range). Make sure that people or
objects are clear of the garage door,
gate, etc. that you are programming.
If , after repeated attempts, you do not success-
fully program the HomeLinkா Universal Trans-
ceiver to learn the signal of the hand-held trans-
mitter, refer to “Rolling Code Programming” later
in this section.
● Your vehicle’s engine should be turned
off while programming the HomeLinkா
Universal Transceiver.
If you have any questions or are having difficulty
programming your HomeLinkா buttons, refer to
the HomeLinkா web site at: www.homelink.com
or call 1-800-355-3515.
2. Hold the end of the hand-held transmitter
(from the device you wish to train) approxi-
mately 1 - 3 inches (26 - 76 mm) away from
the surface of HomeLinkா keeping the indi-
cator light in view.
Instruments and controls 2-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINKா FOR
CANADIAN CUSTOMERS
PROGRAMMING TROUBLE-
DIAGNOSIS
CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED
INFORMATION
Prior to 1992, D.O.C. regulations required hand-
held transmitters to stop transmitting after 2 sec-
onds. To program your hand-held transmitter to
HomeLinkா, continue to press and hold the
HomeLinkா button (note steps 2 - 4 under “Pro-
gramming HomeLinkா”) while you press and re-
press (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitters every
2 seconds until the indicator light flashes rapidly
(indicating successful programming).
If the HomeLinkா does not quickly learn the hand-
held transmitter information:
Individual buttons cannot be cleared. However,
to clear all programming, press and hold the two
outside buttons and release when the indicator
light begins to flash (approximately 20 seconds).
●
●
replace the hand-held transmitter batteries
with new batteries.
ROLLING CODE PROGRAMMING
position the hand-held transmitter with its
battery area facing away from the
HomeLinkா surface.
Rolling code garage door openers (or other roll-
ing code devices) which are “code protected”
and manufactured after 1996, may be deter-
mined by the following:
●
●
press and hold both the HomeLinkா and
hand-held transmitter buttons without inter-
ruption.
NOTE:
●
Reference the garage door opener Owner’s
Manual for verification.
When programming a garage door opener,
etc., it is advised to unplug the device dur-
ing the “cycling” process to prevent pos-
sible damage to the garage door opener
components.
position the hand-held transmitter 1 - 3
inches (26
-
76 mm) away from the
●
The hand-held transmitter appears to pro-
gram the HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver
but does not activate the garage door.
HomeLinkா surface. Hold the transmitter in
that position for up to 15 seconds. If
HomeLinkா is not programmed within that
time, try holding the transmitter in another
position – keeping the indicator light in view
at all times.
●
Press and hold the trained HomeLinkா but-
ton. If the garage door opener has the rolling
code feature, the HomeLinkா indicator light
will flash rapidly, then remains on after 2
seconds.
OPERATING THE HOMELINKா
UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER
The HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver (once pro-
grammed) may now be used to activate the ga-
rage door, etc. To operate, simply press the ap-
propriate programmed HomeLinkா Universal
Transceiver button. The red indicator light will
illuminate while the signal is being transmitted.
If you continue to have programming difficulties,
please contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs
Department. The phone numbers are located in
the Foreword of this manual.
To program the HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver
to a garage door opener with the rolling code
feature, follow these instructions after completing
the “Programming HomeLink” (the aid of a sec-
ond person may make the following procedures
quicker and easier).
2-44 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Locate the training button on the garage
door opener motor unit. Exact location and
color of the button may vary by garage door
opener brand. If there is difficulty locating
the training button, reference the garage
door opener Owner’s Manual.
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE
IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN
HOMELINKா BUTTON
If your vehicle is stolen, you should change the
codes of any non-rolling code device that has
been programmed into HomeLinkா. Consult the
Owner’s Manual of each device or call the manu-
facturer or dealer of those devices for additional
information.
To reprogram a HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver
button, complete the following.
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLinkா but-
ton. Do not release the button until step 4
has been completed.
2. Press the training button on the garage door
opener motor unit (which may activate a
training light).
When your vehicle is recovered, you will
need to reprogram the HomeLinkா Univer-
sal Transceiver with your new transmitter
information.
2. When the indicator light begins to flash
slowly (after 20 seconds), position the
hand-held transmitter 1 - 3 inches (26 - 76
mm) away from the HomeLinkா surface.
NOTE:
Following step 2, there are 30 seconds in
which to initiate step 3.
FCC Notice:
3. Press and hold the hand-held transmitter
button.
This device complies with FCC rules part
15. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference and (2) This de-
vice must accept any interference that may
be received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
3. Firmly press and release the programmed
HomeLinkா button a second time to com-
plete the training process. (Some garage
door openers may require you to do this
procedure a third time to complete the train-
ing.)
4. The HomeLinkா indicator light will flash, first
slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator
light begins to flash rapidly, release both
buttons.
The HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver button has
now been reprogrammed. The new device can
be activated by pushing the HomeLinkா button
that was just programmed. This procedure will
not affect any other programmed HomeLinkா
buttons.
The garage door opener should now recognize
the HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver and acti-
vate when the HomeLinkா button is pressed. The
remaining two buttons may now be programmed
(if not yet programmed, follow steps 2 through 4
in the “Programming HomeLinkா” procedures
earlier in this section).
This transmitter has been tested and com-
plies with FCC and DOC/MDC rules.
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to op-
erate the equipment.
DOC: ISTC 1763K1313
FCC I.D. CV2V67690
Instruments and controls 2-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MEMO
2-46 Instruments and controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Nissan vehicle immobilizer system keys . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Locking with key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Locking with inside lock knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Locking with power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Child safety rear door lock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Remote keyless entry system (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . 3-5
How to use remote keyless entry system . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Trunk lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
Opener operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
Key operation (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11
Interior trunk lid release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11
Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12
Opener operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12
Fuel-filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12
Tilting telescopic steering column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13
Tilt operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13
Telescopic operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14
Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15
Rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15
Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15
Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
KEYS
A key number is only necessary when you have
lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate
from. If you still have a key, your NISSAN dealer
can duplicate it.
cause the registration process will erase the
memory of all key codes previously registered
into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System.
After the registration process, these components
will only recognize keys coded into the NISSAN
Vehicle Immobilizer System during registration.
Any key that is not given to your dealer at the time
of registration will no longer be able to start your
vehicle.
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM KEYS
You can only drive your vehicle using the master
or valet keys which are registered to the NISSAN
Vehicle Immobilizer System components in your
vehicle. These keys have a transponder chip in
the key head.
Do not allow the immobilizer system key, which
contains an electrical transponder, to come into
contact with salt water. This could affect system
function.
The master key can be used for all the locks.
WPD0128
The valet key cannot be used for the trunk lid,
glove box lock or rear seatback lock.
1.
2.
Two master keys (black) with transpon-
der chip and chrome NISSAN brand
symbol on one side
To protect belongings when you leave a key with
someone, give them the valet key only.
Valet key (black) with transponder chip
(if so equipped)
Key number plate
Transponder chip
Never leave these keys in the vehicle.
3.
4.
Additional or replacement keys:
If you still have a key, the key number is not
necessary when you need extra NISSAN Vehicle
Immobilizer System keys. Your dealer can dupli-
cate your existing key. As many as five NISSAN
Vehicle Immobilizer System keys can be used
with one vehicle. You should bring all NISSAN
Vehicle Immobilizer System keys that you have to
your NISSAN dealer for registration. This is be-
A key number plate is supplied with your keys.
Record the key number and keep it in a safe place
(such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you lose
your keys, see a NISSAN dealer for duplicates by
using the key number. NISSAN does not record
key numbers so it is very important to keep track
of your key number plate.
3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DOORS
Opening and closing windows (if so
equipped)
WARNING
● Always have the doors locked while
driving. Along with the use of seat belts,
this provides greater safety in the event
of an accident by helping to prevent
persons from being thrown from the
vehicle. This also helps keep children
and others from unintentionally open-
ing the doors, and will help keep out
intruders.
The driver’s door key operation allows you to
open and close windows equipped with auto-
matic operation at the same time.
●
To open the windows, turn the driver’s door
key toward the rear of the vehicle for longer
than 1 second after the door is unlocked.
●
To close the windows, turn the driver’s door
key toward the front of the vehicle for longer
than 1 second after the door is locked.
● Before opening any door, always look
for and avoid oncoming traffic.
● Do not leave children unattended inside
the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-
tivate switches or controls. Unattended
children could become involved in seri-
ous accidents.
WPD0129
Driver’s side
LOCKING WITH KEY
The power door lock system allows you to lock or
unlock all doors at the same time.
1
Turning the key toward the front
locks all doors.
of the vehicle
᭺
2
Turning the key one time toward the rear
of the
᭺
vehicle unlocks that door. From that position,
(where the key can
only be removed and inserted) and turning it
3
returning the key to neutral
᭺
toward the rear again within 5 seconds unlocks
4
all doors
.
᭺
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lockout protection
When the power door lock switch (driver’s or
front passenger’s side) is moved to the lock
position with the key in the ignition and any door
open, all doors will lock and unlock automatically.
This helps to prevent the keys from being acci-
dently locked inside the vehicle.
WPD0291
LPD0292
Inside lock
Door lock switch
LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK
KNOB
LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR
LOCK SWITCH
To lock the door without the key, move the inside
To lock all the doors without a key, push the door
lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s side), to
1
lock to the lock position , then close the door.
᭺
1
the lock position . When locking the door this
᭺
To unlock the door without the key, move the
way, be certain not to leave the key inside the
vehicle.
2
inside lock knob to the unlock position
.
᭺
To unlock all the doors without a key, push the
door lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s
2
side) to the unlock position
.
᭺
3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
(if so equipped)
It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, turn the
interior light on, and activate the panic alarm by
using the keyfob from outside the vehicle.
CAUTION
Listed below are conditions or occur-
rences which will damage the keyfob:
Some settings for the keyfob, such as horn beep,
can be adjusted. For vehicles without navigation
system, refer to “Silencing the horn beep feature”
later in this section. For vehicles with navigation
system, refer to “Vehicle electronic systems” in
the “Display screen, heater, air conditioner and
audio systems” section later in this manual.
● Do not allow the keyfob to become wet.
● Do not drop the keyfob.
● Do not strike the keyfob sharply against
another object.
● Do not place the keyfob for an extended
period in an area where temperatures
exceed 140°F (60°C).
Be sure to remove the key from the vehicle
before locking the doors.
If a keyfob is lost or stolen, NISSAN rec-
ommends erasing the ID code of that key-
fob. This will prevent the keyfob from un-
authorized use to unlock the vehicle. For
information regarding the erasing proce-
dure, please contact a NISSAN dealer.
APD1010
The keyfob can operate at a distance of approxi-
mately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. The effective
distance depends upon the conditions around
the vehicle.
CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK
Child safety locks help prevent the rear doors
from being opened accidentally, especially when
small children are in the vehicle.
As many as 5 keyfobs can be used with one
vehicle. For information concerning the purchase
and use of additional keyfobs, contact a NISSAN
dealer.
The child safety lock levers are located on the
edge of the rear doors.
When the lever is in the lock position, the
door can be opened only from the outside.
The keyfob will not function when:
●
●
the battery is discharged
the distance between the vehicle and the
keyfob is over 33 ft (10 m)
The panic alarm will not activate when the
key is in the ignition switch.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
●
When the
button is pushed with all
doors locked, the hazard lights flash twice
and the horn beeps once as a reminder that
the doors are already locked.
If a door is open and you push the
button, the doors will lock but the horn will
not beep and the hazard lights will not flash.
The horn may or may not beep once. Refer to
“Silencing the horn beep feature” later in this
section for details.
LPD0209
LPD0210
HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS
ENTRY SYSTEM
Unlocking doors
Push the
button on the keyfob once.
Locking doors
●
●
Only the driver’s door unlocks.
1. Close all windows.
The hazard indicator flashes once if all doors
are completely closed with the ignition key in
any position except the ON position.
2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
3. Close the hood, trunk lid, and all doors.
●
The interior light turns on and the light timer
activates for 30 seconds when the switch is
in the center O position with the ignition key
in any position except the ON position.
4. Push the
button on the keyfob. All
the doors lock. The hazard lights flash twice
and the horn beeps once to indicate all
doors are locked.
Push the
button on the keyfob again within
5 seconds.
3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
●
All doors unlock.
The hazard indicator flashes once if all doors
are completely closed.
The interior lights can be turned off without wait-
ing 30 seconds by inserting the key into the
ignition and turning to the ON or START position,
locking the doors with the keyfob or pushing the
interior light switch to the OFF position.
Auto relock
When the
button on the keyfob is pushed,
all doors will lock automatically within 1 minute
unless one of the following operations is per-
formed:
WPD0319
LPD0211
Releasing the trunk lid
Using the panic alarm
●
●
Any door is opened.
Push the
button on the keyfob for longer
If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,
you may activate the panic alarm to call attention
by pushing and holding the
A key is inserted into the ignition switch and
the key is turned from OFF to ON.
than 0.5 second to open the trunk lid. The trunk
release button on the keyfob will not operate
when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
button on the
keyfob for longer than 0.5 second.
The trunk lid will open when using the key-
fob even if the trunk lid release cancel
switch is turned to OFF. See “Trunk lid”
later in this section for cancel switch infor-
mation.
The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for 25
seconds.
The panic alarm stops when:
●
●
it has run for 25 seconds, or
any button is pushed on the keyfob.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The hazard warning lights will flash three times to
confirm that the horn beep feature has been
deactivated.
The door windows cannot be closed by
using the keyfob.
To activate: Press and hold the
and
buttons for at least 2 seconds
once more.
The hazard warning lights will flash once and the
horn will sound once to confirm that the horn
beep feature has been reactivated.
Deactivating the horn beep feature does not si-
lence the horn if the alarm is triggered.
Using the interior lights
LPD0262
Push the
on the interior lights.
button on the keyfob once to turn
Silencing the horn beep feature
If desired, the horn beep feature can be deacti-
vated using the keyfob.
For additional information, refer to “Interior lights”
in the “Instruments and controls”section earlier in
this manual.
NOTE:
Opening windows (if so equipped)
If you change the horn beep and lamp flash
feature with the keyfob, the display screen
(if so equipped) will not show the current
mode and cannot be used to change the
mode. Use the keyfob to return to the pre-
vious mode and re-enable the display
screen control.
The keyfob allows you to open the front windows
simultaneously.
●
To open the front windows, press the
button on the keyfob for longer than 3
seconds after all doors are unlocked.
To deactivate: Press and hold the
The door windows will open while pressing
the button on the keyfob.
and
buttons for at least 2 seconds.
3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HOOD
5. When closing the hood, return the support
rod to its original position, lower the hood to
approximately 12 inches above the latch and
release it. This allows proper engagement of
the hood latch.
WARNING
● Make sure the hood is completely
closed and latched before driving. Fail-
ure to do so could cause the hood to fly
open and result in an accident.
● If you see steam or smoke coming from
the engine compartment, to avoid injury
do not open the hood.
WPD0288
3
Remove the support rod from the clamp.
1
᭺
Pull the hood lock release handle located
below the driver side instrument panel; the
hood springs up slightly.
᭺
4
Insert the support rod into the slot on the
passenger side fender ledge.
᭺
2
Lift the lever at the front of the hood with your
fingertips and raise the hood.
᭺
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TRUNK LID
● Closely supervise children when they
are around cars to prevent them from
playing and becoming locked in the
trunk where they could be seriously in-
jured. Keep the car locked, with the rear
seatback and trunk lid securely latched
when not in use, and prevent children’s
access to car keys.
To open the trunk lid, push the opener lever down.
To close the trunk lid, lower and push the trunk lid
down securely.
NOTE:
LPD0287
LPD0085
You cannot open the trunk lid with the
trunk lid opener lever if the vehicle security
system (if so equipped) is armed.
Cancel switch (if so equipped)
OPENER OPERATION
When the cancel switch located inside the glove
box is OFF, the trunk lid cannot be opened with
the trunk lid release switch. It can be opened with
the master key or keyfob.
WARNING
● Do not drive with the trunk lid open. This
could allow dangerous exhaust gases
to be drawn into the vehicle. See “Ex-
haust gas” in the “Starting and driving”
section of this manual.
3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To open the trunk from the inside, pull the illumi-
nated release handle until the lock releases and
push up on the trunk lid. The release handle is
made of a material that glows in the dark after a
brief exposure to ambient light.
The handle is located inside the trunk compart-
ment on the interior of the trunk lid.
WPD0138
LPD0289
KEY OPERATION (if so equipped)
INTERIOR TRUNK LID RELEASE
To open the trunk lid, turn the key clockwise. To
close the trunk lid, lower and push the trunk lid
down securely.
WARNING
Closely supervise children when they are
around cars to prevent them from playing
and becoming locked in the trunk where
they could be seriously injured. Keep the
car locked, with the rear seatback and
trunk lid securely latched when not in use,
and prevent children’s access to car keys.
The interior trunk lid release mechanism provides
a means of escape for children and adults in the
event they become locked inside the trunk.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FUEL-FILLER DOOR
WARNING
● Gasoline is extremely flammable and
highly explosive under certain condi-
tions. You could be burned or seriously
injured if it is misused or mishandled.
Always stop the engine and do not
smoke or allow open flames or sparks
near the vehicle when refueling.
● Fuel may be under pressure. Turn the
cap a third of a turn, and wait for any
“hissing” sound to stop to prevent fuel
from spraying out and possibly causing
personal injury. Then remove the cap.
WPD0290
LPD0189
● Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank
after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off
automatically. Continued refueling may
cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel
spray and possibly a fire.
OPENER OPERATION
FUEL-FILLER CAP
The fuel-filler door opener lever is located on the
outside of the driver’s seat
fuel-filler door, pull the opener lever up. To lock,
close the fuel-filler door securely.
The fuel-filler cap is a ratcheting type. Turn the
cap counterclockwise to remove. To tighten, turn
the cap clockwise until ratcheting clicks are
heard.
1
. To open the
᭺
● Use only an original equipment type
fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has a
built-in safety valve needed for proper
operation of the fuel system and emis-
sion control system. An incorrect cap
can result in a serious malfunction and
possible injury. It could also cause the
malfunction indicator light to come on.
1
Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder
refueling.
while
᭺
● Never pour fuel into the throttle body to
attempt to start your vehicle.
3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TILTING TELESCOPIC STEERING
COLUMN
● Do not fill a portable fuel container in
the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity
can cause an explosion of flammable
liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or
trailer. To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death when filling portable fuel
containers:
● Tighten until the fuel-filler cap clicks.
Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap
properly may cause the
function indicator light (MIL) to illumi-
nate. If the light illuminates be-
mal-
cause the fuel-filler cap is loose or
missing, tighten or install the cap and
– Always place the container on the
ground when filling.
continue
to
light should turn off after a
light
drive
the
vehicle.
The
– Do not use electronic devices when
filling.
few driving trips. If the
– Keep the pump nozzle in contact
with the container while you are fill-
ing it.
does not turn off after a few driving
trips, have the vehicle inspected by a
NISSAN dealer.
WPD0234
TILT OPERATION
– Use only approved portable fuel con-
tainers for flammable liquid.
● For additional information, see the
“Malfunction indicator light (MIL)” in
the “Instruments and Controls” section
earlier in this manual.
1
Pull the lock lever
᭺
forward and adjust the
2
steering wheel up or down
position.
to the desired
᭺
CAUTION
Release the lock lever to lock the steering wheel
in place.
● If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,
flush it away with water to avoid paint
damage.
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel while
driving. You could lose control of your
vehicle and cause an accident.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SUN VISORS
TELESCOPIC OPERATION
3
Push the lock lever
down and adjust the
᭺
4
steering wheel forward or backward
desired position.
to the
᭺
Pull the lock lever up firmly to lock the steering
wheel in place.
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel any
closer to you than is necessary for proper
steering operation and comfort. The driv-
er’s air bag inflates with great force. If you
are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting
sideways or out of position in any way, you
are at greater risk of injury or death in a
crash. You may also receive serious or
fatal injuries from the air bag if you are up
against it when it inflates. Always sit back
against the seatback and as far away as
practical from the steering wheel. Always
use the seat belts.
WPD0140
WPD0141
VANITY MIRRORS
Slide the sun visor extension (if so equipped) in or
out as needed.
To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun visor
down and flip open the mirror cover. Some vanity
mirrors are illuminated and turn on when the
mirror cover is open.
CAUTION
Do not store the sun visor before returning
the extension to its original position.
3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIRRORS
To turn off the automatic anti-glare feature, press
the OFF button.
To turn on the automatic anti-glare feature, press
the AUTO button.
Do not hang any object on the sensor or
apply glass cleaner. Doing so will reduce
the sensitivity of the sensor, resulting in
improper operation.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
WARNING
● Objects viewed in the outside mirror on
the passenger side are closer than they
appear. Be careful when moving to the
right. Using only this mirror could cause
an accident. Use the inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder to properly
judge distances to other objects.
WPD0126
LPD0280
1. AUTO button
2. OFF button
3. AUTO indicator light
4. Sensor (on back of mirror)
5. Sensor
REARVIEW MIRROR
1
The night position
reduces glare from the
headlights of vehicles behind you at night.
᭺
2
Use the day position
hours.
when driving in daylight
᭺
● Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.
You could lose control of your vehicle
and cause an accident.
AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE
REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)
WARNING
Use the night position only when neces-
sary, because it reduces rear view clarity.
The inside mirror is designed so that it automati-
cally changes reflection according to the intensity
of the headlights of the vehicle following you.
The indicator light will illuminate when the auto-
matic anti-glare feature is on.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WPD0274
LPD0296
Electric control type (if so equipped)
Manual control type
The outside mirror remote control only operates
when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON
position.
The outside mirror can be moved in any direction
for a better rear view.
Heated mirrors (if so equipped)
Rotate the control lever to select the right or left
mirror. Adjust the mirror to the desired position by
moving the control lever.
Some outside mirrors can be heated to defrost,
defog, or de-ice for improved visibility. For addi-
tional information, see “Rear window and outside
mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch” in the
“Instrument and controls” section of this manual.
3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control panel buttons (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Names of the components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
How to use joystick and “ENTER” button . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
How to use “PREV” button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Setting up the start-up screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
How to use the “TRIP” button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
How to use the “SETTING” button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10
Ventilators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11
Heater and air conditioner (manual). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11
Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13
Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14
Air conditioner operation (if so equipped) . . . . . . . .4-15
Air flow charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16
Heater and air conditioner (automatic)
Operating tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-22
Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-22
Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-23
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-23
FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-23
AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-23
Satellite radio reception (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . .4-23
Audio operation precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24
FM-AM radio with compact disc (CD) player
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-25
FM-AM SAT radio with compact disc (CD)
changer (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-30
FM-AM-SAT radio with compact disc (CD)
changer (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-36
CD care and cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-40
Steering wheel switch for audio control
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-20
Automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-20
Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-21
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-40
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-41
Car phone or CB radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS (if so
equipped)
WARNING
● Positioning of the heating or air condi-
tioning controls and display controls
should not be done while driving in or-
der that full attention may be given to
the driving operation.
● Do not disassemble or modify this sys-
tem. If you do, it may result in accidents,
fire, or electrical shock.
● Do not use this system if you notice any
abnormality, such as a frozen screen or
lack of sound. Continued use of the
system may result in accident, fire or
electric shock.
● In case you notice any foreign object in
the system hardware, spill liquid on it,
or notice smoke or smell coming from
it, stop using the system immediately
and contact your nearest NISSAN
dealer. Ignoring such conditions may
lead to accidents, fire or electrical
shock.
LHA0458
Reference symbols:
When you use this system, make sure the engine
is running.
“ENTER” button — This is a button on the con-
trol panel.
If you use the system with the engine not
running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long
time, it will use up all the battery power,
and the engine will not start.
4-2 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
“Display” key — This is a select key on the
screen. By selecting this key you can proceed to
the next function.
If you do not touch a button or screen key for
more than 1 minute on the START-UP screen, the
screen will change to the audio screen automati-
cally.
HOW TO USE JOYSTICK AND
“ENTER” BUTTON
Choose an item on the display using the joystick
and push the “ENTER” button for operation.
NAMES OF THE COMPONENTS
To proceed to the next step, refer to the separate
Navigation System Owner’s Manual.
1.
brightness control button (P. 4-10)
HOW TO USE “PREV” BUTTON
2. PREV (previous) button (P. 4-3)
3. Joystick and ENTER push button (P. 4-3)
4. SETTING button (P. 4-6)
5. TRIP drive computer button (P. 4-4)
6. DEST button*
This button has two functions.
●
Go back to the previous display (cancel).
If you touch “PREV” button during setup, the
setup will be canceled and/or the display will
return to the previous screen.
●
Finish setup.
7. ROUTE button*
If you touch this button after the setup is com-
pleted, the setup will start over, and the display
will return to the climate control or audio mode
and Navigation screen.
8. MAP button*
9. GUIDE VOICE button*
10.
11.
zoom out button*
zoom in button*
SETTING UP THE START-UP
SCREEN
*For Navigation system control buttons, refer to
the separate Navigation System Owner’s
Manual.
When you turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, the
SYSTEM START-UP warning is displayed on the
screen. Read the warning and select the “I
AGREE” (English) or “ENTER” (Français) key
then press the ENTER button.
If you do not press the ENTER button, the Navi-
gation system will not proceed to the next step
display.
Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LHA0459
LHA0460
LHA0461
HOW TO USE THE “TRIP” BUTTON
Trip 1, trip 2 and fuel economy items
Maintenance items
When the “TRIP” button is pushed, the following
modes will display on the screen.
To reset the TRIP 1, TRIP
2
and FUEL
You can set the engine oil and the tire rotation
interval.
ECONOMY, select the “RESET” key using the
joystick and push the “ENTER” button or push
the “TRIP” button for more than approximately
1.5 seconds.
Warning message (if there are any) → TRIP 1
(Elapsed Time, Driving Distance, Average
Speed) → TRIP 2 → FUEL ECONOMY (Average
Fuel Economy, Distance to Empty) → MAINTE-
NANCE (Engine Oil, Tire Rotation and Tire Pres-
sure — if so equipped) → OFF.
To display the setting of the maintenance interval,
select the “Engine Oil” or “Tire Rotation” key
using the joystick and push the “ENTER” button.
4-4 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LHA0462
LHA0463
LHA0483
To set the maintenance interval, select the
“Maintenance Schedule” key by using the
joystick and push the joystick to right or left.
The “MAINTENANCE NOTICE” screen (“EN-
GINE OIL” and “TIRE ROTATION”) will be auto-
matically displayed as shown when both of the
following conditions are met:
To reset the maintenance interval, select the “Re-
set” key using the joystick and push the “EN-
TER” button.
●
the vehicle is driven the set distance and the
ignition key is turned OFF.
To display the MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
automatically when set trip distance is reached,
select the “Display Maintenance Notifica-
tion” key and push the “ENTER” button.
●
the ignition key is turned ON the next time
the vehicle will be driving.
To return to the previous display after the “MAIN-
TENANCE NOTICE” screen is displayed, press
the PREV button.
Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The “MAINTENANCE NOTICE” screen displays
each time the key is turned ON until one of the
following conditions are met:
Brightness/Contrast/Map Background:
To adjust the brightness and contrast of the
screen, select the “Brightness/contrast” key
and push the “ENTER” button. You can then use
the joystick to adjust the brightness to Darker or
Brighter and the contrast to Lower or Higher. For
information on Map Background, please refer to
the separate Navigation System Owner’s
Manual.
●
●
“RESET” is selected.
“Display Maintenance and Notification” is
set OFF.
●
the maintenance interval is set again.
Display Off:
To turn off the screen, push the “SETTING”
button and select the “Display” key and “Dis-
play Off” key. The indicator of the “Display
Off” will turn to amber. When any mode button is
pushed with the screen off, the screen turns on
for further operation. The screen will turn off
automatically 5 seconds after the operation is
finished on the map display in the Audio, HVAC
(Heater and air conditioner), SETTING or VE-
HICLE INFO modes.
LHA0268
HOW TO USE THE “SETTING”
BUTTON
To adjust the various settings within the display
screen press the“SETTING” button.
After pressing the SETTING button a menu will
be shown on the display screen which will allow
you to program several functions such as the
display screen appearance, programmable fea-
tures for your vehicles electronics system and
other system settings such as your clock. To
make a selection from this mode use the joystick
and press the “ENTER” button.
To turn on the screen, push the “SETTING”
button and select the “Display” key and “Dis-
play Off” key, then set the screen to on by
pushing the “ENTER” button.
4-6 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOTE:
If you change the horn beep or the lamp
flash feature with the keyfob, the display
screen will not show the current mode. Use
the keyfob to return to the previous mode
and re-enable the display screen control.
Keyless remote response — lights:
This key allows you to change the hazard indica-
tor flash mode that occurs when pressing the
LOCK or UNLOCK button on the keyfob.
NOTE:
LHA0464
WRS0443
If you change the horn beep or the lamp
flash feature with the keyfob, the mode will
not be changed with the display. Use the
keyfob to return to the previous mode and
re-enable the display control.
Remote unlock driver’s door first:
Vehicle electronic systems
This option allows you to select which doors will
unlock first during an unlocking operation:
The VEHICLE ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS screen
will appear when selecting the “Vehicle Elec-
tronic Systems” key with the joystick and push-
ing the “ENTER” button.
Only the driver’s door ←→ All the doors
Auto re-lock time:
Keyless remote response — horn:
This key allows you to set the length of time
before doors auto re-lock.
To set the various electronic systems operating
conditions, select the applicable item using the
joystick, and push the “ENTER” button. The
indicator light, box at left of selected item, alter-
nately turns on and off each time the “ENTER”
button is pressed.
This key allows you to change the horn chirp
mode that occurs when pressing the LOCK or
UNLOCK button on the keyfob.
Sensitivity of automatic headlights:
This key allows you to set the sensitivity of the
automatic headlights:
●
Lower- less sensitive, automatic headlights
will take longer to come on when the head-
light sensor senses less ambient light.
Indicator light is illuminated — ON
Indicator light is not illuminated — OFF
Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
Higher- more sensitive, automatic head-
lights will come on quicker when the head-
light sensor senses less ambient light.
Automatic headlights off delay:
This key allows you to set the length of time
before the automatic headlights turn off after
exiting the vehicle.
Speed dependent wiper:
This key allows you to turn on or turn off the
driving speed dependent intermittent wiper func-
tion.
Return all settings to default:
LHA0262
LHA0270
When this key is selected and turned on using
the “ENTER” button, all settings made by VE-
HICLE ELECTRONICS will return to the default
settings.
Clock
System settings
Adjusting the time:
Language/Unit
Select the “Hours” or “Minutes” key and move
the joystick to the right or left to adjust the time.
The LANGUAGE/UNIT screen will appear when
selecting the “Language/Unit” key and push-
ing the “ENTER” button.
The time will change step by step.
Language: English or French
After completion of the setting, press the
“PREV” button.
Unit: US — mile, °F, MPG
Metric — km, °C, L/100 km
You can select the language and unit using the
joystick and “ENTER” button.
4-8 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LHA0271
LHA0272
LHA0273
Setting daylight savings time:
Adjusting the time to the GPS:
Select the “Auto Adjust” key.
Selecting the time zone:
Use the “Daylight Saving Time” key to adjust
1. Select the “Select Time Zone” key.
the clock to daylight savings time.
The time will be reset to the GPS time.
The [TIME ZONE] screen will appear.
ON: The displayed time advances by 1 hour.
OFF: The current time is displayed.
Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The GPS time (manual time) corresponding to
the selected zone will be displayed. Pacific zone
has been set as the initial (default) setting.
Beep setting
With this option ON, a beep will sound if any
audio button is pushed.
BUTTON
To change the display brightness, push
the
button. Pushing the button again will
change the display to DAY or NIGHT display.
Then, adjust the brightness moving the joystick
right or left.
LHA0274
If no operation is done within 10 seconds, or if the
“PREV” button is pushed, the display will return
to the previous display.
2. Select one of the following zones depending
on the current location.
● Pacific zone
● Mountain zone
● Central zone
● Eastern zone
● Atlantic zone
● Newfoundland zone
After selection, the [CLOCK SETTINGS] screen
will appear.
4-10 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VENTILATORS
HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
(manual)
WARNING
● The air conditioner cooling function op-
erates only when the engine is running.
● Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assistance
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets
should also not be left alone. They
could accidentally injure themselves or
others through inadvertent operation of
the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,
temperatures in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to cause
severe or possibly fatal injuries to
people or animals.
LHA0439
1
Adjust air flow direction for the driver side
,
᭺
● Do not use the recirculation mode for
long periods as it may cause the interior
air to become stale and the windows to
fog up.
2
3
center , and passenger side
ventilators by
moving the ventilator slide and/or ventilator as-
semblies.
᭺
᭺
● Positioning of the heater and/or air
conditioner controls should not be
done while driving so full attention may
be given to vehicle operation.
Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHA0470
Type A
1. Fan control dial
2. Air recirculation button
3. Temperature control dial
4. Air flow control dial
5. Rear window defroster
4-12 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
— Air flows from defroster outlets
and foot outlets.
— Air flows mainly from defroster
outlets.
Temperature control dial
The temperature control dial allows you to adjust
the temperature of the outlet air. To lower the
temperature, turn the dial to the left. To increase
the temperature, turn the dial to the right.
Air recirculation button
NOTE:
LHA0440
The air recirculation feature is available
only on those vehicles equipped with air
conditioning.
Type B
1. Fan control dial
Air flow control dial
2. Air recirculation button
3. Temperature control dial
4. Air conditioner button (if so equipped)
5. Air flow control dial
The air flow control dial allows you to select the
air flow outlets.
ON position (Indicator light on):
Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle.
MAX — Air flows from center and side
A/C
Push the
button to the on position when:
vents with maximum cooling (air
conditioning if so equipped).
— Air flows from center and side
ventilators.
— Air flows from center and side
ventilators and foot outlets.
— Air flows mainly from foot outlets.
6. Rear window defroster
●
●
driving on a dusty road.
CONTROLS
to prevent traffic fumes from entering pas-
senger compartment.
Fan control dial
The fan control dial turns the fan on and off, and
controls fan speed.
●
for maximum cooling when using the air con-
ditioner.
Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OFF position (Indicator light off):
Outside air is drawn into the passenger compart-
ment and distributed through the selected outlet.
HEATER OPERATION
Heating
Defrosting or defogging
This mode directs the air to the defrost outlets to
defrost/defog the windows.
This mode is used to direct heated air to the foot
outlets. Some air also flows from the defrost
outlets.
Use the off position for normal heater or air con-
ditioner operation.
1. Turn the air flow control dial to the
position.
Air conditioner button (if so
equipped)
1. Push the
normal heating.
button to the off position for
2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-
tion.
The button is provided only on vehicles equipped
with an air conditioner.
2. Turn the air flow control dial to the
position.
3. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
sired position between the middle and the
hot position.
Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to the
desired position and push the
turn on the air conditioner. The indicator light
comes on when the air conditioner is operating.
To turn off the air conditioner, push the
button again.
3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-
tion.
button to
●
To quickly remove ice or fog from the win-
dows, turn the fan control dial to HI and the
temperature control lever to the full HOT
position.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
sired position between the middle and the
hot position.
Ventilation
The air conditioner cooling function oper-
ates only when the engine is running.
●
When the
position is selected, the air
conditioner automatically turns on (however,
the indicator light will not illuminate) if the
outside temperature is more than 36°F
(2°C). The air conditioning system will con-
tinue to operate until the vehicle is restarted,
even if the air flow control dial is turned to a
position other than the
dehumidifies the air which helps defog the
windshield. The mode automatically
This mode directs outside air to the side and
center ventilators.
Rear window defroster switch
1. Push the
button to the off position.
For more information about the rear window de-
froster switch, see “Rear window and outside
mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch” in the
“Instruments and controls”section of this manual.
2. Turn the air flow control dial to the
position.
position. This
3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-
tion.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
sired position.
turns off, allowing outside air to be drawn
into the passenger compartment to further
improve the defogging performance.
4-14 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
tinue to operate until the vehicle is restarted,
even if the air flow control dial is turned to a
2. Turn the air flow control dial to the MAX A/C
or position.
Bi-level heating
This mode directs air from the side, center and
the foot outlets.
position other than the
dehumidifies the air which helps defog the
windshield. The mode automatically
position. This
3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-
tion.
1. Push the
button to the off position.
turns off, allowing outside air to be drawn
into the passenger compartment to further
improve the defogging performance.
4. Push the
comes on.
button. The indicator light
2. Turn the air flow control dial to the
position.
5. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
sired position.
3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-
tion.
Operating tips
●
For quick cooling when the outside tem-
perature is high, push the button to
the on position (indicator light on). Be sure
to return the button to the off position
Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades
and air inlet in front of the windshield. This
improves heater operation.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
sired position.
Heating and defogging
AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION (if
so equipped)
for normal cooling. MAX A/C may be used
for quick cooling.
This mode heats the interior and defogs the wind-
shield.
Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to the
Dehumidified heating
1. Turn the air flow control dial to the
position.
desired position, and push in the
button to
This mode is used to heat and dehumidify the air.
activate the air conditioner. When the air condi-
tioner is on, cooling and dehumidifying functions
are added to the heater operation.
2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-
tion.
1. Push the
button to the off position.
2. Turn the air flow control dial to the
position.
3. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
sired position between the middle and the
hot position.
The air conditioner cooling function oper-
ates only when the engine is running.
3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-
tion.
Cooling
●
When the
position is selected, the air
conditioner automatically turns on (however,
the indicator light will not illuminate) if the
outside temperature is more than 36°F
(2°C). The air conditioning system will con-
This mode is used to cool and dehumidify the air.
1. Push the
button to the off position.
Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Push the
comes on.
button. The indicator light
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
sired position.
5. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
sired position.
Operating tips
●
Keep the windows and sunroof closed while
the air conditioner is in operation.
Dehumidified defogging
●
After parking in the sun, drive for 2 or 3
minutes with the windows open to vent hot
air from the passenger compartment. Then,
close the windows. This allows the air con-
ditioner to cool the interior more quickly.
This mode is used to defog the windows and
dehumidify the air.
1. Turn the air flow control dial to the
position.
2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-
tion.
●
●
The air conditioning system should be
operated for approximately 10 minutes
at least once a month. This helps pre-
vent damage to the system due to lack
of lubrication.
3. Push the
comes on.
button. The indicator light
When the
,
or positions in between
If the engine coolant temperature
gauge indicates engine coolant tem-
perature over the normal range, turn
the air conditioner off. See “If your
vehicle overheats” in the “In case of
emergency” section of this manual.
are selected, the air conditioner automatically
turns on (however, the indicator light will not
illuminate) if the outside temperature is more than
36°F (2°C). The air conditioning system will con-
tinue to operate until the vehicle is restarted, even
if the air flow control dial is turned to a position
AIR FLOW CHARTS
other than the
the air which helps defog the windshield.
The mode automatically turns off, allowing
position. This dehumidifies
The following charts show the button and dial
positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK heating,
cooling or defrosting. The air recirculation
button should always be in the OFF posi-
tion for heating and defrosting.
outside air to be drawn into the passenger com-
partment to further improve the defogging perfor-
mance.
4-16 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LHA0442
LHA0443
Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LHA0444
LHA0445
4-18 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHA0469
Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
(automatic) (if so equipped)
● Do not use the recirculation mode for
long periods as it may cause the interior
air to become stale and the windows to
fog up.
● Positioning of the heater and/or air
conditioner controls should not be
done while driving so full attention may
be given to vehicle operation.
Start the engine and operate the controls to
activate the air conditioner.
AUTOMATIC OPERATION
Cooling and/or dehumidified heating
(auto)
LHA0480
1. Fan control dial
2. Air recirculation button
3. Temperature dial
A. 60° F (18° C)
B. 75° F (25° C)
C. 90° F (32° C)
4. A/C ON/OFF button
5. Air flow control dial
6. Rear defrost button
● Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assistance
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets
should also not be left alone. They
could accidentally injure themselves or
others through inadvertent operation of
the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,
temperatures in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to cause
severe or possibly fatal injuries to
people or animals.
This mode may be normally used all year round as
the system automatically works to keep a con-
stant temperature. Air flow distribution and fan
speed are also controlled automatically.
1. Turn the fan control dial to the AUTO posi-
tion.
2. Turn the temperature dial to the left or right
to set the desired temperature.
WARNING
●
Adjust the temperature dial to about 75°F
(25°C) for normal operation.
● The air conditioner cooling function op-
erates only when the engine is running.
3. Turn the air flow control dial to AUTO.
4-20 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
●
The temperature of the passenger compart-
ment will be maintained automatically.
Dehumidified defogging
MANUAL OPERATION
Fan speed control
1. Turn the air flow control dial to the DEF
Air flow distribution and fan speed are also
controlled automatically.
position
to turn it on. The indicator
Turn the fan control dial
manually control the fan speed.
left or right to
light on the button will come on.
2. Turn the temperature dial to the left or right
to set the desired temperature.
Heating (A/C OFF)
Turn the control dial to the AUTO position to
return to automatic control of the fan speed.
The air conditioner does not activate. When you
need to heat only, use this mode.
●
●
●
To quickly remove ice from the outside of the
windows, turn the manual fan control dial to
HI.
Air recirculation
1
Turn the fan control dial to the AUTO posi-
tion.
᭺
Push the air recirculation button
to recir-
culate interior air inside the vehicle. The indicator
light on the switch will come on.
As soon as possible after the windshield is
clean, turn the air flow control dial to the
AUTO position to return to the auto mode.
2
Push the A/C button to turn off the air con-
ditioner. The light will not be illuminated in
the dial.
᭺
The air recirculation button will not be activated
when the air conditioner is in DEF mode.
When the control dial is turned to the
DEF
position, the air conditioner will
3
Turn the temperature dial to the left or right to
set the desired temperature.
᭺
Air flow control
automatically be turned on at outside tem-
peratures above 36°F (2°C). The air condi-
tioning system will continue to operate until
the vehicle is restarted, even if the air flow
control dial is turned to a position other than
Turning the air flow control dial away from AUTO
selects the air outlet to:
●
The temperature of the passenger compart-
ment will be maintained automatically. Air
flow distribution and fan speed are also con-
trolled automatically.
— Air flows from center and side
ventilators.
the
position. This dehumidifies the air
which helps defog the windshield. The air
recirculate mode automatically turns off, al-
lowing outside air to be drawn into the pas-
senger compartment to further improve the
defogging performance.
— Air flows from center and side
ventilators and foot outlets.
— Air flows mainly from foot outlets.
— Air flows from defroster and foot
outlets.
●
●
Do not set the temperature lower than the
outside air temperature. Otherwise the sys-
tem may not work properly.
Not recommended if windows fog up.
— Air flows mainly from defroster
outlets.
Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER
The air conditioner system in your NISSAN ve-
hicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with
the environment in mind.
To turn system off
Turn the fan control dial to the OFF position.
OPERATING TIPS
This refrigerant does not harm the earth’s
ozone layer.
●
When the engine coolant temperature and
outside air temperature are low, the air flow
from the foot outlets may not operate for a
maximum of 150 seconds. However, this is
not a malfunction. After the coolant tempera-
ture warms up, air flow from the foot outlets
will operate normally.
Special charging equipment and lubricant is re-
quired when servicing your NISSAN air condi-
tioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricants
will cause severe damage to your air conditioner
system. See “Air conditioner system refrigerant
and lubricant recommendations” in the “Techni-
cal and consumer information” section of this
manual.
LHA0457
A NISSAN dealer is able to service your “environ-
mentally friendly” air conditioning system.
The sunload sensor, located on the top driver’s
side of the instrument panel, helps the system
maintain a constant temperature. Do not put any-
thing on or around this sensor.
WARNING
The air conditioner system contains re-
frigerant under high pressure. To avoid
personal injury, any air conditioner ser-
vice should be done only by an experi-
enced technician with proper equipment.
4-22 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUDIO SYSTEM
Reception conditions will constantly change be-
cause of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain,
signal distance and interference from other ve-
hicles can work against ideal reception. De-
scribed below are some of the factors that can
affect your radio reception.
Multipath reception: Because of the reflective
characteristics of FM signals, direct and reflected
signals reach the receiver at the same time. The
signals may cancel each other, resulting in mo-
mentary flutter or loss of sound.
RADIO
Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position
and press the PWR (power)/VOL (volume) knob
to turn the radio on. If you listen to the radio with
the engine not running, the key should be turned
to the ACC position.
AM RADIO RECEPTION
FM RADIO RECEPTION
Radio reception is affected by station signal
strength, distance from radio transmitter, build-
ings, bridges, mountains and other external influ-
ences. Intermittent changes in reception quality
normally are caused by these external influences.
AM signals, because of their low frequency, can
bend around objects and skip along the ground.
In addition, the signals can be bounced off the
ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of
these characteristics, AM signals are also sub-
ject to interference as they travel from transmitter
to receiver.
Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 – 30
miles (40 – 48 km), with monaural (single chan-
nel) FM having slightly more range than stereo
FM. External influences may sometimes interfere
with FM station reception even if the FM station is
within 25 miles (40 km). The strength of the FM
signal is directly related to the distance between
the transmitter and receiver. FM signals follow a
line-of-sight path, exhibiting many of the same
characteristics as light. For example, they will
reflect off objects.
Using a cellular phone in or near the ve-
hicle may influence radio reception quality.
Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing
through freeway underpasses or in areas with
many tall buildings. It can also occur for several
seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in
areas where no obstacles exist.
Radio reception
Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with
state-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance ra-
dio reception. These circuits are designed to
extend reception range, and to enhance the qual-
ity of that reception.
Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away from
a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade
and/or drift.
Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical
power lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.
However there are some general characteristics
of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect
radio reception quality in a moving vehicle, even
when the finest equipment is used. These char-
acteristics are completely normal in a given re-
ception area, and do not indicate any malfunction
in your NISSAN radio system.
SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION (if so
equipped)
Static and flutter: During signal interference from
buildings, large hills or due to antenna position
(usually in conjunction with increased distance
from the station transmitter) static or flutter can
be heard. This can be reduced by adjusting the
treble control to reduce treble response.
When the satellite radio is first installed or the
battery has been replaced, the satellite radio may
not work properly. This is not a malfunction. Wait
more than 10 minutes with satellite radio ON and
Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the vehicle outside of any metal or large building
for satellite radio to receive all of the necessary
data.
●
During cold weather or rainy days, the
player may malfunction due to the hu-
midity. If this occurs, remove the CD
and dehumidify or ventilate the player
completely.
No satellite radio reception is available and “NO
SAT” is displayed when the SAT band option is
selected unless optional satellite receiver and
antenna are installed and an XMா or SIRIUS™
satellite radio service subscription is active. Sat-
ellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and
Guam.
●
●
The player may skip while driving on
rough roads.
The CD player sometimes cannot function
when the compartment temperature is ex-
tremely high or low. Decrease/increase
the temperature before use.
Satellite radio performance may be affected if
cargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite radio
signal.
●
●
Do not expose the CD to direct sunlight.
CDs that are in poor condition or are
dirty, scratched or covered with finger-
prints may not work properly.
If possible, do not put cargo over the satellite
antenna.
●
●
The following CDs may not work properly:
● Copy control compact discs (CCCD)
● Recordable compact discs (CD-R)
● Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)
Do not use the following CDs as they
may cause the CD player to malfunc-
tion:
LHA0099
AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS
Compact disc (CD) player
● 3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter
● CDs that are not round
●
Only use high quality 4.7 inches (12 cm)
round discs that have the “COMPACT
disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the disc
or packaging.
● CDs with a paper label
● CDs that are warped, scratched, or
have abnormal edges
4-24 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. PRESET ABC button
2. MIX button
3. Display
4. CD select button
5. FM band select button
6. AM band select button
7. CD eject button
8. PAUSE/MUTE button
9. TUNE/FF-REV button
10. CLOCK button
11. Preset scan (P-SCAN) button
12. AUDIO button
13. SCAN button
14. Station preset buttons
15. CD insert slot
16. PWR/VOL control knob
17. SEEK/TRACK button
FM-AM RADIO WITH COMPACT
DISC (CD) PLAYER (if so equipped)
PWR/VOL control knob
Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position,
then press the PWR/VOL control knob. If you
listen to the radio with the engine not running,
turn the key to the ACC position. The mode (radio
or CD) that was playing immediately before the
system was turned off resumes playing.
LHA0447
Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When no CD is loaded, the radio comes on.
Pressing the PWR/VOL control knob again turns
the system off.
3. Press the CLOCK button to switch to the
minute adjustment.
Use the
and
buttons for manual
tuning. To move quickly through the channels,
hold the tuning buttons down.
4. Press TUNE/FF-REV (
SEEK/TRACK (
or
) or
SEEK tuning
Turn the PWR/VOL control knob to the right to
increase volume or to the left to decrease volume.
or
) to adjust
the minutes.
Push SEEK/TRACK (
or
). SEEK
Adjusting tone quality and speaker balance
5. Press the CLOCK button again to exit the
clock set mode.
tuning begins from low to high frequencies or
high to low frequencies, depending on which
button is pressed, and stops at the next broad-
casting station. If using the up button, once the
highest broadcasting station is reached, the ra-
dio continues in the SEEK mode at the lowest
broadcasting station. If using the down button,
once the lowest broadcasting station is reached,
the radio continues in the SEEK mode at the
highest broadcasting station.
Press the AUDIO button to enter the audio adjust
mode:
The display will return to the regular clock display
after 10 seconds, or you may press the CLOCK
button again to return to the regular clock display.
Bass→Mid→Treb→Fade→Bal
Press the TUNE/FF-REV (
SEEK/TRACK ( or
desired levels. The display will return to the regu-
lar radio display after 10 seconds, or you may
press the AUDIO button again to return to the
regular radio display.
or
) or
) to adjust to the FM-AM radio operation
FM-AM band select
Push the AM or the FM button to change from AM
to FM reception.
SCAN tuning
Clock operation
Press the SCAN button. SCAN illuminates in the
display window. SCAN tuning begins from low to
high frequencies. SCAN tuning stops for 5 sec-
onds at each broadcasting station that has suffi-
cient signal strength. When scanning, SCAN
blinks in the display. Pressing the SCAN button
again during this 5 second period stops SCAN
tuning and the radio remains tuned to that station.
The FM stereo indicator, ST, illuminates during
FM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast
signal is weak, the radio automatically changes
from stereo to monaural reception.
Pressing the CLOCK button displays the clock
with the radio on or off. Press the CLOCK button
again to turn off the clock display.
Clock set
TUNE/FF—REV
1. Press and hold the CLOCK button until it
beeps (longer than 2 seconds).
WARNING
Station memory operation
2. The hours will start flashing. Press
The radio should not be tuned while driv-
ing so full attention may be given to ve-
hicle operation.
TUNE/FF-REV
SEEK/TRACK (
the hours.
(
or
)
or
Each preset mode (A, B or C) has 6 presets,
capable of storing any combination of AM, FM,
SAT (if so equipped ) and FM RDS stations.
or
) to adjust
4-26 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press the PRESET ABC button to change be-
tween the presets:
All Preset Scan
● Trying to load a CD with the CD door
closed could damage the CD and/or CD
changer.
Pressing the Preset Scan button (>1.5 seconds)
scans all the permanent preset memory banks (A,
B and C) from 1 - 6 for 5 seconds.
A→B→C
CD button
The radio displays icon A, B or C to indicate
which set of presets is active.
Canceling Preset Scan mode
When the CD button is pressed with a compact
disc loaded and the radio playing, the radio turns
off and the last used compact disc starts to play.
To store a radio station in a preset:
Pressing the Preset Scan (P.SCAN) button again
will cancel the Preset Scan mode.
1. Select the desired preset by pressing PRE-
SET ABC.
Speed Sensitive Control Volume (SSV) (if
so equipped)
FF (Fast Forward), REW
(Rewind) buttons
2. Select the desired AM, FM or SAT (if so
equipped) station band.
Your vehicle has Speed Sensitive Control Vol-
ume (SSV) for audio. The audio volume changes
as the driving speed changes.
When the TUNE/FF-REV (
or
) but-
3. Tune to the desired station.
ton is pressed while the compact disc is playing,
the compact disc plays at an increased speed
while fast forwarding or rewinding. When the
button is released, the compact disc returns to
normal play speed.
4. Press the desired station select button
(>1.5 seconds).
Press the AUDIO button until the display shows
“SSV”. Press TUNE/FF-REV (
or
)
5. A beep will sound indicating memorization is
complete.
to change between:
Off→Low→Mid→High
Compact disc (CD) player operation
SEEK/TRACK buttons
6. Other station select buttons can be set in
the same manner.
When
is pressed while the compact disc
is playing, the next track following the present
one starts to play from the beginning.
Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position.
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the radio
fuse opens, the radio memory is canceled. In that
case, reset the desired stations.
Press
several times to skip several tracks.
CAUTION
Each time the button is pressed, the CD ad-
vances 1 additional track. The track number ap-
pears in the display window. (When the last track
on the compact disc is skipped, the first track is
played.)
● Do not force a compact disc into the CD
insert slot. This could damage the CD
and/or CD changer/player.
Preset Scan
Pressing the Preset Scan button (<1.5 seconds)
scans the permanent preset memory that is se-
lected (A, B or C) from 1 - 6 for 5 seconds.
Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When
is pressed, the track being played
several
SCAN (CDs) button:
returns to the beginning. Press
Press the SCAN button less than 1.5 seconds to
scan all tracks of the current disc for 10 seconds
per track. The SCAN icon is flashed during scan
mode.
times to skip back several tracks. Each time the
button is pressed the CD moves back 1 track. If
the play pattern is in MIX mode when the button is
pressed, the next random selection will be
played.
The scan mode is canceled once it scans through
all tracks on the disc, or if the SCAN button is
pressed during scan mode.
MIX button
Press the MIX button to change CD play pat-
terns:
Eject CD
1. Press the
button.
Repeat→Mix→Normal Play
Repeat
2. The disc ejects. Remove the disc. (If the disc
is not removed within 15 seconds, the disc
will reload.)
Press the MIX button (<1.5 seconds) once to
repeat the current track. The “1”icon is turned on.
3. The indicator and symbol for the disc are
turned off.
Mix
Press the MIX button (<1.5 seconds) again to
start shuffle play of the current disc. The “MIX”
icon is turned on.
Normal play
Press the MIX button (<1.5 seconds) again to
return to normal play mode. The “MIX” icon is
turned off.
4-28 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. PRESET ABC button
2. LOAD button
3. Display
4. CD select button
5. FM/AM band select button
6. SAT (satellite) radio select button*
7. CD eject button
8. PAUSE/MUTE button
9. TUNE FF-REV button
10. MENU/CLOCK button
11. CAT/RPT button
12. AUDIO button
13. SCAN button
14. Station preset buttons
15. CD insert slot
16. POWER/VOL control knob
17. SEEK/TRACK button
*No satellite radio reception is available
and “NO SAT” is displayed when the
SAT button is pressed unless optional
satellite receiver and antenna are in-
stalled and an XMா or SIRIUS™ satellite
radio service subscription is active. Sat-
ellite radio is not available in Alaska,
Hawaii and Guam.
LHA0448
Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press the TUNE/FF-REV (
SEEK/TRACK ( or
desired levels. The display will return to the regu-
lar radio display after 10 seconds, or you may
press the AUDIO button again to return to the
regular radio display.
or
) or
The display will return to the regular clock display
after 7 seconds, or you may press the CLOCK
button again to return to the regular clock display.
FM-AM SAT RADIO WITH
COMPACT DISC (CD) CHANGER (if
so equipped)
) to adjust to the
FM/AM/SAT radio operation
No satellite radio reception is available and “NO
SAT” is displayed when the SAT button is
pressed unless optional satellite receiver and
antenna are installed and an XMா or SIRIUS™
satellite radio service subscription is active. Sat-
ellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and
Guam.
FM/AM/SAT band select:
Clock operation
Pushing the FM, AM or SAT radio select button
will change the band to either FM, AM or SAT
(satellite-if so equipped) radio stations.
Pressing the CLOCK button displays the clock
with the radio on or off. Press the CLOCK button
again to turn off the clock display.
When the FM, AM or SAT radio select button is
pushed while the ignition switch is in the ACC or
ON, the radio will come on at the station last
played.
Clock set
PWR/VOL control knob
1. Press and hold the CLOCK button until it
beeps (>1.5 seconds).
Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position,
then push the PWR/VOL control knob. If you
listen to the radio with the engine not running,
turn the key to the ACC position. The mode
[radio, CD or SAT (if so equipped)] that was
playing immediately before the system was
turned off resumes playing.
The last station played will also come on when
the Power/Volume control knob is depressed to
ON.
2. The hours will start flashing. Press
TUNE/FF-REV
SEEK/TRACK (
the hours.
(
or
)
or
or
) to adjust
No satellite radio reception is available and “NO
SAT” is displayed when the SAT button is
pressed unless optional satellite receiver and
antenna are installed and an XMா or SIRIUS™
satellite radio service subscription is active. Sat-
ellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and
Guam.
3. Press the CLOCK button to switch to the
minute adjustment.
Pushing the PWR/VOL control knob again turns
the system off.
4. Press TUNE/FF-REV (
SEEK/TRACK (
or
) or
Turn the PWR/VOL control knob to the right to
increase volume or to the left to decrease volume.
or
) to adjust
the minutes.
Adjusting tone quality and speaker balance
If a compact disc is playing when the FM, AM or
SAT radio select button is pushed, the compact
disc will automatically be turned off and the last
radio station played will come on.
5. Press the CLOCK button again to exit the
clock set mode.
Press the AUDIO button to enter the audio adjust
mode:
Bass→Treb→Fade→Bal
4-30 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The FM stereo indicator ST will glow during FM
stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast
signal is weak, the radio will automatically change
from stereo to monaural reception.
SCAN tuning
4. Press the desired station select button
(>1.5 seconds).
Push the SCAN button. SCAN illuminates in the
display window. SCAN tuning begins from low to
high frequencies. SCAN tuning stops for 5 sec-
onds at each broadcasting station that has suffi-
cient signal strength. When scanning, SCAN
blinks in the display. Pushing the SCAN button
again during this 5 second period stops SCAN
tuning and the radio remains tuned to that station.
5. A beep will sound indicating memorization is
complete.
TUNE/FF—REV
6. Other station select buttons can be set in
the same manner.
WARNING
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the radio
fuse opens, the radio memory is canceled. In that
case, reset the desired stations.
The radio should not be tuned while driv-
ing so full attention may be given to ve-
hicle operation.
Station memory operation
Radio data system (RDS):
Each preset mode (A, B or C) has 6 presets,
capable of storing any combination of AM, FM,
SAT (if so equipped ) and FM RDS stations.
Use the
and
buttons for manual
RDS stands for Radio Data System, and is a data
information service transmitted by some radio
stations on the FM band (not AM band) and/or
SAT radio encoded within a regular radio broad-
cast. Currently, most RDS stations are in large
cities, but many stations are now considering
broadcasting RDS data.
tuning. To move quickly through the channels,
hold the tuning buttons down.
Press the PRESET ABC button to change be-
tween the presets:
SEEK tuning
A→B→C
Push SEEK/TRACK (
or
). SEEK
tuning begins from low to high frequencies or
high to low frequencies, depending on which
button is pressed, and stops at the next broad-
casting station. If using the up button, once the
highest broadcasting station is reached, the ra-
dio continues in the SEEK mode at the lowest
broadcasting station. If using the down button,
once the lowest broadcasting station is reached,
the radio continues in the SEEK mode at the
highest broadcasting station.
The radio displays icon A, B or C to indicate
which set of presets is active.
RDS can display:
To store a radio station in a preset:
●
●
●
Station call sign, such as “WHFR 98.3”.
Station name, such as “The Groove”.
1. Select the desired preset by pressing PRE-
SET ABC.
Music or programming type such as “Clas-
sical”, “Country”, or “Rock”.
2. Select the desired AM, FM or SAT (if so
equipped) station band.
If the station broadcasts RDS information, the
RDS icon is displayed.
3. Tune to the desired station.
Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Program type (PTY):
SEEK tuning:
Off→Low→Mid→High
Compact disc (CD) player operation
PTY can be used to search for a certain program
type. Certain areas have a limited number of
stations that transmit RDS. Many stations trans-
mit call letters and frequencies only.
3. After selecting a program type, push the
SEEK/TRACK button (
or
) for
Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position.
less than 1.5 seconds within 10 seconds.
Tuning to the PTY station will start. If you do
not push the SEEK button within the 10
second period, the PTY mode will be can-
celed.
CAUTION
Searching or scanning by program type may yield
a limited number of selections.
● Do not force a compact disc into the CD
insert slot. This could damage the CD
and/or CD changer/player.
When CAT/RPT button is pressed for more than
1.5 seconds during FM or SAT (if so equipped)
mode, the PTY name of the current tuned station
is displayed. During this time if the PTY data code
is zero or the data is unreadable, the display will
show NONE.
SCAN tuning:
● Trying to load a CD with the CD door
closed could damage the CD and/or CD
changer.
4. Push the SCAN button for more than 1.5
seconds to scan the PTY name stations and
stop at each broadcasting station for 5 sec-
onds. Pushing the button again during this 5
second period will stop SCAN tuning and
the radio will remain tuned to that station. If
the SCAN button is not pushed within 5
seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next
station.
CD6 button
To change the PTY:
When the CD6 button is pressed with a compact
disc loaded and the radio playing, the radio turns
off and the last used compact disc starts to play.
1. Press the CAT/RPT button.
2. Press the TUNE/FF-REV (
or
)
CD loading
up/down button to chose a specific program
type.
Speed Sensitive Control Volume (SSV) (if
so equipped)
Press the LOAD button to start CD loading
mode.
ROCK, CLASSIC ROCK, SOFT ROCK,
TOP 40, COUNTRY, JAZZ, CLASSICAL,
OLDIES, NEWS, SPORTS, TALK, ANY
Your vehicle has Speed Sensitive Control Vol-
ume (SSV) for audio. The audio volume changes
as the driving speed changes.
The following sequence will occur:
1. If other discs are already loaded, the disc
number indicator on the lowest available
disc select button will start blinking. The
display shows “Select Disc” .
Press and hold the AUDIO button until the radio
beeps to start the editing mode. Press the AU-
DIO button until the display shows “SSV OFF”.
Press TUNE/FF-REV
change between:
2. The display changes to “Insert Disc” for a
(
or
)
to
maximum of 15 seconds.
4-32 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. During the 15 second interval, insert the
disc. The display changes to “Loading
Disc” .
7. Repeat steps 2–5 until all discs are loaded,
then the last loaded disc will begin to play.
The display shows the Disc number, Track
number and Elapsed Time.
Selected disc play
1. Press the disc select button whose disc icon
is displayed.
4. The CD will play after the disc is set to a play
position.
2. The indicator blinks during the change.
Selected disc loading
3. The CD plays after the disc is set to a play
position.
5. The indicator changes from blinking disc
number indicator to solid disc number
indicator and the display changes to show
the Disc number icon, Disc number, Track
number and Elapsed time.
1. Press an available disc select button whose
indicator is off. The display shows “Please
Wait”.
4. The indicator changes from blinking num-
bered disc to solid numbered disc and
the display shows the Disc number, Track
number and Elapsed Time.
2. The numbered disc indicator starts blink-
ing and the display shows “Insert Disc” for
15 seconds.
All disc loading
CAT/RPT :
1. Press and hold the LOAD button until the
radio beeps (>1.5 seconds).
3. Insert the CD. The display shows “Loading
Disc”.
When the CAT/RPT button is pushed while the
compact disc is being played, the play pattern
can be changed as follows:
2. The numbered disc indicator on the lowest
available disc select button will start blink-
ing. The display shows “All Loading”.
4. The CD will play after the disc is set to a play
position.
ALL DISC RPT → 1 DISC RPT → 1 TRACK RPT
→ ALL DISC RDM → 1 DISC RDM → ALL DISC
RPT
5. The indicator changes from blinking num-
bered disc to solid numbered disc and
the display shows the Disc icon, Disc num-
ber, Track number and Elapsed Time.
3. The display changes to “Insert Disc” for a
maximum of 15 seconds.
ALL DISC RPT: All discs loaded will be repeated.
1 DISC RPT: The disc that is currently playing will
be repeated.
1 TRACK RPT: The current track will be repeated
ALL DISC RDM: Tracks from all discs will be
played randomly.
4. During the 15 second interval, insert the
disc. The display changes to “Loading
Disc”.
If a disc is not inserted within 15 seconds or if the
load button is pressed during load sequence, the
entire disc load sequence will be canceled.
5. The indicator changes from blinking num-
Disc play
bered disc to solid numbered disc.
Press the CD6 button. If a CD is loaded and the
radio is playing, the radio turns off and the last
loaded disc starts to play.
1 DISC RDM: Tracks from the disc that is cur-
rently playing will be played randomly.
6. The disc number icon is turned on.
Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FF (fast forward) REW
(rewind) buttons
Press the SCAN button (<1.5 seconds) to scan
all tracks of the current disc for 10 seconds per
track. The display shows the track number and
elapsed time as normal. The disc track number is
flashed during Scan mode.
3. The disc ejects. Remove the disc. (If the disc
is not removed within 15 seconds, the disc
will reload.)
When the TUNE/FF-REV (
or
) but-
ton is pressed while the compact disc is playing,
the compact disc plays at an increased speed
while fast forwarding or rewinding. When the
button is released, the CD returns to normal play
speed.
4. The indicator and symbol for the disc are
turned off.
The Scan mode is canceled once it scans
through all tracks on the disc, or if the SCAN
button is pressed during Scan mode.
Select a disc
1. Press the desired disc, then press
the
button.
SEEK/TRACK buttons
All Discs, 1 Track
2. The numbered disc indicator starts blinking
and the display shows “Select Disc” for 2
seconds. The display then changes to “Disc
Eject” .
Press and hold the SCAN button (>1.5 seconds)
to scan the first track of all the loaded discs for 10
seconds per track. The display shows the track
number and elapsed time as normal. The disc
track number is flashed during Scan mode.
When
is pressed while the compact disc
is playing, the track following the present one
starts to play from the beginning. Press
several times to skip several tracks. Each time the
button is pressed, the CD advances 1 additional
track. The track number appears in the display
window. (When the last track on the compact
disc is skipped, the first track is played.)
3. The disc ejects. Remove the disc (If the disc
is not removed within 15 seconds, the disc
will reload.)
The Scan mode is canceled once it scans
through all the loaded discs, or if the SCAN
button is pressed during Scan mode.
4. The indicator and symbol for the disc are
turned off.
When
is pressed, the track being played
several
Eject CD
returns to the beginning. Press
All discs
Current disc
times to skip back several tracks. Each time the
button is pressed, the CD moves back 1 track. If
the play pattern is in CAT/RPT mode when the
button is pressed the next random selection will
be played.
1. Press and hold the
button until the
1. Press the
button.
radio beeps (>1.5 seconds).
2. The numbered disc indicator starts to blink
and the display shows “Select Disc” for 2
seconds. The display then changes to “Disc
Eject” .
2. The display then shows “All Disc Eject” .
3. When a disc is removed, the indicator and
disc icon will be turned off, and then the next
disc will emerge, and so on.
CD scan
1 Disc All Tracks
4-34 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. The display will be turned off after all discs
are ejected and removed.
If a disc is not removed within 15 seconds, or if
the
button is pressed again during the
Eject sequence, the entire disc Eject sequence
will be canceled.
LHA0468
7. FM band select button
8. AM band select button
9. SAT (satellite) radio select button*
10. SCAN button
1. SEEK/TRACK change button
2. TUNE/REW/FF button
3. PAUSE/MUTE button
4. CAT/RPT button
11. LOAD button
12. CD insert slot
5. PRESET A-B-C select button
6. CD play button
Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
sound level between the front and rear speakers
and Balance adjusts the sound between the right
and left speakers.
13. CD eject button
Audio main operation
14. POWER/VOLUME control knob
15. Station and CD select buttons (1 - 6)
16. Tuning and AUDIO control knob
(BASS, MID, TREBLE, FADE, BAL-
ANCE and SSV)
POWER/VOLUME control:
Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, and then
push the POWER/VOLUME control knob while
the system is off to call up the mode (radio or CD)
which was playing immediately before the system
was turned off.
To change the SSV mode to OFF, LOW, MID or
HIGH, turn the Tuning knob to the right or left.
Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the
desired level, press the AUDIO knob repeatedly
until the radio or CD display reappears. Other-
wise, the radio or CD display will automatically
reappear after about 10 seconds.
*No satellite radio reception is available
and “NO SAT” is displayed when the
SAT button is pressed unless optional
satellite receiver and antenna are in-
stalled and an XMா or SIRIUS™ satellite
radio service subscription is active. Sat-
ellite radio is not available in Alaska,
Hawaii and Guam.
To turn the system off, press the
POWER/VOLUME control knob.
Turn the POWER/VOLUME control knob to ad-
just the volume.
Clock set
For setting the clock see “Adjusting the time”
earlier in this section.
This vehicle has Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV)
for audio. The audio volume changes as the driv-
ing speed changes.
Display CD text:
FM-AM-SAT RADIO WITH
COMPACT DISC (CD) CHANGER (if
so equipped)
AUDIO knob (BASS, MIDRANGE, TREBLE,
FADE, BALANCE and SSV):
To change the text displayed while playing a CD,
press the AUDIO knob until “Display Mode” ap-
pears.
Press the AUDIO knob to change the mode as
follows:
Turn the Tuning knob within 2 seconds. The text
will change as follows:
No satellite radio reception is available and “NO
SAT” is displayed when the SAT button is
pressed to select satellite radio stations unless
optional satellite receiver and antenna are in-
stalled and an XMா or SIRIUS™ satellite radio
service subscription is active. Satellite radio is
not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.
BASS → MID → TREBLE → FADE → BALANCE
→ SSV
Track number ←→ Track title ←→ Disc title ←→
Track number
To adjust Bass, Mid (Midrange), Treble, Fade and
Balance, press the AUDIO knob until the desired
mode appears in the display. Turn the Tuning
knob to adjust Bass and Treble to the desired
level. You can also use the Tuning knob to adjust
Fader and Balance modes. Fader adjusts the
Display satellite radio text (if so equipped):
To change the text displayed while listening to
satellite radio, press the AUDIO knob until “Dis-
play Mode” appears.
4-36 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn the Tuning knob within 2 seconds. The text
will change as follows:
satellite radio service subscription is active. Sat-
ellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and
Guam.
SEEK tuning:
Push the SEEK/TRACK button (
or
)
Channel number ←→ Channel name ←→ Artist
for less than 1.5 seconds to tune from high to low
or low to high frequencies and stop at the next
broadcasting station.
←→ Title ←→ Channel number
If a compact disc is playing when the FM, AM or
SAT radio select button is pushed, the compact
disc will automatically be turned off and the last
radio station played will come on.
Pause/mute button:
To mute or pause the audio sound, push the
PAUSE/MUTE button. Radio mute will flash in the
display screen.
SCAN tuning
Push the SCAN button. SCAN illuminates in the
display window. SCAN tuning begins from low to
high frequencies. SCAN tuning stops for 5 sec-
onds at each broadcasting station that has suffi-
cient signal strength. When scanning, SCAN
blinks in the display. Pushing the SCAN button
again during this 5 second period stops SCAN
tuning and the radio remains tuned to that station.
The FM stereo indicator ST will glow during FM
stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast
signal is weak, the radio will automatically change
from stereo to monaural reception.
To release the mute or pause, push the button
again.
FM/AM/SAT radio operation
TUNE (Tuning):
FM/AM/SAT band select:
Pressing the FM, AM or SAT radio select button
will change the band to either FM, AM or SAT
(satellite, if so equipped) radio stations.
WARNING
Station memory operations:
The radio should not be tuned while driv-
ing so full attention may be given to ve-
hicle operation.
18 stations can be set for the FM, AM and SAT
(Satellite-if so equipped) radio to the A, B and C
preset button in any combination of FM, AM or
SAT stations.
When the FM, AM or SAT radio select button is
pressed while the ignition switch is in the ACC or
ON, the radio will come on at the station last
played.
To manually tune the radio, push the TUNE button
(
or
) or turn the tuning knob to right
or left.
1. Choose preset channel A, B or C using the
preset select button.
The last station played will also come on when
the POWER/VOLUME control knob is pressed
on.
To move quickly through the channels, hold either
the or button down for more than
1.5 seconds.
2. Select the desired FM, AM or SAT station band.
3. Tune to the desired station using manual,
SEEK or SCAN tuning. Push and hold any of
the desired station memory buttons (1 – 6)
until a beep sound is heard.
No satellite radio reception is available and “NO
SAT” is displayed when the SAT button is
pressed unless optional satellite receiver and
antenna are installed and an XMா or SIRIUS™
Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. The channel indicator will then come on and
the sound will resume. Memorizing is now
complete.
Program type (PTY):
SEEK tuning:
PTY can be used to search for a certain program
type. Certain areas have a limited number of
stations that transmit RDS. Many stations trans-
mit call letters and frequencies only.
3. After selecting a program type, push the
SEEK/TRACK button (
or
) for
5. Other buttons can be set in the same man-
ner.
less than 1.5 seconds within 10 seconds.
Tuning to the PTY station will start. If you do
not push the SEEK button within the 10
second period, the PTY mode will be can-
celed.
Searching or scanning by program type may yield
a limited number of selections.
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse
blows, the radio memory will be canceled. In that
case, reset the desired stations.
When CAT/RPT button is pressed for more than
1.5 seconds during FM or SAT (if so equipped)
mode, the PTY name of the current tuned station
is displayed. During this time if the PTY data code
is zero or the data is unreadable, the display will
show NONE.
SCAN tuning:
Radio data system (RDS):
4. Push the SCAN button for more than 1.5
seconds to scan the PTY name stations and
stop at each broadcasting station for 5 sec-
onds. Pushing the button again during this 5
second period will stop SCAN tuning and
the radio will remain tuned to that station. If
the SCAN button is not pushed within 5
seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next
station.
RDS stands for Radio Data System, and is a data
information service transmitted by some radio
stations on the FM band (not AM band) and/or
SAT radio encoded within a regular SAT broad-
cast. Currently, most RDS stations are in large
cities, but many stations are now considering
broadcasting RDS data.
To change the PTY:
1. Press the CAT/RPT button.
2. Press the TUNE/FF-REV (
or
)
up/down button to chose a specific program
type.
RDS can display:
Compact disc (CD) changer operation
●
●
●
Station call sign, such as “WHFR 98.3”.
Station name, such as “The Groove”.
ROCK, CLASSIC ROCK, SOFT ROCK,
TOP 40, COUNTRY, JAZZ, CLASSICAL,
OLDIES, NEWS, SPORTS, TALK, ANY
CAUTION
Music or programming type such as “Clas-
sical”, “Country” or “Rock”.
● Do not force a compact disc into the CD
insert slot. This could damage the CD
and/or CD changer/player.
If the station broadcasts RDS information, the
RDS icon is displayed.
● Trying to load a CD with the CD door
closed could damage the CD and/or CD
changer.
4-38 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position
and insert the compact disc into the slot with the
label side facing up. The compact disc will be
guided automatically into the slot and start play-
ing. To insert the disc, first press the LOAD
button.
When the CD button is pressed with the com-
pact disc loaded with the radio playing, the radio
will automatically be turned off and the compact
disc will start to play.
next track will start to play from its beginning.
Push several times to skip through tracks. The
compact disc will advance the number of times
the button is pushed. (When the last track on the
compact disc is skipped through, the first track
will be played.)
REW (Rewind), FF (Fast
Forward):
If the radio is already operating, it will automati-
cally turn off and the compact disc will play.
When pushing the
than 1.5 seconds, each track will play for about
10 seconds. To stop playing, push
or
button for more
When the
(rewind) or
(fast forward)
button is pushed while a compact disc is playing,
the compact disc will play while rewinding or fast
forwarding . When the button is released, the
compact disc will return to normal play speed.
If the system has been turned off while the com-
pact disc was playing, pressing the
POWER/VOLUME control knob will start the
compact disc.
the
button again.
CD select buttons:
When the CD button is pushed with the system
off and the compact disc loaded, the system will
turn on and the compact disc will start to play.
To play another CD that has been loaded, press a
CD select button (1 – 6).
LOAD button:
To insert a CD in the CD changer, press the
LOAD button for less than 1.5 seconds. Select
the loading slot by pressing the CD insert select
button (1 – 6), then insert the CD.
CAT/RPT:
When the CD button is pushed with the compact
disc loaded with the tape or the radio playing, the
tape or radio will automatically be turned off and
the compact disc will start to play.
When the CAT/RPT play button is pushed while
the compact disc is played, the play pattern can
be changed as follows:
To insert 6 CDs to the CD changer, press the
LOAD button for more than 1.5 seconds.
ALL DISC RPT → 1 DISC RPT→ 1 TRACK RPT
→ ALL DISC RDM → 1 DISC RDM → ALL DISC
RPT
SEEK/TRACK:
When the
button is pushed for less than 1.5
The slot numbers (1 – 6) will illuminate on the
display when CDs are loaded into the changer.
seconds while a compact disc is playing, the
track being played returns to its beginning. Push
several times to skip back through tracks. The
compact disc will go back the number of times
the button is pushed.
ALL DISC RPT: All discs loaded will be repeated.
1 DISC RPT: The disc that is currently playing will
be repeated.
1 TRACK RPT: The track that is currently playing
will be repeated
ALL DISC RDM: Tracks from all discs will be
played randomly
CD button:
When the CD button is pressed with the system
off and the compact disc loaded, the system will
turn on and the compact disc will start to play.
When the
button is pushed for less than 1.5
seconds while the compact disc is playing, the
Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 DISC RDM: Tracks from the disc that is cur-
rently playing will be played randomly
CD EJECT:
Current disc:
●
Press the slot number (1 – 6) for the desired
disc, then press the button. The com-
pact disc will be ejected. If the disc is not
removed within 15 seconds, the disc will
reload.
All discs:
●
Press and hold the
button for more
than 1.5 seconds. The compact discs will be
ejected one by one. If a disc is not removed
WHA0471
LHA0049
Type A
1. Volume control switch
2. Mode select switch
3. Audio power on/off switch
4. Audio tuning Up/Down
CD CARE AND CLEANING
within 15 seconds, or the
button is
●
●
●
Handle a CD by its edges. Do not bend the
disc. Never touch the surface of the disc.
Always place the discs in the storage case
when they are not being used.
To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the center
to the outer edge using a clean, soft cloth. Do
not wipe the disc using a circular motion.
pressed again during the eject sequence,
the entire disc eject sequence will be can-
celed.
When this button is pressed while the compact
disc is being played, the compact disc will eject
and the last source will be played.
STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR
AUDIO CONTROL (if so equipped)
CD IN indicator:
●
●
Do not use a conventional record cleaner or
alcohol intended for industrial use.
A new disc may be rough on the inner and
outer edges. Remove the rough edges by
rubbing the inner and outer edges with the
side of a pen or pencil as illustrated.
The slot numbers (1 – 6) will illuminate if CDs
have been loaded into the changer in CD mode
only.
4-40 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This system searches for the blank intervals be-
tween selections. If there is a blank interval within
1 program or there is no interval between pro-
grams, the system may not stop in the desired or
expected location.
“MODE” select switch
Push the mode select switch to change the
modes:
PRESET A → PRESET B → PRESET C → CD
Volume control switch
Change disc (CD) (if so equipped):
Push the SEEK tuning switch
or
for
Push the volume control switch up or down to
increase or decrease the volume.
more than 1.5 seconds to change the playing
disc up or down.
Tuning
ANTENNA
Window antenna
Memory change (radio):
The antenna pattern is printed inside the rear
window.
LHA0450
While in one of the preset radio station banks (A,
Type B
B or C), push the tuning switch
or
for less than 1.5 seconds to change to the next
preset station in memory.
1. Volume control switch
2. Mode select switch
3. Trip
CAUTION
● Do not place metalized film near the
rear window glass or attach any metal
parts to it. This may cause poor recep-
tion or noise.
Seek tuning (radio):
4. Audio tuning Up/Down
Push the tuning switch
or
for more
POWER on/off switch (Type A)
than 1.5 seconds to seek the next or previous
radio station.
With the ignition key turned to the ACC or ON
position, push the POWER switch to turn the
audio system on or off.
● When cleaning the inside of the rear
window, be careful not to scratch or
damage the rear window antenna.
Lightly wipe along the antenna with a
dampened soft cloth.
Next/Previous track (CD):
Push the tuning switch
or
for less
Trip set (Type B)
than 1.5 seconds to return to the beginning of the
present track or skip to the next track. Push
several times to skip back or skip through tracks.
For information on using the trip computer see
“Trip computer” in the “Instrument and controls”
section of this owner’s manual.
Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO
When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone in
your NISSAN, be sure to observe the following
precautions, otherwise the new equipment may
adversely affect the engine control system and
other electronic parts.
● Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in
(20 cm) away from the electronic con-
trol system harnesses. Do not route the
antenna wire next to any harness.
● Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio
as recommended by the manufacturer.
WARNING
● Connect the ground wire from the CB
radio chassis to the body.
● A cellular telephone should not be used
while driving so full attention may be
given to vehicle operation. Some juris-
dictions prohibit the use of cellular tele-
phones while driving.
● For details, consult a NISSAN dealer.
● If you must make a call while your ve-
hicle is in motion, the hands free cellu-
lar phone operational mode (if so
equipped) is highly recommended. Ex-
ercise extreme caution at all times so
full attention may be given to vehicle
operation.
● If a conversation in a moving vehicle
requires you to take notes, pull off the
road to a safe location and stop your
vehicle before doing so.
CAUTION
● Keep the antenna as far away as pos-
sible from the electronic control
modules.
4-42 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Precautions when starting and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Three-way catalyst. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Avoiding collision and rollover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Ignition switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Automatic transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Manual transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Key positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Nissan vehicle immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Automatic transmission (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Manual transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Cruise control (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Precautions on cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Cruise control operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Increasing fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Parking/parking on hills. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Brake precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Anti-lock braking system (ABS)
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Traction control system (TCS) (if so equipped). . . . . . .5-21
Cold weather driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Freeing a frozen door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Anti-freeze. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Draining of coolant water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Tire equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Special winter equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Driving on snow or ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Engine block heater (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING
AND DRIVING
● If you suspect that exhaust fumes are
entering the vehicle, drive with all win-
dows fully open, and have the vehicle
inspected immediately.
a. The vehicle is raised for service.
WARNING
b. You suspect that exhaust fumes are
● Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assistance
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets
should also not be left alone. They
could accidentally injure themselves or
others through inadvertent operation of
the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,
temperatures in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to cause
severe or possibly fatal injuries to
people or animals.
entering
into
the
passenger
compartment.
● Do not run the engine in closed spaces
such as a garage.
c. You notice a change in the sound of
the exhaust system.
● Do not park the vehicle with the engine
running for any extended length of time.
d. You have had an accident involving
damage to the exhaust system, un-
derbody, or rear of the vehicle.
● Keep the trunk lid closed while driving,
otherwise exhaust gases could be
drawn into the passenger compart-
ment. If you must drive with the trunk lid
open, follow these precautions:
THREE-WAY CATALYST
The three-way catalyst is an emission control
device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust
gases in the three-way catalyst are burned at
high temperatures to help reduce pollutants.
● Closely supervise children when they
are around cars to prevent them from
playing and becoming locked in the
trunk where they could be seriously in-
jured. Keep the car locked, with the rear
seatback and trunk lid securely latched
when not in use, and prevent children’s
access to car keys.
1. Open all the windows.
2. Set the
air recirculation but-
ton to off and the fan control dial to
high to circulate the air.
WARNING
● The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys-
tem are very hot. Keep people, animals
or flammable materials away from the
exhaust system components.
● If electrical wiring or other cable con-
nections must pass to a trailer through
the seal on the trunk lid or the body,
follow the manufacturer’s recommen-
dation to prevent carbon monoxide en-
try into the vehicle.
EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)
WARNING
● Do not stop or park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry grass,
waste paper or rags. They may ignite
and cause a fire.
● Do not breathe exhaust gases; they
contain colorless and odorless carbon
monoxide. Carbon monoxide is danger-
ous. It can cause unconsciousness or
death.
● The exhaust system and body should be
inspected by
whenever:
a
qualified mechanic
5-2 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AVOIDING COLLISION AND
ROLLOVER
DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND
DRIVING
CAUTION
● Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits
from leaded gasoline will seriously re-
duce the three-way catalyst’s ability to
help reduce exhaust pollutants.
WARNING
WARNING
Never drive under the influence of alcohol
or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream re-
duces coordination, delays reaction time
and impairs judgement. Driving after
drinking alcohol increases the likelihood
of being involved in an accident injuring
yourself and others. Additionally, if you
are injured in an accident, alcohol can
increase the severity of the injury.
Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe
and prudent manner may result in loss of
control or an accident.
● Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc-
tions in the ignition, fuel injection, or
electrical systems can cause overrich
fuel flow into the three-way catalyst,
causing it to overheat. Do not keep driv-
ing if the engine misfires, or if notice-
able loss of performance or other un-
Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey
all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed,
high speed cornering, or sudden steering ma-
neuvers, because these driving practices could
cause you to lose control of your vehicle. As with
any vehicle, loss of control could result in a
collision with other vehicles or objects, or
cause the vehicle to roll over, particularly if
the loss of control causes the vehicle to
slide sideways. Be attentive at all times, and
avoid driving when tired. Never drive when under
the influence of alcohol or drugs (including pre-
scription or over-the-counter drugs which may
cause drowsiness). Always wear your seat belt as
outlined in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system” section of this
manual, and also instruct your passengers to do so.
usual
operating
conditions
are
detected. Have the vehicle inspected
promptly by a NISSAN dealer.
NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However,
you must choose not to drive under the influence
of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are
injured or killed in alcohol-related accidents. Al-
though the local laws vary on what is considered
to be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol
affects all people differently and most people
underestimate the effects of alcohol.
● Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel
level. Running out of fuel could cause
the engine to misfire, damaging the
three-way catalyst.
● Do not race the engine while warming it
up.
Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! And
that is true for drugs, too (over-the-counter, pre-
scription, and illegal drugs). Don’t drive if your
ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alco-
hol, drugs, or some other physical condition.
● Do not push or tow your vehicle to start
the engine.
Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in collisions
and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an unbelted
or improperly belted person is significantly
more likely to be injured or killed than a
person properly wearing a seat belt.
Starting and driving 5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IGNITION SWITCH
To remove the key from the ignition switch:
There is an OFF position between the
LOCK and ACC positions. The OFF position
is indicated by a “1” on the key cylinder.
When the ignition is in the OFF position,
the steering wheel is not locked.
1. Shift the selector lever to the P (Park) posi-
tion with the key in the ON position.
2. Turn the key to the LOCK position.
3. Remove the key from the ignition.
In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it
must be turned about 1/8 of a turn clockwise
from the straight up position.
If the selector lever is shifted to the P (Park)
position after the key is turned to the OFF posi-
tion or when the key cannot be turned to the
LOCK position, proceed as follows to remove the
key.
To lock the steering wheel, turn the key to
the LOCK position. Remove the key. To
unlock the steering wheel, insert the key
and turn it gently while rotating the steer-
ing wheel slightly right and left.
1. Move the shift selector lever into the P (Park)
position.
WSD0057
If the key will not turn from the LOCK posi-
tion, turn the steering wheel to the left or
right while turning the key to unlock the
key cylinder.
2. Turn the ignition key slightly toward the ON
position.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
The ignition lock is designed so the key cannot be
turned to the LOCK position and removed until
the shift selector lever is moved to the P (Park)
position.
3. Turn the key to the LOCK position.
4. Remove the key.
WARNING
The shift selector lever is designed so it cannot
moved out of P (Park) and into any of the other
gear positions if the ignition key is turned to OFF
position or if the key is removed from the switch.
Never remove or turn the key to the LOCK
position while driving. The steering wheel
will lock. This may cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle and could result in
serious vehicle damage or personal injury.
When removing the key from the ignition, make
sure the shift selector lever is in the P (Park)
position.
If the selector lever is not returned to P (Park)
position, the key cannot be moved to the LOCK
position.
The shift selector lever can be moved if the
ignition switch is in the ON position and the
foot brake pedal is depressed.
5-4 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To lock the steering wheel, turn the key to
the LOCK position. Remove the key. To
unlock the steering wheel, insert the key
and turn it gently while rotating the steer-
ing wheel slightly right and left.
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM
The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not
allow the engine to start without the use of the
registered key.
KEY POSITIONS
If the engine fails to start using a registered key
(for example, when interference is caused by
another registered key, an automated toll road
device or automatic payment device on the key
ring), restart the engine using the following pro-
cedures:
LOCK: Normal parking position (0)
OFF: (Manual transmission model) (1)
The engine can be turned off without locking the
steering wheel.
ACC: (Accessories) (2)
1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position
for approximately 5 seconds.
WSD0058
This position activates electrical accessories
such as the radio when the engine is not running.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK
position, and wait approximately 10 sec-
onds.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
ON: Normal operating position (3)
The ignition switch includes a device that helps
prevent accidental removal of the key while driv-
ing.
This position turns on the ignition system and the
electrical accessories.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.
4. Restart the engine while holding the device
(which may have caused the interference)
separate from the registered key.
START: (4)
The key can only be removed when the ignition
switch is in the LOCK position.
This position starts the engine. As soon as the
engine has started, release the key. It automati-
cally returns to the ON position.
On manual transmission models, to turn the igni-
tion key to LOCK position from ACC or ON
position, turn the key to OFF, push the key in, then
turn the key to LOCK.
If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec-
ommends placing the registered key on a sepa-
rate key ring to avoid interference from other
devices.
In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it
must be turned about 1/8 of a turn clockwise
from the straight up position.
Starting and driving 5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE
STARTING THE ENGINE
●
●
Make sure the area around the vehicle is
clear.
1. Apply the parking brake.
● If the engine is very hard to start in ex-
tremely cold weather or when restarting,
depress the accelerator pedal a little (ap-
proximately 1/3 to the floor) and hold it
and then crank the engine. Release the
key and the accelerator pedal when the
engine starts.
2. Automatic transmission:
Check fluid levels such as engine oil, cool-
ant, brake and clutch fluid, and window
washer fluid as frequently as possible, or at
least whenever you refuel.
Move the shift selector lever to P (Park) or N
(Neutral). P (Park) is recommended.
The shift selector lever cannot be
moved out of P (Park) and into any of
the other gear positions if the ignition
key is turned to the OFF position or if
the key is removed from the ignition
switch.
●
●
Check that all windows and lights are clean.
● If the engine is very hard to start because
it is flooded, depress the accelerator
pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.
Crank the engine for 5-6 seconds. After
cranking the engine, release the accel-
erator pedal. Crank the engine with your
foot off the accelerator pedal by turn-
ing the ignition key to START. Release the
key when the engine starts. If the engine
starts, but fails to run, repeat the above
procedure.
Visually inspect tires for their appearance
and condition. Also check tires for proper
inflation.
●
●
●
●
Lock all doors.
The starter is designed not to operate if
the shift selector lever is in any of the
driving positions.
Position seat and adjust head restraints.
Adjust inside and outside mirrors.
Manual transmission:
Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to
do likewise.
Move the shift lever to N (Neutral). Depress
the clutch pedal to the floor while cranking
the engine.
●
Check the operation of warning lights when
the key is turned to the ON (3) position. See
“Warning/indicator lights and audible re-
minders” in the “Instruments and controls”
section of this manual.
CAUTION
The starter is designed not to operate
unless the clutch pedal is fully de-
pressed.
Do not operate the starter for more than
15 seconds at a time. If the engine does
not start, turn the key off and wait 10
seconds before cranking again, otherwise
the starter could be damaged.
3. Crank the engine with your foot off the
accelerator pedal by turning the ignition
key to START. Release the key when the
engine starts. If the engine starts, but fails to
run, repeat the above procedure.
5-6 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DRIVING THE VEHICLE
4. Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 sec-
onds after starting. Do not race the engine
while warming it up. Drive at moderate
speed for a short distance first, especially in
cold weather.
The automatic transmission in your vehicle is
electronically controlled to produce maximum
power and smooth operation.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (if so
equipped)
The recommended operating procedures for this
transmission are shown on the following pages.
Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle
performance and driving enjoyment.
WARNING
● Do not depress the accelerator pedal
while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-
tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or manual
shift mode. Always depress the brake
pedal until shifting is completed. Fail-
ure to do so could cause you to lose
control and have an accident.
● Cold engine idle speed is high, so use
caution when shifting into a forward or
reverse gear before the engine has
warmed up.
● Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse)
while the vehicle is moving. This could
cause an accident.
CAUTION
● When stopping the vehicle on an uphill
grade, do not hold the vehicle by de-
pressing the accelerator pedal. The foot
brake should be used for this purpose.
● Do not downshift abruptly on slippery
roads. This may cause a loss of control.
Starting and driving 5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and
move the shift selector lever into a driving
gear.
3. Release the foot brake, then gradually start
the vehicle in motion.
The automatic transmission is designed so
the foot brake pedal MUST be depressed
before shifting from P (Park) to any drive
position while the ignition switch is in the
ON position.
The shift selector lever cannot be moved
out of P (Park) and into any of the other
gear positions if the ignition key is turned
to the LOCK, OFF or ACC position or if the
key is removed.
LSD0023
LSD0022
Shifting
Gate type shift
After starting the engine, fully depress the brake
pedal and move the shift selector lever out of the
P (Park) position.
The automatic transmission in your vehicle is
electronically controlled to produce maximum
power and smooth operation.
The recommended operating procedures for this
transmission are shown on the following pages.
Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle
performance and driving enjoyment.
WARNING
Apply the parking brake if the selector
lever is in any position while the engine is
not running. Failure to do so could cause
the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll
away and result in serious personal injury
or property damage.
Starting the vehicle
1. After starting the engine, fully depress the
foot brake pedal before attempting to move
the shift selector lever out of the P (Park)
position.
5-8 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the key is turned to the OFF or ACC position for
any reason while the vehicle is in N (Neutral), or
any D (Drive) position, the shift selector lever
cannot be moved to P (Park). Additionally, the key
cannot be turned to the LOCK position and be
removed from the ignition switch. If this occurs,
perform the following steps:
R (Reverse):
Do not shift into the 2 position at speeds above
62 MPH (100 km/h). Do not exceed 62 MPH
(100 km/h) in the 2 position.
CAUTION
1 (Low gear):
Use this position only when the vehicle is
completely stopped.
Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly
or slow driving through deep snow, sand or mud,
or for maximum engine braking on steep downhill
grades.
Use this position to back up. Make sure the
vehicle is completely stopped before selecting
the R (Reverse) position. The brake pedal
must be depressed to move the selector
lever from P (Park), N (Neutral) or any drive
position to R (Reverse).
1. Apply the parking brake when the vehicle is
stopped.
Do not shift into the 1 position at speeds above
34 MPH (55 km/h). Do not exceed 34 MPH (55
km/h) in the 1 position.
2. Turn the key to the ON position.
3. Depress the foot brake pedal.
N (Neutral):
4. Move the shift selector lever to P (Park) or N
(Neutral) to restart the vehicle (P is pre-
ferred). Move the shift selector lever to P
(Park) to park the vehicle and turn the igni-
tion key to the LOCK position to remove the
key.
Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. The
engine can be started in this position. You may
shift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled engine
while the vehicle is moving.
D (Drive):
P (Park):
Use this position for all normal forward driving.
3 (Third gear):
Use this selector position when the vehicle is
parked or when starting the engine. Make sure
the vehicle is completely stopped. The brake
pedal must be depressed to move the se-
lector lever from the N (Neutral) or any
drive position to P (Park). Apply the parking
brake. When parking on a hill, apply the parking
brake first, then shift the selector lever into the P
(Park) position.
Use this position for driving up and down long
slopes where engine braking would be advanta-
geous.
2 (Second gear):
Use this position for hill climbing or engine brak-
ing on downhill grades.
Starting and driving 5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5 (Fifth):
●
●
The transmission will automatically down-
shift the gears. (For example, if you select the
3rd range, the transmission will shift down
between the 3rd and 1st gears.)
Use this position for all normal forward driving at
highway speeds.
4 (Fourth):
Moving the selector lever rapidly to the same
side twice will shift the ranges in succession.
For driving up or down long slopes where engine
braking would be advantageous.
When canceling the manual shift mode:
3 (Third) and 2 (Second):
Return the selector lever to the D position to
return the transmission to the normal driving
mode.
Use for hill climbing or engine braking on downhill
grades.
●
In the manual shift mode, the transmis-
sion may not shift to the selected gear.
This helps maintain driving perfor-
mance and reduces the chance of ve-
hicle damage or loss of control.
M1 (First):
LSD0126
Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly
or driving slowly through deep snow, sand or
mud, or for maximum engine braking on steep
downhill grades.
Manual shift mode
When the selector lever is shifted from D to the
manual shift gate with the vehicle stopped or
while driving, the transmission enters the manual
shift mode. Shift ranges can be selected manu-
ally.
●
In the manual shift mode, the transmis-
sion may shift up automatically to a
higher range than selected if the en-
gine speed is too high. When the ve-
hicle speed decreases, the transmis-
sion automatically shifts down and
shifts to 1st gear before the vehicle
comes to a stop.
●
Remember not to drive at high speeds for
extended periods of time in lower than 4
range. This reduces fuel economy.
When shifting up:
In the manual shift mode, the shift range is dis-
played on the position indicator in the meter.
When shifting the shift lever to the manual shift
gate, the position indicator displays 1 (first) up to
5 (fifth) depending on vehicle speed.
Move the selector lever to the + (up) side. (Shifts
to higher range.)
When shifting down:
Move the selector lever to the Ϫ (down) side.
(Shifts to lower range.)
Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows:
1⇔ 2 ⇔ 3 ⇔ 4 ⇔ 5
5-10 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Turn the key to the ON position to unlock the
steering wheel. Now the vehicle may be
moved to the desired location.
If the shift selector lever cannot be moved out of
P (Park), have a NISSAN dealer check the auto-
matic transmission system as soon as possible.
WARNING
If the selector lever cannot be moved from
the P (Park) position while the engine is
running and the brake pedal is depressed,
the stop lights may not work. Malfunction-
ing stop lights could cause an accident
injuring yourself and others.
LSD0024
LSD0127
Type A
Type B
1. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position
and remove the key
Shift lock release
If the battery is discharged, the shift selector lever
may not be moved from the P (Park) position even
with the brake pedal depressed.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Remove the shift lock release cover as
shown.
To move the shift selector lever, release the shift
lock. The shift selector lever can be moved to N
(Neutral). However, the steering wheel will be
locked unless the ignition switch is turned to the
ON position. This allows the vehicle to be moved
if the battery is discharged.
4. Insert a small screwdriver in the shift lock
release slot and push down.
5. Move the shift selector lever to the N (Neu-
tral) position while holding down the shift
lock release.
To push the shift lock release, complete the fol-
lowing procedure:
Starting and driving 5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accelerator downshift
— in D position —
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
WARNING
For passing or hill climbing, depress the accel-
erator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmis-
sion down into a lower gear, depending on the
vehicle speed.
● Do not downshift abruptly on slippery
roads. This may cause a loss of control.
● Do not over-rev the engine when shift-
ing to a lower gear. This may cause a
loss of control or engine damage.
Fail-safe
When the fail-safe operation occurs, please note
that the transmission will be locked in any of the
forward gears according to the condition.
CAUTION
● Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal
while driving. This may cause clutch
damage.
If the vehicle is driven under extreme con-
ditions, such as excessive wheel spinning
and subsequent hard braking, the fail-safe
system may be activated. This will occur
even if all electrical circuits are functioning
properly. In this case, turn the ignition key
OFF and wait for 3 seconds. Then turn the
key back to the ON position. The vehicle
should return to its normal operating con-
dition. If it does not return to its normal
operating condition, have a NISSAN dealer
check the transmission and repair it if nec-
essary.
LSD0128
5 - speed
● Fully depress the clutch pedal before
shifting to help prevent transmission
damage.
Shifting
To change gears, or when upshifting or down-
shifting, depress the clutch pedal fully, shift into
the appropriate gear, then release the clutch
slowly and smoothly.
● Stop your vehicle completely before
shifting into R (Reverse).
● When the vehicle is stopped with the
engine running (for example, at a stop
light), shift to N (Neutral) and release
the clutch pedal with the foot brake
applied.
To ensure smooth gear changes, fully depress
the clutch pedal before operating the shift lever. If
the clutch pedal is not fully depressed before the
transmission is shifted, a gear noise may be
heard. Transmission damage could occur.
On the 5-speed manual transmission, you cannot
shift directly from 5th gear into R (Reverse). First
shift into N (Neutral), then into R (Reverse).
5-12 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For VQ35DE SE-R:
Suggested upshift speeds
GEAR CHANGE
ACCEL shift
point MPH
(km/h)
CRUISE shift
point MPH
(km/h)
The following are suggested vehicle speeds for
shifting into a higher gear. These suggestions
relate to fuel economy and vehicle performance.
Actual upshift speeds will vary according to road
conditions, the weather and individual driving
habits.
1st to 2nd
2nd to 3rd
3rd to 4th
4th to 5th
5th to 6th
13 (21)
23 (37)
33 (53)
39 (63)
13 (21)
16 (26)
27 (44)
36 (58)
For normal acceleration in low altitude areas (less
than 4,000 ft [1219 m]):
For QR25DE:
For quick acceleration in low altitude areas and
high altitude areas (over 4,000 ft [1219 m]):
GEAR CHANGE
ACCEL shift
point MPH
(km/h)
CRUISE shift
point MPH
(km/h)
Gear change
1st to 2nd
2nd to 3rd
3rd to 4th
4th to 5th
5th to 6th*
MPH (km/h)
15 (24)
LSD0133
6 - speed
1st to 2nd
2nd to 3rd
3rd to 4th
4th to 5th
15 (24)
25 (40)
36 (58)
40 (64)
15 (24)
18 (29)
30 (48)
39 (62)
On the 6–speed manual transmission to back up,
lift up on the collar just below the shift lever and
then move it to the R (Reverse) position after
stopping the vehicle completely.
25 (40)
40 (64)
45 (72)
If it is difficult to move the shift lever into R
(Reverse) or 1 (1st), shift into N (Neutral), then
release the clutch pedal. Depress the clutch
pedal again and shift into R (Reverse) or 1 (1st).
For VQ35DE:
GEAR CHANGE
*6 Speed available on SE-R models only.
ACCEL shift
point MPH
(km/h)
CRUISE shift
point MPH
(km/h)
Suggested maximum speed in each
gear
1st to 2nd
2nd to 3rd
3rd to 4th
4th to 5th
13 (21)
23 (37)
33 (53)
39 (63)
13 (21)
16 (26)
27 (44)
36 (58)
Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is not
running smoothly, or if you need to accelerate.
Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed
(shown below) in any gear. For level road driving,
Starting and driving 5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PARKING BRAKE
use the highest gear suggested for that speed.
Always observe posted speed limits, and drive
according to the road conditions, which will en-
sure safe operation. Do not over-rev the engine
when shifting to a lower gear as it may cause
engine damage or loss of vehicle control.
WARNING
● Be sure the parking brake is fully re-
leased before driving. Failure to do so
can cause brake failure and lead to an
accident.
● Do not release the parking brake from
GEAR
QR25DE
VQ35DE
outside the vehicle.
MPH (km/h)
MPH (km/h)
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
5th
32 (52)
57 (92)
89 (143)
—
41 (66)
70 (113)
— (—)
—
● Do not use the gear shift in place of the
parking brake. When parking, be sure
the parking brake is fully engaged.
● Do not leave children unattended in a
vehicle. They could release the parking
brake and cause an accident.
—
—
LSD0131
For VQ35DE SE-R:
GEAR
A
To engage: Pull the lever up
.
᭺
VQ35DE
To release:
MPH (km/h)
37 (60)
61 (98)
85 (137)
—
1. Firmly apply the foot brake.
2. Manual transmission models:
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
5th
6th
Place the shift lever in the N (Neutral) posi-
tion.
—
Automatic transmission models:
—
Move the shift selector lever to the P (Park)
position.
3. While pulling up on the parking brake lever
slightly, push the button and lower com-
B
pletely
.
᭺
5-14 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CRUISE CONTROL (if so equipped)
4. Before driving, be sure the brake warning
light goes out.
●
The SET indicator light may blink when the
cruise control main switch is turned ON
while
pushing
the
ACCEL/RES,
COAST/SET, or CANCEL switch (located
on the steering wheel). To properly set the
cruise control system, use the following pro-
cedures.
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control when driving
under the following conditions:
● When it is not possible to keep the
vehicle at a set speed.
LSD0075
● In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in
1. ACCEL/RES switch
2. COAST/SET switch
3. ON/OFF switch
speed.
● On winding or hilly roads.
● On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.).
● In very windy areas.
4. CANCEL switch
PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE
CONTROL
Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle
control and result in an accident.
●
If the cruise control system malfunctions, it
cancels automatically. The SET indicator
light in the instrument panel then blinks to
warn the driver.
●
If the SET indicator light blinks, turn the
cruise control main switch off and have the
system checked by a NISSAN dealer.
Starting and driving 5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
happens, drive without the cruise control.
●
●
Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch.
When the vehicle attains the speed you de-
sire, release the switch.
CAUTION
To cancel the preset speed, use one of the
following three methods.
On manual transmission models, do not
shift into N (Neutral) without depressing
the clutch pedal when the cruise control is
set. Should this occur, depress the clutch
pedal and turn the main switch off imme-
diately. Failure to do so may cause engine
damage.
Push and release the ACCEL/RES switch.
Each time you do this, the set speed in-
creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).
●
●
●
Push the CANCEL button; the SET indicator
light in the instrument panel goes out.
Tap the brake pedal; the SET indicator light
goes out.
To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one
of the following three methods.
Turn the main switch off. Both the CRUISE
indicator light and SET indicator light in the
instrument panel go out.
●
●
●
Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the ve-
hicle attains the desired speed, push the
COAST/SET switch and release it.
CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS
The cruise control allows driving at a speed be-
tween 25 - 89 MPH (40 - 144 km/h) without
keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.
The cruise control is automatically canceled and
the SET light in the instrument panel goes out if:
Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. Re-
lease the switch when the vehicle slows to
the desired speed.
To turn on the cruise control, push the main
switch. The CRUISE indicator light in the instru-
ment panel comes on.
●
you depress the brake or clutch pedal while
pushing the ACCEL/RES or SET/COAST
switch. The preset speed is deleted from
memory.
Push and release the COAST/SET switch.
Each time you do this, the set speed de-
creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).
To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle to
the desired speed, push the COAST/SET switch
and release it. The SET indicator light in the
instrument panel comes on. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal. Your vehicle maintains the set
speed.
●
●
the vehicle slows down more than 8 MPH
(13 km/h) below the set speed.
To resume the preset speed, push and re-
lease the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle re-
turns to the last set cruising speed when the
vehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h).
you depress the clutch pedal (manual trans-
mission), or move the shift selector lever to N
(Neutral) (automatic transmission).
●
To pass another vehicle, depress the ac-
celerator pedal. When you release the
pedal, the vehicle returns to the previously
set speed.
To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one
of the following three methods.
●
Depress the accelerator pedal. When the
vehicle attains the desired speed, push and
release the COAST/SET switch.
●
The vehicle may not maintain the set speed
when going up or down steep hills. If this
5-16 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BREAK-IN SCHEDULE
INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY
●
Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintain
cruising speeds with a constant accelerator
position.
●
●
When cruising at highway speeds, it is more
economical to use the air conditioner and
leave the windows closed to reduce drag.
CAUTION
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),
follow these recommendations to obtain
maximum engine performance and en-
sure the future reliability and economy of
your new vehicle. Failure to follow these
recommendations may result in short-
ened engine life and reduced engine
performance.
●
●
Drive at moderate speeds on the highway.
Driving at high speed lowers fuel economy.
Use the recommended viscosity engine oil.
See “Engine oil and oil filter recommenda-
tion” in “Technical and consumer informa-
tion” later in this manual.
Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking.
Maintain a safe distance behind other ve-
hicles.
●
Use a proper gear range which suits road
conditions. On level roads, shift into high
gear as soon as possible.
●
Avoid driving for long periods at constant
speed, either fast or slow, and do not run the
engine over 4,000 rpm.
●
●
●
Avoid unnecessary engine idling.
Keep your engine tuned up.
●
●
●
●
Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.
Avoid quick starts.
Follow the recommended periodic mainte-
nance schedule.
Avoid hard braking as much as possible.
Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles
(800 km). Your engine, axle or other parts
could be damaged.
●
●
●
Keep the tires inflated to the correct pres-
sure. Low tire pressure increases tire wear
and lowers fuel economy.
Keep the wheels in correct alignment. Im-
proper alignment increases tire wear and
lowers fuel economy.
Air conditioner operation lowers fuel
economy. Use the air conditioner only when
necessary.
Starting and driving 5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS
● Do not leave children unattended inside
the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-
tivate switches or controls. Unattended
children could become involved in seri-
ous accidents.
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Manual transmission models:
Place the shift lever in the R (Reverse) posi-
tion. When parking on an uphill grade, place
the shift lever in 1st gear.
Automatic transmission models:
Move the shift selector lever to the P (Park)
position.
WSD0050
● Safe parking procedures require that
both the parking brake be set and the
transmission placed into P (Park) for
automatic transmission models or in an
appropriate gear for manual transmis-
sion models. Failure to do so could
cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly
or roll away and result in an accident.
Make sure the shift lever has been
pushed as far forward as it can go and
cannot be moved without depressing
the foot brake pedal.
WARNING
3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into
traffic when parked on an incline, it is a good
practice to turn the wheels as illustrated.
● Do not stop or park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry grass,
waste paper or rags. They may ignite
and cause a fire.
A
●
HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB:
᭺
Turn the wheels into the curb and move the
vehicle forward until the curb side wheel
gently touches the curb.
B
HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB:
᭺
Turn the wheels away from the curb and
move the vehicle back until the curb side
wheel gently touches the curb.
●
● Never leave the engine running while
the vehicle is unattended.
5-18 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
POWER STEERING
BRAKE SYSTEM
●
HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO
The power assisted steering uses a hydraulic
pump, driven by the engine, to assist steering.
The brake system has two separate hydraulic
circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still
have braking at two wheels.
C
CURB:
᭺
Turn the wheels toward the side of the road
so the vehicle will move away from the cen-
ter of the road if it moves.
If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks, you
will still have control of the vehicle. However,
much greater steering effort is needed, especially
in sharp turns and at low speeds.
BRAKE PRECAUTIONS
Vacuum assisted brakes
4. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position
and remove the key.
The brake booster aids braking by using engine
vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the
vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However,
greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be
required to stop the vehicle and stopping dis-
tance will be longer.
WARNING
If the engine is not running or is turned off
while driving, the power assist for the
steering will not work. Steering will be
harder to operate.
Using the brakes
Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while
driving. This will overheat the brakes, wear out the
brakes and pads faster, and reduce gas mileage.
To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the
brakes from overheating, reduce speed and
downshift to a lower gear before going down a
slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may
reduce braking performance and could result in
loss of vehicle control.
Starting and driving 5-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
heat up the brakes. Do this until the brakes return
to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high
speeds until the brakes function correctly.
When driving, the anti-lock braking system con-
trols the wheels so they will not lock when brak-
ing abruptly or when braking on a slippery road.
Thus, steering control is increased and swerving
of the vehicle is decreased during emergency
braking. The system detects the wheel rotation
rate and electronically controls the pressure ap-
plied to each brake. Slight vibration on the brake
pedal accompanied by noise usually occurs while
the ABS system is operating. Such vibration and
noise encountered during abrupt braking is not a
problem, but indicates that the system is func-
tioning properly. However, the pulsation may in-
dicate that road conditions are hazardous and
extra care is required while driving.
WARNING
● While driving on a slippery surface, be
careful when braking, accelerating or
downshifting. Abrupt braking or accel-
erating could cause the wheels to skid
and result in an accident.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM
(ABS) (if so equipped)
The anti-lock braking system controls the brakes
so the wheels do not lock when braking abruptly
or when braking on slippery surfaces. The system
detects the rotation speed at each wheel and
varies the brake fluid pressure to prevent each
wheel from locking and sliding. By preventing
wheel lockup, the system helps the driver main-
tain steering control and helps to minimize swerv-
ing and spinning on slippery surfaces.
● If the engine is not running or is turned
off while driving, the power assist for
the brakes will not work. Braking will be
harder.
Parking brake break-in
Break-in the parking brake shoes whenever the
stopping effect of the parking brake is weakened
or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or
drum/rotors are replaced, in order to assure the
best brake performance.
Self-test feature
Using the system
The anti-lock braking system consists of elec-
tronic sensors and hydraulic solenoids controlled
by a computer. The computer has a built-in diag-
nostic feature that tests the system each time you
start the engine and move the vehicle at a low
speed in forward or reverse. When the self-test
occurs, you may hear a “clunk”noise and/or feel a
pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and is
not an indication of any malfunction. If the com-
puter senses any malfunction, it switches the
anti-lock braking system off and turns on the ABS
brake warning light on the instrument panel. The
braking system then operates normally, but with-
out anti-lock assistance.
Depress the brake pedal and hold it down.
This procedure is described in the vehicle service
manual and can be performed by a NISSAN
dealer.
WARNING
Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so
may result in increased stopping
distances.
Wet brakes
When the vehicle is washed or driven through
water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your
braking distance will be longer and the vehicle
may pull to one side during braking.
Normal operation
The anti-lock braking system does not operate at
speeds below 3 - 6 MPH (5 - 10 km/h). (The
speeds vary according to road conditions.)
To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe
speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to
5-20 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (TCS)
(if so equipped)
If the light comes on during the self-test or while
driving, take the vehicle to a NISSAN dealer for
repair.
When accelerating on slippery surfaces the tire
may spin or slip. With the vehicle traction control
system (TCS), sensors detect these movements
and control the braking and engine output to help
improve vehicle stability while accelerating.
● When installing a spare tire, make sure
it is the proper size and type as speci-
fied on the tire placard. For tire placard
location information, refer to “Tire plac-
ard” in the “Technical and consumer
information” section of this manual.
WARNING
● The anti-lock braking system is a so-
phisticated device, but it cannot pre-
vent accidents resulting from careless
or dangerous driving techniques. It can
help maintain vehicle control during
braking on slippery surfaces, but re-
member that the stopping distance on
slippery surfaces will be longer than on
normal surfaces even with the anti-lock
braking system. Stopping distances
may also be longer on rough, gravel or
snow covered roads, or if you are using
tire chains. Tire type and condition may
also affect braking effectiveness. Al-
ways maintain a safe distance from the
vehicle in front of you. Ultimately, the
responsibility for safety of self and oth-
ers rests in the hands of the driver.
●
When the traction control system is operat-
ing, the slip indicator in the instrument panel
blinks.
● Refer to “Wheels and tires” in the
“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec-
tion of this manual.
●
If the slip indicator blinks, the vehicle is un-
der slippery conditions. Be sure to drive
carefully. See “Slip indicator light”and “Trac-
tion control system (TCS) off indicator light”
in the “Instruments and controls” section of
this manual.
●
If a malfunction occurs in the system,
the
come on in the instrument panel.
and
indicator lights
As long as these lights are on, the traction control
function is canceled. The vehicle will behave like
a vehicle without the system.
● Tire type and condition of tires may also
affect braking effectiveness.
● When replacing tires, install the speci-
fied size of tires on all four wheels.
Starting and driving 5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
COLD WEATHER DRIVING
FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK
● When driving on extremely inclined sur-
faces such as higher banked corners,
the traction control system may not op-
WARNING
To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply de-
icer through the key hole. If the lock becomes
frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the key
hole or use the remote keyless entry keyfob (if so
equipped).
● The traction control system is designed
to help improve driving stability but
does not prevent accidents due to
abrupt steering operation at high
speeds or by careless or dangerous
driving techniques. Reduce vehicle
speed and be especially careful when
driving and cornering on slippery sur-
faces and always drive carefully.
erate properly and the
indicator
light may come on. Do not drive on
these types of roads.
● If wheels or tires other than the recom-
mended ones are used, the traction
control system may not operate prop-
ANTI-FREEZE
In the winter when it is anticipated that the tem-
perature will drop below 32°F (0°C), check the
anti-freeze to assure proper winter protection.
For details, see “Engine cooling system” in the
“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
erly and the
come on.
indicator light may
● If brake related parts such as brake
pads, rotors and calipers are not stan-
dard equipment or are extremely dete-
riorated, the traction control system
may not operate properly and the
● The traction control system is not a sub-
stitute for winter tires or tire chains on a
snow covered road.
BATTERY
indicator light may come on.
If the battery is not fully charged during extremely
cold weather conditions, the battery fluid may
freeze and damage the battery. To maintain maxi-
mum efficiency, the battery should be checked
regularly. For details, see “Battery” in the “Main-
tenance and do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
● Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.
If suspension parts such as shock ab-
sorbers, struts, springs and bushings
are not standard equipment or are ex-
tremely deteriorated, the traction con-
trol system may not operate properly
and the
on.
indicator light may come
5-22 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Tire chains may be used.
or underbody. If possible, avoid fully loading your
vehicle when using tire chains. In addition, drive
at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may
be damaged and/or vehicle handling and perfor-
mance may be adversely affected.
DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER
If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti-
freeze, drain the cooling system, including the
engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle.
For details, see “Changing engine coolant” in the
“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
CAUTION
Tire chains/cables cannot be installed on
P225/45R18 size tires. Installation of the
tire chains/cables on P225/45R18 size
tires will cause damage to the vehicle. If
you plan to use tire chains/cables, you
should install P215/55R17 size tires on
your vehicle.
Tire chains must be installed only on the
front wheels and not on the rear wheels.
Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire.
TIRE EQUIPMENT
1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to
provide superior performance on dry pave-
ment. However, the performance of these
tires will be substantially reduced in snowy
and icy conditions. If you operate your ve-
hicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recom-
mends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALL
SEASON TIRES on all four wheels. Please
consult a NISSAN dealer for the tire type,
size, speed rating and availability informa-
tion.
Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving with
chains in such conditions can cause damage to
the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to
some overstress.
Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to
location. Check the local laws before installing
tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure
they are the proper size for the tires on your
vehicle and are installed according to the chain
manufacturer’s suggestions. Use only SAE
class “S” chains. Class ЉSЉ chains are used on
vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance.
Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains are de-
signed to meet the minimum clearances between
the tire and the closest vehicle suspension or
body component required to accommodate the
use of a winter traction device (tire chains or
cables). The minimum clearances are determined
using the factory equipped tires. Other types may
damage your vehicle. Use chain tensioners when
recommended by the tire chain manufacturer to
ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain
must be secured or removed to prevent the pos-
sibility of whipping action damage to the fenders
SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT
It is recommended that the following items be
carried in the vehicle during winter:
●
●
A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove
ice and snow from the windows and wiper
blades.
2. For additional traction on icy roads, studded
tires may be used. However, some U.S.
states and Canadian provinces prohibit their
use. Check local, state and provincial laws
before installing studded tires.
A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the
jack to give it firm support.
●
●
A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts.
Extra window washer fluid to refill the reser-
voir tank.
Skid and traction capabilities of studded
snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.
Starting and driving 5-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE
● Do not use the cruise control on slip-
pery roads.
WARNING
● Snow can trap dangerous exhaust
gases under your vehicle. Keep snow
clear of the exhaust pipe and from
around your vehicle.
● Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),
very cold snow or ice can be slick and
very hard to drive on. The vehicle will
have much less traction or “grip” under
these conditions. Try to avoid driving on
wet ice until the road is salted or
sanded.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so
equipped)
An engine block heater to assist in extreme cold
● Whatever the condition, drive with cau-
tion. Accelerate and slow down with
care. If accelerating or downshifting too
fast, the drive wheels will lose even
more traction.
temperature starting is available through
NISSAN dealer.
a
WARNING
Do not use your heater with an un-
grounded electrical system or two-
pronged (cheater) adapters. You can be
injured by an electrical shock if you use an
ungrounded connection.
● Allow more stopping distance under
these conditions. Braking should be
started sooner than on dry pavement.
● Allow greater following distances on
slippery roads.
● Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).
These may appear on an otherwise
clear road in shaded areas. If a patch of
ice is seen ahead, brake before reach-
ing it. Try not to brake while on the ice,
and avoid any sudden steering
maneuvers.
5-24 Starting and driving
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6 In case of emergency
Flat tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Changing a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Push starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Towing your vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Towing recommended by NISSAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10
Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle). . . . . . . . .6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FLAT TIRE
CHANGING A FLAT TIRE
● Never change tires when the vehicle is
on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is
hazardous.
If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions be-
low.
● Never change tires if oncoming traffic is
close to your vehicle. Wait for profes-
sional road assistance.
Stopping the vehicle
1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and
away from traffic.
2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking
brake. Shift the manual transmission into R
(Reverse), or the automatic transmission
into P (Park).
WCE0044
4. Turn off the engine.
Blocking wheels
5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and to
signal professional road assistance person-
nel that you need assistance.
1
Place suitable blocks
at both the front and
᭺
back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire
2
to prevent the vehicle from moving when it is
᭺
jacked up.
6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle
and stand in a safe place, away from traffic
and clear of the vehicle.
WARNING
Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle
may move and result in personal injury.
WARNING
● Make sure the parking brake is securely
applied and the manual transmission is
shifted into R (Reverse), or the auto-
matic transmission into P (Park).
6-2 In case of emergency
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WCE0050
WCE0067
CE1089
Getting the spare tire and tools
Jacking up vehicle and removing the
damaged tire
Removing the bolt-on wheel cover (if
so equipped)
Open the trunk. Lift the trunk floor carpeting and
1
spare tire cover. Remove the jack
and wheel
᭺
2
WARNING
nut wrench
spare tire.
from the tool box. Remove the
᭺
CAUTION
● Never get under the vehicle while it is
supported only by the jack. If it is nec-
essary to work under the vehicle, sup-
port it with safety stands.
Do not use your hands to pry off wheel
caps or wheel covers. Doing so could re-
sult in personal injury.
The wheel covers are held on by the wheel nuts.
The wheel cover will be removed along with the
wheel when the nuts are removed.
● Use only the jack provided with your
vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use the
jack provided with your vehicle on other
vehicles. The jack is designed for lifting
only your vehicle during a tire change.
In case of emergency 6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
● Use the correct jack-up points. Never
use any other part of the vehicle for jack
support.
● Never jack up the vehicle more than
necessary.
● Never use blocks on or under the jack.
● Do not start or run the engine while
vehicle is on the jack. It may cause the
vehicle to move. This is especially true
for
vehicles
with
limited
slip
differentials.
● Do not allow passengers to stay in the
vehicle while it is on the jack.
LCE0020
2. Place the jack directly under the jack-up
point as illustrated so the top of the jack
contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point.
Align the jack head between the two
notches in the front or the rear as shown.
Also fit the groove of the jack head between
the notches as shown.
Always refer to the proper illustrations for the
correct placement and jack-up points for your
specific vehicle model and jack type.
● Never run the engine with a wheel(s) off
the ground. It may cause the vehicle to
move.
Carefully read the caution label attached to
the jack body and the following instruc-
tions.
1. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by
turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut
wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts
until the tire is off the ground.
The jack should be used on firm and
level ground.
3. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever
and rod with both hands. Carefully raise the
vehicle until the tire clears the ground. Re-
move the wheel nuts, and then remove the
tire.
6-4 In case of emergency
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire
touches the ground. Then, with the wheel
nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely
Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.
COLD pressure: After vehicle has been
parked for three hours or more or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km).
A
B
C
D
in the sequence illustrated (
,
,
,
᭺ ᭺ ᭺ ᭺
,
E
). Lower the vehicle completely.
᭺
COLD tire pressures are shown on the tire
placard affixed to the center console.
WARNING
5. Securely store the flat tire and jacking equip-
ment in the vehicle.
● Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly
tightened wheel nuts can cause the
wheel to become loose or come off.
This could cause an accident.
6. Place the spare tire cover and the trunk floor
carpeting over the damaged tire.
● Do not use oil or grease on the wheel
studs or nuts. This could cause the nuts
to become loose.
7. Close the trunk.
WCE0056
WARNING
Installing the spare tire
● Retighten the wheel nuts when the ve-
hicle has been driven for 600 miles
(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,
etc.).
● Always make sure that the spare tire
and jacking equipment are properly se-
cured after use. Such items can become
dangerous projectiles in an accident or
sudden stop.
The spare tire is designed for emergency
use. See specific instructions under the
heading “Wheels and tires” in the “Mainte-
nance and do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts
to the specified torque with
wrench.
a
torque
● The spare tire is designed for emer-
gency use. See specific instructions un-
der the heading “Wheels and tires” in
the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”
section of this manual.
1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface be-
tween the wheel and hub.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
80 ft-lb (108 N·m)
2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten
the wheel nuts finger tight.
The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to
specification at all times. It is recom-
mended that wheel nuts be tightened to
specifications at each lubrication interval.
3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel
nuts alternately and evenly as illustrated until
they are tight.
In case of emergency 6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
JUMP STARTING
To start your engine with a booster battery, the
instructions and precautions below must be fol-
lowed.
● Whenever working on or near a battery,
always wear suitable eye protectors (for
example, goggles or industrial safety
spectacles) and remove rings, metal
bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean
over the battery when jump starting.
WARNING
● If done incorrectly, jump starting can
lead to a battery explosion, resulting in
severe injury or death. It could also
damage your vehicle.
● Do not attempt to jump start a frozen
battery. It could explode and cause se-
rious injury.
● Explosive hydrogen gas is always
present in the vicinity of the battery.
Keep all sparks and flames away from
the battery.
● Your vehicle has an automatic engine
cooling fan. It could come on at any
time. Keep hands and other objects
away from it.
● Do not allow battery fluid to come into
contact with eyes, skin, clothing or
painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a cor-
rosive sulfuric acid solution which can
cause severe burns. If the fluid should
come into contact with anything, imme-
diately flush the contacted area with
water.
● Keep battery out of the reach of
children.
● The booster battery must be rated at 12
volts. Use of an improperly rated battery
can damage your vehicle.
6-6 In case of emergency
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION
● Always connect positive (ϩ) to positive
(ϩ) and negative (Ϫ) to body ground (for
example, strut mounting bolt, engine
lift bracket, etc.) — not to the battery.
● Make sure the jumper cables do not
touch moving parts in the engine com-
partment and that the cable clamps do
not contact any other metal.
5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and
let it run for a few minutes.
6. Keep the engine speed of the booster ve-
hicle at about 2,000 rpm, and start the en-
gine of the vehicle being jump started.
WCE0054
2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift lever
to N (Neutral) (manual transmission) or to P
(Park) (automatic transmission). Switch off
all unnecessary electrical systems (lights,
heater, air conditioner, etc.).
WARNING
Always follow the instructions below.
Failure to do so could result in damage to
the charging system and cause personal
injury.
CAUTION
Do not keep the starter motor engaged for
more than 10 seconds. If the engine does
not start right away, turn the key off and
wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again.
3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if so
equipped). Cover the battery with an old
cloth to reduce explosion hazard.
1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle,
position the two vehicles to bring their bat-
teries near each other.
7. After starting the engine, carefully discon-
nect the negative cable and then the positive
cable.
4. Connect jumper cables in the sequence il-
Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.
A
᭺ ᭺ ᭺ ᭺
B
C
D
lustrated (
,
,
,
).
In case of emergency 6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PUSH STARTING
IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS
8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Be
sure to dispose of the cloth used to cover
the vent holes as it may be contaminated
with corrosive acid.
If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an
extremely high temperature gauge reading), or if
you feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal
noise, etc. take the following steps.
CAUTION
● Three-way catalyst equipped models
should not be started by pushing. The
three-way catalyst may be damaged.
WARNING
● Automatic transmission models cannot
be push-started or tow-started. At-
tempting to do so may cause transmis-
sion damage.
● Do not continue to drive if your vehicle
overheats. Doing so could cause engine
damage or a vehicle fire.
● For manual transmission models, never
try to start the vehicle by towing it.
When the engine starts, the forward
surge could cause the vehicle to collide
with the tow vehicle.
● To avoid the danger of being scalded,
never remove the radiator cap while the
engine is still hot. When the radiator
cap is removed, pressurized hot water
will spurt out, possibly causing serious
injury.
● Do not open the hood if steam is com-
ing out.
1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply
the parking brake and move the shift lever to
N (Neutral) (manual transmission) or to P
(Park) (automatic transmission).
Do not stop the engine.
2. Turn off the air conditioner (if so equipped).
Open all the windows, move the heater or air
conditioner temperature control to maximum
hot and fan control to high speed.
6-8 In case of emergency
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TOWING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for
steam or coolant escaping from the radiator
before opening the hood. (If steam or cool-
ant is escaping, turn off the engine.) Do not
open the hood further until no steam or
coolant can be seen.
6. After the engine cools down, check the cool-
ant level in the engine coolant reservoir tank
with the engine running. Add coolant to the
engine coolant reservoir tank if necessary.
Have your vehicle repaired at a NISSAN
dealer.
When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial in
Canada) and local regulations for towing must be
followed. Incorrect towing equipment could dam-
age your vehicle. Towing instructions are avail-
able from a NISSAN dealer. Local service opera-
tors are generally familiar with the applicable laws
and procedures for towing. To assure proper
towing and to prevent accidental damage to your
vehicle, NISSAN recommends having a service
operator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to have
the service operator carefully read the following
precautions:
4. Open the engine hood.
WARNING
If steam or water is coming from the en-
gine, stand clear to prevent getting
burned.
WARNING
5. Visually check drive belts for damage or
looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is
running. The radiator hoses and radiator
should not leak water. If coolant is leaking,
the water pump belt is missing or loose, or
the cooling fan does not run, stop the en-
gine.
● Never ride in a vehicle that is being
towed.
● Never get under your vehicle after it has
been lifted by a tow truck.
CAUTION
● When towing, make sure that the trans-
mission, axles, steering system and
powertrain are in working condition. If
any unit is damaged, dollies must be
used.
WARNING
Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,
jewelry or clothing to come into contact
with, or get caught in, engine belts or the
engine cooling fan. The engine cooling
fan can start at any time when the coolant
temperature is high.
● Always attach safety chains before
towing.
In case of emergency 6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For information about towing your vehicle behind
a recreational vehicle (RV), refer to “Flat towing”
in the “Technical and consumer information” sec-
tion of this manual.
ACE1001
CAUTION
● Never tow automatic transmission
models with the front wheels on the
ground or four wheels on the ground
(forward or backward), as this may
cause serious and expensive damage to
the transmission. If it is necessary to
tow the vehicle with the rear wheels
raised always use towing dollies under
the front wheels.
ACE0511
TOWING RECOMMENDED BY
NISSAN
NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towed
with the driving (front) wheels off the ground or
place the vehicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated.
6-10 In case of emergency
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
● When towing automatic transmission
models with the front wheels on towing
dollies, or when towing manual trans-
mission models with the front wheels
on the ground:
CAUTION
● Tow chains or cables must be attached
only to the main structural members of
the vehicle or the towing hooks (if so
equipped). Otherwise, the vehicle body
will be damaged.
– Turn the ignition key to the OFF po-
sition, and secure the steering wheel
in a straight-ahead position with a
rope or similar device. Never secure
the steering wheel by turning the ig-
nition key to the LOCK position. This
may damage the steering lock
mechanism.
● Do not use the vehicle tie downs to free
a vehicle stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.
Never tow the vehicle using the vehicle
tie downs or recovery hooks.
● Always pull the cable straight out from
the front or rear of the vehicle. Never
pull the vehicle at an angle.
LCE0098
– Move the gearshift lever to the N
(Neutral) position.
● Pulling devices should be routed so
they do not touch any part of the sus-
pension, steering, brake or cooling
systems.
VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck
vehicle)
● When towing automatic or manual
transmission models with the rear
wheels on the ground (if you do not use
towing dollies): Always release the
parking brake.
Front
● Pulling devices such as ropes or canvas
straps are not recommended for use in
vehicle towing or recovery.
WARNING
● Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,
use the following procedure:
● Do not spin your tires at high speed.
This could cause them to explode and
result in serious injury. Parts of your
vehicle could also overheat and be
damaged.
1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control System
(if so equipped).
2. Make sure the area in front and behind the
vehicle is clear of obstructions.
In case of emergency 6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear
an area around the front tires.
3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear
an area around the front tires.
● Do not spin your tires at high speed.
This could cause them to explode and
result in serious injury. Parts of your
vehicle could also overheat and be
damaged.
4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and back-
ward.
4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and back-
ward.
● Shift back and forth between R (reverse)
and D (drive) (automatic transmission
models) or 1st (low) and R (reverse)
(manual transmission models).
● Shift back and forth between R (reverse)
and D (drive) (automatic transmission
models) or 1st (low) and R (reverse)
(manual transmission models).
CAUTION
● Tow chains or cables must be attached
only to the main structural members of
the vehicle.
● Apply the accelerator as little as possible
to maintain the rocking motion.
● Apply the accelerator as little as possible
to maintain the rocking motion.
● Pulling devices should be routed so
they do not touch any part of the sus-
pension, steering, brake or cooling
systems.
● Release the accelerator pedal before
shifting between R and D (automatic
● Release the accelerator pedal before
shifting between R and D (automatic
transmission models) or 1st and
(manual transmission models).
R
transmission models) or 1st and
(manual transmission models).
R
● Always pull the cable straight out from
the front or rear of the vehicle. Never
pull the vehicle at an angle.
● Do not spin the tires above 35 mph (55
km/h).
● Do not spin the tires above 35 mph (55
km/h).
5. If the vehicle can not be freed after a few
tries, contact a professional towing service
to remove the vehicle.
● Pulling devices such as ropes or canvas
straps are not recommended for use in
vehicle towing or recovery.
5. If the vehicle can not be freed after a few
tries, contact a professional towing service
to remove the vehicle.
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,
use the following procedure:
Rear
1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control System
(if so equipped).
WARNING
● Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.
2. Make sure the area in front and behind the
vehicle is clear of obstructions.
6-12 In case of emergency
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7 Appearance and care
Cleaning exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Waxing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Removing spots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Aluminum alloy wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Tire dressings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Cleaning interior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Corrosion protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Most common factors contributing to vehicle
corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Environmental factors influence the rate of
corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
To protect your vehicle from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CLEANING EXTERIOR
In order to maintain the appearance of your ve-
hicle, it is important to take proper care of it.
WAXING
CAUTION
Regular waxing protects the paint surface and
helps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing is
recommended to remove built-up wax residue
and to avoid a weathered appearance before
re-applying wax.
● Do not wash the vehicle with strong
household soap, strong chemical deter-
gents, gasoline or solvents.
To protect the paint surfaces, please wash your
vehicle as soon as you can:
●
after a rainfall to prevent possible damage
from acid rain.
● Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun-
light or while the vehicle body is hot, as
the surface may become water-spotted.
A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the
proper product.
●
●
after driving on coastal roads.
● Avoid using tight-napped or rough
cloths, such as washing mitts. Care
must be taken when removing
caked-on dirt or other foreign sub-
stances so the paint surface is not
scratched or damaged.
when contaminants such as soot, bird drop-
pings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs get
on the paint surface.
●
Wax your vehicle only after a thorough wash-
ing. Follow the instructions supplied with the
wax.
●
when dust or mud builds up on the surface.
●
Do not use a wax containing any abrasives,
cutting compounds or cleaners that may
damage the vehicle finish.
Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle
inside a garage or in a covered area.
Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of clean
water.
Machine compounding or aggressive polishing
on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the
finish or leave swirl marks.
When it is necessary to park outside, park in a
shady area or protect the vehicle with a body
cover.
Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors,
hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to
the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas
must be cleaned regularly. Take care that the
drain holes in the lower edge of the door are
open. Spray water under the body and in the
wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away
road salt.
REMOVING SPOTS
Be careful not to scratch the paint surface
when putting on or removing the body
cover.
Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects,
and tree sap as quickly as possible from the
surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage or
staining. Special cleaning products are available
at a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessory
store.
WASHING
Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of
water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild
soap, a special vehicle soap or general purpose
dishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm
(never hot) water.
A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle to
avoid water spots.
7-2 Appearance and care
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film
from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to
become coated with a film after the vehicle is
parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft
cloth will easily remove this film.
UNDERBODY
In areas where road salt is used in winter, it is
necessary to clean the underbody regularly in
order to prevent dirt and salt from building up and
causing the acceleration of corrosion on the un-
derbody and suspension. Before the winter pe-
riod and again in the spring, the underseal must
be checked and, if necessary, retreated.
CAUTION
When cleaning the inside of the windows,
do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive
cleaners or chlorine-based disinfectant
cleaners. They could damage the electri-
cal conductors, radio antenna elements or
rear window defroster elements.
WAI0007
ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS
GLASS
Wash the wheels regularly, especially during win-
ter months in areas where road salt is used. If not
removed, road salt can discolor the wheels.
When cleaning the rear window, it may be easier
to clean if the high-mounted stop light is removed
first.
CHROME PARTS
Be careful when removing the high-mounted
stop light to reduce the risk of damaging the
high-mounted stop light wires.
Clean all chrome parts regularly with a non-
abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.
TIRE DRESSINGS
To remove the high-mounted stop light:
1
NISSAN does not recommend the use of tire
dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating to
the tires to help reduce discoloration of the rub-
ber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it may
Push toward rear of vehicle.
᭺
2
Lift to remove.
᭺
The high-mounted stop light must be properly
reinstalled before driving your vehicle.
Appearance and care 7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CLEANING INTERIOR
react with the coating and form a compound. This
compound may come off the tire while driving and
stain the vehicle paint.
Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior
trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum
cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl and
leather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth damp-
ened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a
dry, soft cloth.
● Never use fabric protectors unless rec-
ommended by the manufacturer.
● Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on
meter or gauge lens covers. It may dam-
age the lens cover.
If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the
following precautions:
●
Use a water-based tire dressing. The coat-
ing on the tire dissolves more easily with an
oil-based tire dressing.
FLOOR MATS
Regular care and cleaning is required in order to
maintain the appearance of the leather.
The use of genuine NISSAN floor mats can ex-
tend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it
easier to clean the interior. No matter what
mats are used, be sure they are fitted for
your vehicle and are properly positioned in
the footwell to prevent interference with
pedal operation. Mats should be maintained
with regular cleaning and replaced if they be-
come excessively worn.
Before using any fabric protector, read the manu-
facturer’s recommendations. Some fabric pro-
tectors contain chemicals that may stain or
bleach the seat material.
●
Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help
prevent it from entering the tire
tread/grooves (where it would be difficult to
remove).
●
●
Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry
towel. Make sure the tire dressing is com-
pletely removed from the tire tread/grooves.
Use a cloth dampened only with water to clean
the meter and gauge lens.
CAUTION
Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom-
mended by tire dressing manufacturer.
● Never use benzine, thinner or any simi-
lar material.
● Small dirt particles can be abrasive and
damaging to leather surfaces and
should be removed promptly. Do not
use saddle soap, car waxes, polishes,
oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-
gents or ammonia-based cleaners as
they may damage the leather’s natural
finish.
7-4 Appearance and care
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CORROSION PROTECTION
SEAT BELTS
MOST COMMON FACTORS
CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE
CORROSION
The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them
with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution.
Allow the belts to dry completely in the shade
before using them. See “Seat belt maintenance”
in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and supplemen-
tal restraint system” section of this manual.
●
The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt
and debris in body panel sections, cavities,
and other areas.
●
Damage to paint and other protective coat-
ings caused by gravel and stone chips or
minor traffic accidents.
WARNING
Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the
retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or
chemical solvents to clean the seat belts,
since these materials may severely
weaken the seat belt webbing.
ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS
INFLUENCE THE RATE OF
CORROSION
WAI0006
Floor mat positioning aid (driver’s side
only)
Moisture
Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the ve-
hicle body underside can accelerate corrosion.
Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside
the vehicle, and should be removed for drying to
avoid floor panel corrosion.
This vehicle includes a front floor mat bracket to
act as a floor mat positioning aid. NISSAN floor
mats have been specially designed for your ve-
hicle model. The driver’s side floor mat has a
grommet hole incorporated in it. Position the mat
by placing the floor mat bracket hook through the
floor mat grommet hole while centering the mat in
the footwell.
Relative humidity
Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high
relative humidity, especially those areas where
the temperatures stay above freezing and where
atmospheric pollution exists and road salt is
used.
Periodically check to make certain the mats are
properly positioned.
Appearance and care 7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Temperature
● Never allow water or other liquids to
come in contact with electronic compo-
nents inside the vehicle as this may
damage them.
High temperatures accelerate the rate of corro-
sion to those parts which are not well ventilated.
Air pollution
Chemicals used for road surface de-icing are
extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion
and deterioration of underbody components
such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines,
brake cables, floor pan and fenders.
Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air
in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use acceler-
ates the corrosion process. Road salt also accel-
erates the disintegration of paint surfaces.
In winter, the underbody must be cleaned
periodically.
TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE
FROM CORROSION
For additional protection against rust and corro-
sion, which may be required in some areas, con-
sult a NISSAN dealer.
●
●
●
●
Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the
vehicle clean.
Always check for minor damage to the paint
and repair it as soon as possible.
Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors
open to avoid water accumulation.
Check the underbody for accumulation of
sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water
as soon as possible.
CAUTION
● NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de-
bris from the passenger compartment
by washing it out with a hose. Remove
dirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom.
7-6 Appearance and care
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MEMO
Appearance and care 7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Explanation of general maintenance items . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Maintenance precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Changing engine coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13
4-speed automatic transmission fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14
Temperature conditions for checking. . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14
5-speed automatic transmission fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16
Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16
Brake and clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17
Clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17
Window washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18
Window washer fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20
Spark plugs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21
Replacing spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21
Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22
In-cabin microfilter (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22
Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25
Parking brake and brake pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26
Checking parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26
Checking brake pedal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26
Brake booster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27
Engine compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27
Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29
Keyfob battery replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-30
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-31
Headlights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-31
Front park/turn/sidemarker light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32
Fog lights (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32
Exterior and interior lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-33
Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-40
Tire pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire labeling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-44
Types of tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-47
Tire chains. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-48
Changing wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
Your new NISSAN has been designed to have
minimum maintenance requirements with longer
service intervals to save you both time and
money. However, some day-to-day and regular
maintenance is essential to maintain your NIS-
SAN’s good mechanical condition, as well as its
emission and engine performance.
Performing general maintenance checks requires
minimal mechanical skill and only a few general
automotive tools.
During the normal day-to-day operation of the
vehicle, general maintenance should be per-
formed regularly as prescribed in this section. If
you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or
smells, be sure to check for the cause or have a
NISSAN dealer do it promptly. In addition, you
should notify a NISSAN dealer if you think that
repairs are required.
These checks or inspections can be done by you,
a qualified technician, or, if you prefer, a NISSAN
dealer.
Where to go for service
It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that
the scheduled maintenance, as well as general
maintenance, is performed.
If maintenance service is required or your vehicle
appears to malfunction, have the systems
checked and corrected by a NISSAN dealer.
When performing any checks or maintenance
work, closely observe the “Maintenance precau-
tions” later in this section.
As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who
can ensure that your vehicle receives proper
maintenance. You are a vital link in the mainte-
nance chain.
NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists
who are kept up-to-date with the latest service
information through technical bulletins, service
tips, and in-dealership training programs. They
are completely qualified to work on NISSAN ve-
hicles before they work on your vehicle, rather
than after they have worked on it.
EXPLANATION OF GENERAL
MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Additional information on the following
items with “*” is found later in this section.
Scheduled maintenance
For your convenience, both required and optional
scheduled maintenance items are described and
listed in your “NISSAN Service and Maintenance
Guide.” You must refer to that guide to ensure
that necessary maintenance is performed on your
NISSAN at regular intervals.
Outside the vehicle
You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer’s
service department performs the best job to meet
the maintenance requirements on your vehicle —
in a reliable and economical way.
The maintenance items listed here should be
performed from time to time, unless otherwise
specified.
Doors and engine hood Check that the doors
and engine hood operate properly. Also ensure
that all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges,
latches, latch pins, rollers and links as necessary.
Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the
hood from opening when the primary latch is
released.
General maintenance
General maintenance includes those items which
should be checked during normal day-to-day op-
eration. They are essential for proper vehicle op-
eration. It is your responsibility to perform these
maintenance procedures regularly as prescribed.
8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When driving in areas using road salt or other
corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.
Windshield Clean the windshield on a regular
basis. Check the windshield at least every six
months for cracks or other damage. Have a dam-
aged windshield repaired by a qualified repair
facility.
the brake booster function. Be certain to keep the
floor mat away from the pedal.
Lights* Clean the headlights on a regular basis.
Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail
lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all
operating properly and installed securely. Also
check headlight aim.
Brakes Check that the brakes do not pull the
vehicle to one side when applied.
Clutch pedal* Make sure the pedal operates
smoothly and check that it has the proper free
travel.
Windshield wiper blades* Check for cracks or
wear if they do not wipe properly.
Road wheel nuts* When checking the tires,
make sure no wheel nuts are missing, and check
for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten if necessary.
Inside the vehicle
Parking brake* Check that the lever/pedal has
the proper travel and confirm that your vehicle is
held securely on a fairly steep hill with only the
parking brake applied.
The maintenance items listed here should be
checked on a regular basis, such as when per-
forming periodic maintenance, cleaning the ve-
hicle, etc.
Tire rotation* Tires should be rotated every
7,500 miles (12,000 km).
Seats Check seat position controls such as seat
adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to ensure they
operate smoothly and all latches lock securely in
every position. Check that the head restraints
move up and down smoothly and the locks (if so
equipped) hold securely in all latched positions.
Tires* Check the pressure with a gauge often
and always prior to long distance trips. If neces-
sary, adjust the pressure in all tires, including the
spare, to the pressure specified. Check carefully
for damage, cuts or excessive wear.
Additional information on the following
items with an “*” is found later in this sec-
tion.
Accelerator pedal Check the pedal for smooth
operation and make sure the pedal does not bind
or require uneven effort. Keep the floor mat away
from the pedal.
Wheel alignment and balance If the vehicle
should pull to either side while driving on a
straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or
abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel
alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at
normal highway speeds, wheel balancing may be
needed.
Seat belts Check that all parts of the seat belt
system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjusters
and retractors) operate properly and smoothly,
and are installed securely. Check the belt web-
bing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.
Automatic transmission P (Park) position
mechanism On a fairly steep hill check that your
vehicle is held securely with the selector lever in
the P (Park) position without applying any brakes.
Steering wheel Check for changes in the steer-
ing system, such as excessive freeplay, hard
steering or strange noises.
●
For additional information regarding tires,
refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”
(US) or “Tire Safety Information”(Canada) in
the Warranty Information Booklet .
Brake pedal and booster* Check the pedal for
smooth operation and make sure it has the proper
distance under it when depressed fully. Check
Warning lights and chimes Make sure all
warning lights and chimes are operating properly.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield wiper and washer* Check that
the wipers and washer operate properly and that
the wipers do not streak.
Engine oil level* Check the level after parking
the vehicle on a level surface with the engine off.
Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain
back into the oil pan.
Underbody The underbody is frequently ex-
posed to corrosive substances such as those
used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very
important to remove these substances from the
underbody, otherwise rust may form on the floor
pan, frame, fuel lines and exhaust system. At the
end of winter, the underbody should be thor-
oughly flushed with plain water, in those areas
where mud and dirt may have accumulated. See
the “Appearance and care” section of this
manual.
Windshield defroster Check that the air
comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in
sufficient quantity when operating the heater or
air conditioner.
Exhaust system Make sure there are no loose
supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the
exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of
exhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaust
system inspected by a NISSAN dealer. See the
carbon monoxide warning in the “Starting and
driving” section of this manual.
Under the hood and vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should be
checked periodically (for example, each time you
check the engine oil or refuel).
Windshield washer fluid* Check that there is
adequate fluid in the reservoir.
Fluid leaks Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil,
water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has
been parked for a while. Water dripping from the
air conditioner after use is normal. If you should
notice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident,
check for the cause and have it corrected imme-
diately.
Automatic transmission fluid level* Check
the level after putting the selector lever in P (Park)
with the engine idling at operating temperature.
Battery* Check the fluid level in each cell. It
should be between the MAX and MIN lines. Ve-
hicles operated in high temperatures or under
severe conditions require frequent checks of the
battery fluid level.
Power steering fluid level* and lines Check
the level when the fluid is cold, with the engine
off. Check the lines for proper attachment, leaks,
cracks, etc.
Brake and clutch fluid levels* Make sure that
the brake and clutch fluid level is between the
MIN and MAX lines on the reservoir.
Radiator and hoses Check the front of the
radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves,
etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the
hoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or loose
connections.
Engine coolant level* Check the coolant level
when the engine is cold.
Engine drive belts* Make sure the drive belts
are not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.
8-4 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS
When performing any inspection or maintenance
work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent
serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to
the vehicle. The following are general precau-
tions which should be closely observed.
● Your vehicle is equipped with an auto-
matic engine cooling fan. It may come
on at any time without warning, even if
the ignition key is in the OFF position
and the engine is not running. To avoid
injury, always disconnect the negative
battery cable before working near the
fan.
● Keep smoking materials, flame and
sparks away from the fuel tank and
battery.
● On gasoline engine models with the
multiport fuel injection (MFI) system,
the fuel filter or fuel lines should be
serviced by a NISSAN dealer because
the fuel lines are under high pressure
even when the engine is off.
WARNING
● Park the vehicle on a level surface, ap-
ply the parking brake securely and
block the wheels to prevent the vehicle
from moving. For manual transmission
models, move the shift lever to N (Neu-
tral). For automatic transmission mod-
els, move the selector lever to P (Park).
● If you must work with the engine run-
ning, keep your hands, clothing, hair
and tools away from moving fans, belts
and any other moving parts.
CAUTION
● Do not work under the hood while the
engine is hot. Turn the engine off and
wait until it cools down.
● It is advisable to secure or remove any
loose clothing and remove any jewelry,
such as rings, watches, etc. before
working on your vehicle.
● Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF or
LOCK position when performing any
parts replacement or repairs.
● Avoid contact with used engine oil and
coolant. Improperly disposed engine
oil, engine coolant and/or other vehicle
fluids can damage the environment. Al-
ways conform to local regulations for
disposal of vehicle fluid.
● Always wear eye protection whenever
you work on your vehicle.
● Never leave the engine or automatic
transmission related component har-
nesses disconnected while the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
● If you must run the engine in an en-
closed space such as a garage, be sure
there is proper ventilation for exhaust
gases to escape.
This “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section
gives instructions regarding only those items
which are relatively easy for an owner to perform.
● Never connect or disconnect the battery
or any transistorized component while
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
● Never get under the vehicle while it is
supported only by a jack. If it is neces-
sary to work under the vehicle, support
it with safety stands.
A genuine NISSAN service manual is also avail-
able. See “Owner’s Manual/Service Manual or-
der information” in the “Technical and consumer
information” section of this manual.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You should be aware that incomplete or improper
servicing may result in operating difficulties or
excessive emissions, and could affect warranty
coverage. If in doubt about any servicing,
have it done by a NISSAN dealer.
8-6 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS
QR25DE engine
1. Power steering fluid reservoir
2. Spark plug coils
3. Brake fluid reservoir
4. Clutch fluid reservoir (M/T model)
5. Air cleaner
6. Battery
7. Fuse/Fusible link box
8. Transmission dipstick (A/T models)
9. Engine oil dipstick
10. Radiator cap
11. Drive belt location
12. Fuse block
13. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
14. Engine coolant reservoir
15. Engine oil filler cap
NOTE:
Engine cover removed for clarity.
WDI0488
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VQ35DE engine
1. Power steering fluid reservoir
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Brake fluid reservoir
4. Clutch fluid reservoir (M/T model)
5. Air cleaner
6. Battery
7. Fuse/Fusible link box
8. Transmission dipstick (A/T models)
9. Engine oil dipstick
10. Radiator cap
11. Drive belt location
12. Fuse block
13. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
14. Engine coolant reservoir
NOTE:
Engine cover removed for clarity.
WDI0489
8-8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
The engine cooling system is filled at the factory
Outside temperature
down to
Genuine
NISSAN
Long Life
Antifreeze/
Coolant or
equivalent
Demineral-
ized or dis-
tilled water
with
Genuine
NISSAN
Long
Life
Antifreeze/Coolant to provide year-round anti-
freeze and coolant protection. The anti-freeze
solution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors.
Additional engine cooling system additives are
not necessary.
°C
°F
-35
-30
50%
50%
WARNING
CAUTION
● Never remove the radiator or coolant
reservoir cap when the engine is hot.
Wait until the engine and radiator cool
down. Serious burns could be caused
by high pressure fluid escaping from
the radiator. See precautions in “If your
vehicle overheats” found in the “In case
of emergency” section of this manual.
When adding or replacing coolant, be sure
to use only a Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (green) or equivalent
with the proper mixture ratio of 50% anti-
freeze and 50% demineralized or distilled
water. The use of other types of coolant
solutions or coolant colors, such as or-
ange, may damage the engine cooling
system.
WDI0261
CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT
LEVEL
● The radiator is equipped with a pres-
sure type radiator cap. To prevent en-
Check the coolant level in the reservoir when
the engine is cold. If the coolant level is below
the MIN level, add coolant to the MAX level. If the
reservoir is empty, check the coolant level in the
radiator when the engine is cold. If there is
insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator
with coolant up to the filler opening and also add
it to the reservoir up to the MAX level.
gine damage, use only
NISSAN radiator cap.
a
genuine
If the cooling system frequently requires
coolant, have it checked by a NISSAN
dealer.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGINE OIL
CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT
A NISSAN dealer can change the engine coolant.
The service procedure can be found in the
NISSAN Service Manual.
Improper servicing can result in reduced
heater performance and engine overheat-
ing.
WARNING
● To avoid the danger of being scalded,
never change the coolant when the en-
gine is hot.
WDI0211
WDI0212
● Never remove the radiator cap when the
engine is hot. Serious burns could be
caused by high pressure fluid escaping
from the radiator.
QR25DE
VQ35DE
4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Re-
insert it all the way.
CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply
the parking brake.
● Avoid direct skin contact with used
coolant. If skin contact is made, wash
thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner
as soon as possible.
2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches
operating temperature.
● Keep coolant out of the reach of chil-
dren and pets.
3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10
minutes for the oil to drain back into
the oil pan.
Engine coolant must be disposed of properly.
Check your local regulations.
8-10 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WDI0213
WDI0214
WDI0492
Type A
Type B
QR25DE
5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil
6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.
CHANGING ENGINE OIL
level. It should be between the H (High) and
It is normal to add some oil between oil
maintenance intervals or during the
break-in period, depending on the severity
of operating conditions.
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply
the parking brake.
B
L (Low) marks
. This is the normal oper-
᭺
ating oil level range. If the oil level is below
A
the L (Low) mark , remove the oil filler cap
᭺
2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches
operating temperature, then turn it off.
and pour recommended oil through the
C
opening. Do not overfill
.
᭺
CAUTION
A
3. Remove the oil filler
counterclockwise.
cap by turning it
᭺
Oil level should be checked regularly. Op-
erating the engine with an insufficient
amount of oil can damage the engine, and
such damage is not covered by warranty.
4. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug
B
.
᭺
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The drain and refill capacity depends on the
oil temperature and drain time. Use these
specifications for reference only. Always use
the dipstick to determine when the proper
amount of oil is in the engine.
● Try to avoid direct skin contact with
used oil. If skin contact is made, wash
thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner
as soon as possible.
● Keep used engine oil out of reach of
children.
8. Start the engine. Check for leakage around
the drain plug and oil filter. Correct as re-
quired.
CAUTION
9. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10
minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick.
Add engine oil if necessary.
Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine
oil may be hot.
●
Waste oil must be disposed of prop-
erly.
WDI0493
●
Check your local regulations.
VQ35DE
B
5. Remove the drain plug
with a wrench by
6. Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a new
washer. Securely tighten the drain plug with
a wrench. Do not use excessive force.
᭺
turning it counterclockwise and completely
drain the oil.
If the oil filter is to be changed, remove and
replace it at this time. See “Changing engine
oil filter” later in this section.
Drain plug tightening torque:
22 - 29 ft-lb (29 - 39 N·m)
7. Refill engine with recommended oil through
the oil filler opening, then install the oil filler
cap securely.
WARNING
● Prolonged and repeated contact with
used engine oil may cause skin cancer.
See “Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and con-
sumer information”section of this manual for
drain and refill capacity.
8-12 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resistance
is felt, then tighten an additional 2/3 turn.
8. Start the engine and check for leakage
around the oil filter. Correct as required.
9. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10
minutes. Check the oil level. Add engine oil if
necessary.
WDI0494
WDI0495
QR25DE
VQ35DE
CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER
CAUTION
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply
the parking brake.
Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine
oil may be hot.
2. Turn the engine off.
5. Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface with
a clean rag.
A
3. Place a large drain pan under the oil filter
.
᭺
A
Be sure to remove any old gasket material
remaining on the sealing surface of the en-
gine.
4. Loosen the oil filter
with an oil filter
᭺
wrench by turning it counterclockwise. Then
remove the oil filter by turning it by hand.
6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean
engine oil.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-SPEED AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION FLUID
●
The fluid can be checked at fluid tempera-
tures of 86 - 122°F (30 - 50°C) using the
COLD range on the dipstick after the engine
is warmed up and before driving. However,
the fluid should be re-checked using the
HOT range.
WARNING
● When the engine is running, keep
hands, jewelry and clothing away from
any moving parts such as the cooling
fan and drive belts.
● Automatic transmission fluid is poison-
ous and should be stored carefully in
marked containers out of the reach of
children.
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and set
the parking brake.
2. Start the engine and then move the shift
selector lever through each gear range, end-
ing in P (Park).
3. Check the fluid level with the engine idling.
WDI0219
QR25DE engine
TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS FOR
CHECKING
●
The fluid level should be checked using the
HOT range on the dipstick after the following
conditions have been met:
– The engine should be warmed up to op-
erating temperature.
– The vehicle should be driven at least 5
minutes.
– The automatic transmission fluid should
be warmed to 122 - 176°F (50 - 80°C).
8-14 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOTE:
If the vehicle has been driven for a long
time at high speeds, or in city traffic in hot
weather, or if it is being used to pull a
trailer, the fluid level cannot be read accu-
rately. You should wait until the fluid has
cooled down (about 30 minutes) before
checking fluid level.
WDI0221
4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean with
lint-free paper.
CAUTION
DO NOT OVERFILL. Use ONLY Genuine
Nissan Matic D ATF (Continental U.S. and
Alaska) or Canada NISSAN Automatic
5. Reinsert the dipstick into the dipstick tube
as far as it will go.
Transmission
Fluid.
DEXRON™
6. Remove the dipstick and note the reading. If
III/MERCON™ or equivalent may also be
used. Outside the continental United
States and Alaska contact a NISSAN deal-
ership for more information regarding
suitable fluids, including recommended
brand(s) of DEXRON™ III/MERCON™ au-
tomatic transmission fluid.
the automatic transmission fluid level is
B
within the normal operating range
, no
᭺
additional fluid is required. If the fluid level is
A
low
add fluid through the dipstick tube.
᭺
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-SPEED AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION FLUID
POWER STEERING FLUID
When checking or replacement is required, we
recommend your NISSAN dealer for servicing.
● Recommended
NISSAN PSF or equivalent.
fluid
is
Genuine
WARNING
● Use only Genuine NISSAN Matic K ATF.
Do not mix with other fluids.
● Using automatic transmission fluid
other than Genuine NISSAN Matic K
ATF will cause deterioration in drive-
ability and automatic transmission du-
rability, and may damage the automatic
transmission, which is not covered by
the NISSAN new vehicle limited
warranty.
WDI0256
The fluid level should be checked using the HOT
MAX range on the power steering fluid reservoir
at fluid temperatures of 122° - 176°F (50° -
80°C) or using the COLD MAX range on the
power steering fluid reservoir at fluid tempera-
tures of 32° - 86°F (0° - 30°C).
The specified automatic transmission fluid is also
described on caution labels located in the engine
compartment.
If the fluid is below the MIN line, add Genuine
NISSAN PSF. Remove the cap and fill through
the opening.
CAUTION
● DO NOT OVERFILL.
8-16 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BRAKE AND CLUTCH FLUID
For further brake and clutch fluid specification
information, refer to “Capacities and recom-
mended fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and
consumer information” section of this manual.
WARNING
Use only new fluid from a sealed con-
tainer. Old, inferior or contaminated fluid
may damage the brake and clutch sys-
tems. The use of improper fluids can dam-
age the brake system and affect the vehi-
cle’s stopping ability.
CAUTION
LDI0079
LDI0080
Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur-
faces. This will damage the paint. If fluid is
spilled, immediately wash the surface
with water.
BRAKE FLUID
CLUTCH FLUID
Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir. If the
fluid level is below the MIN line or the brake
warning light comes on, add Genuine NISSAN
Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT
3 fluid up to the MAX line. If fluid must be added
frequently, the system should be checked by a
NISSAN dealer.
Check the clutch fluid level in the reservoir
(manual transmissions only). If the fluid level is
below the MIN line, add Genuine NISSAN Super
Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 fluid
up to the MAX line. If fluid must be added fre-
quently, the system should be checked by a
NISSAN dealer.
For further brake and clutch fluid specification
information, refer to “Capacities and recom-
mended fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and
consumer information” section of this manual.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WINDOW WASHER FLUID
BATTERY
Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving
conditions require an increased amount of win-
dow washer fluid.
●
Keep the battery surface clean and dry. Any
corrosion should be washed off with a solu-
tion of baking soda and water.
Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Wind-
shield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti-
freeze or equivalent.
●
●
Make certain the terminal connections are
clean and securely tightened.
If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or
longer, disconnect the negative (-) battery
terminal cable to prevent discharge.
CAUTION
● Do not substitute engine anti-freeze
coolant for window washer solution.
This may result in damage to the paint.
WARNING
● Do not expose the battery to flames or
electrical sparks. Hydrogen gas gener-
ated by the battery is explosive. Do not
allow battery fluid to contact your skin,
eyes, fabrics or painted surfaces. After
touching a battery or battery cap, do not
touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly
wash your hands. If the acid contacts
your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately
flush with water for at least 15 minutes
and seek medical attention.
● Do not fill the window washer reservoir
tank with washer fluid concentrates at
full strength. Some methyl alcohol
based washer fluid concentrates may
permanently stain the grille if spilled
while filling the window washer reser-
voir tank.
WDI0223
WINDOW WASHER FLUID
RESERVOIR
Fill the window washer fluid reservoir periodically.
Add window washer fluid when the low window
washer fluid warning light comes on (if so
equipped).
● Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with
water to the manufacturer’s recom-
mended levels before pouring the fluid
into the window washer reservoir tank.
Do not use the window washer reservoir
tank to mix the washer fluid concen-
trate and water.
To fill the window washer fluid reservoir, lift the
cap off the reservoir tank and pour the window
washer fluid into the tank opening.
● Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in
the battery is low. Low battery fluid can
cause a higher load on the battery
which can generate heat, reduce bat-
tery life, and in some cases lead to an
explosion.
Add a washer solvent to the washer for better
cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield
washer antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer’s in-
structions for the mixture ratio.
8-18 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
● When working on or near a battery, al-
ways wear suitable eye protection and
remove all jewelry.
● Battery posts, terminals and related ac-
cessories contain lead and lead com-
pounds. Wash hands after handling.
● Keep battery out of the reach of
children.
WDI0224
1. Remove the battery caps with a screwdriver
as shown. Use a cloth to protect the battery
case.
LDI0302
2. Check the fluid level in each cell If it is
necessary to add fluid, add only distilled
water to bring the level up to the bottom of
the filler opening. Do not overfill.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DRIVE BELTS
Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under
severe conditions require frequent checks of the
battery fluid level.
1. Visually inspect the belt(s) for signs of un-
usual wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If the
belt is in poor condition or is loose, have it
replaced or adjusted by a NISSAN dealer.
JUMP STARTING
2. Have the belts checked regularly for condi-
tion and tension in accordance with the
maintenance schedule found in the
“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”.
If jump starting is necessary, see “Jump starting”
in the “In case of emergency” section of this
manual. If the engine does not start by jump
starting, the battery may have to be replaced.
Contact a NISSAN dealer.
WDI0225
QR25DE engine
1. Power steering fluid pump
2. Water pump
3. Generator
4. Air conditioner (if so equipped)
5. Crank pulley
6. Auto tensioner pulley
WARNING
Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF or
LOCK position. The engine could rotate
unexpectedly.
8-20 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPARK PLUGS
WARNING
Be sure the engine and ignition switch are
off and that the parking brake is engaged
securely.
CAUTION
Be sure to use the correct socket to re-
move the spark plugs. An incorrect socket
can damage the spark plugs.
QR25DE
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the engine cover.
3. Remove the coil pack bolt.
WDI0226
WDI0005
VQ35DE engine
1. Power steering fluid pump
2. Crank pulley
3. Generator
4. Air conditioner
REPLACING SPARK PLUGS
Platinum-tipped spark plugs
4. Remove the coil pack/spark plug boot from
the spark plug.
It is not necessary to replace platinum-tipped
spark plugs as frequently as conventional type
spark plugs because they last much longer. Fol-
low the maintenance log shown in the “NISSAN
Service and Maintenance Guide”. Do not service
platinum-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or re-
gapping.
5. Remove the spark plugs with a spark plug
socket.
The plug socket has a rubber seal that holds
the spark plug so it does not fall when it is
pulled out. Make sure each spark plug is
snugly fitted into the spark plug socket.
●
Always replace spark plugs with rec-
ommended or equivalent ones.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AIR CLEANER
6. Fit the new plugs, one at a time, into the
spark plug socket and install them. Use
only the specified spark plugs. Turn
each plug several full turns by hand, then
tighten with the spark plug socket to the
correct torque. Do not overtighten.
WARNING
● Operating the engine with the air
cleaner removed can cause you or oth-
ers to be burned. The air cleaner not
only cleans the air, it stops the flame if
the engine backfires. If it isn’t there, and
the engine backfires, you could be
burned. Do not drive with the air cleaner
removed, and be careful when working
on the engine with the air cleaner
removed.
Spark plug tightening torque:
14 - 22 ft-lb (20 - 29 N·m)
7. Install the coil pack/spark plug boot on the
spark plug by pushing it on until you feel a
snap.
● Never pour fuel into the throttle body or
attempt to start the engine with the air
cleaner removed. Doing so could result
in serious injury.
8. Install the coil pack bolt.
Coil pack tightening torque:
48 - 65 in-lb (5.4 - 7.3 N·m)
9. Install the engine cover.
LDI0428
The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned and
reused. Replace it according to the maintenance
log shown in the “NISSAN Service and Mainte-
nance Guide.”When replacing the filter, wipe the
inside of the air cleaner filter housing and the
cover with a damp cloth.
IN-CABIN MICROFILTER (if so
equipped)
10. Connect the negative battery cable.
The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry of air-
borne dust and pollen particles and reduces
some objectionable outside odors. The filter is
located behind the glove box. Refer to the
“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide” for
change intervals.
VQ35DE
To remove the air cleaner filter:
If replacement is required, please see your
NISSAN dealer for assistance.
1
Loosen the screw clamp.
᭺
2
Push down on the clips.
᭺
To replace the filter, perform the following proce-
dure:
3. Remove the air cleaner housing.
8-22 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LDI0154
LDI0155
LDI0156
1. Remove the 2 lower glove box hinge pins.
Remove the glove box from the opening and
let it hang by the cord.
2. Remove the filter cover from the intake unit
by disengaging the 2 hook tabs at the bot-
tom of the cover.
NOTE:
The filter is marked “UP”with an arrow. The
end of the filter with the arrow should face
the rear of the vehicle.
3. Slide the filter into the housing.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOTE:
Make sure the filter sits on top of the 2
supporting tabs on the housing.
4. Replace the cover by inserting the upper
tabs inside the housing slot and pushing the
hook tabs until they snap on to the housing
lip.
5. Install the glove box door.
6. Fill out the date information on the small
replacement label and attach it to the glove
box lid.
LDI0157
8-24 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
WDI0194
4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper
arm until it clicks into place.
CLEANING
CAUTION
If your windshield is not clear after using the
windshield washer or if a wiper blade chatters
when running, wax or other material may be on
the blade or windshield.
Worn windshield wiper blades can dam-
age the windshield and impair driver
vision.
CAUTION
● After wiper blade replacement, return
the wiper arm to its original position;
otherwise it may be damaged when the
hood is opened.
REPLACING
Clean the outside of the windshield with a washer
solution or a mild detergent. Your windshield is
clean if beads do not form when rinsing with clear
water.
Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.
1
Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.
● Make sure the wiper blades contact the
glass; otherwise the arms may be dam-
aged from wind pressure.
᭺
2
Push the release tab, then move the wiper
blade down the wiper arm to remove.
᭺
Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked
in a washer solution or a mild detergent. Then
rinse the blades with clear water. If your wind-
shield is still not clear after cleaning the blades
and using the wiper, replace the blades.
3
Remove the wiper blade.
᭺
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE PEDAL
WDI0228
WDI0229
CHECKING PARKING BRAKE
CHECKING BRAKE PEDAL
From the released position, pull the parking brake
lever up slowly and firmly. If the number of clicks is
out of the range listed, see a NISSAN dealer.
With the engine running, check the distance A
between the upper surface of the pedal and the
metal floor. If it is out of the range shown, see a
NISSAN dealer.
●
7 - 8 clicks under pulling force of
44 lb (196 N).
Distance A: Under depression force of
110 lb (490 N)
WDI0424
If you wax the surface of the hood, be careful not
Automatic
Transmission
Manual
Transmission
1
to let wax get into the washer nozzle . This may
᭺
cause clogging or improper windshield washer
3.55 in (90.3 mm)
or more
3.31 in (84 mm)
or more
operation. If wax gets into the nozzle, remove it
2
with a needle or small pin
.
᭺
8-26 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FUSES
nance schedule information in the “NISSAN Ser-
vice and Maintenance Guide”.
Self-adjusting brakes
Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting
brakes.
BRAKE BOOSTER
Check the brake booster function as follows:
The front and rear disc-type brakes self-adjust
every time the brake pedal is applied.
1. With the engine off, press and release the
brake pedal several times. When brake
pedal movement (distance of travel) remains
the same from one pedal application to the
next, continue on to the next step.
WARNING
See a NISSAN dealer for a brake system
check if the brake pedal height does not
return to normal.
2. While depressing the brake pedal, start the
engine. The pedal height should drop a little.
Brake pad wear indicators
3. With the brake pedal depressed, stop the
engine. Keep the pedal depressed for about
30 seconds. The pedal height should not
change.
WDI0230
The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audible
wear indicators. When a brake pad requires re-
placement, a high pitched scraping or screech-
ing sound will be heard when the vehicle is in
motion. The noise will be heard whether or not the
brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes
checked as soon as possible if the wear indicator
sound is heard.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
CAUTION
4. Run the engine for one minute without de-
pressing the brake pedal, then turn it off.
Depress the brake pedal several times. The
pedal travel distance will decrease gradually
with each depression as the vacuum is re-
leased from the booster.
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower
amperage rating than specified on the
fuse box cover. This could damage the
electrical system or cause a fire.
Under some driving or climate conditions, occa-
sional brake squeak, squeal or other noise may
be heard. Occasional brake noise during light to
moderate stops is normal and does not affect the
function or performance of the brake system.
If any electrical equipment does not come on,
check for an open fuse.
If the brakes do not operate properly, have the
brakes checked by a NISSAN dealer.
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight
switch are OFF.
Proper brake inspection intervals should
be followed. For more information regarding
brake inspections, see the appropriate mainte-
2. Open the engine hood.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing the
tab and lifting the cover up.
4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. The
fuse puller is located in the center of the fuse
block in the passenger compartment.
WDI0452
A
5. If the fuse is open
, replace it with a new
᭺
B
fuse
.
᭺
6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical
system checked and repaired by a NISSAN
dealer.
Fusible links
If the electrical equipment does not operate and
fuses are in good condition, check the fusible
links. If any of these fusible links are melted,
replace with only genuine NISSAN parts.
8-28 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WDI0452
WDI0402
Type A
A
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
4. If the fuse is open , replace it with a known
᭺
B
good fuse
.
᭺
CAUTION
5. Push the fuse box cover to install.
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower
amperage rating than specified on the
fuse box cover. This could damage the
electrical system or cause a fire.
6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical
system checked and repaired by a NISSAN
dealer.
If any electrical equipment does not operate,
check for an open fuse.
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight
switch are OFF.
2. Pull the fuse box cover to remove.
3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
KEYFOB BATTERY REPLACEMENT
LDI0456
Type B
LDI0484
Replace the battery in the keyfob as follows:
Recommended battery: CR2025 or equivalent.
1
A
4
Open the lid using a coin
.
Close the lid securely.
᭺
᭺
᭺
2
B
Remove the battery
.
5. Press the
button, then the
᭺
᭺
button two or three times to check the key-
fob operation.
3
C
Install a new battery
down.
with the “+” facing
᭺
᭺
8-30 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LIGHTS
If the battery is removed for any reason
other than replacement, perform step 5.
HEADLIGHTS
Replacing the xenon headlight bulb
● Do not leave the headlight assembly
open without a bulb installed for a long
period of time. Dust, moisture, smoke,
etc. entering the headlight body may
affect bulb performance. Remove the
bulb from the headlight assembly just
before a replacement bulb is installed.
●
●
●
An improperly disposed battery can
hurt the environment. Always confirm
local regulations for battery disposal.
WARNING
HIGH VOLTAGE
Ꮨ
The keyfob is water-resistant; how-
ever, if it does get wet, immediately
wipe completely dry.
When xenon headlights are on, they pro-
duce a high voltage. To prevent an electric
shock, never attempt to modify or disas-
semble. Always have your xenon head-
lights replaced at a NISSAN dealer. For
additional information, see “Headlight
and turn signal switch” in the “Instru-
ments and controls” section.
● Only touch the plastic base when han-
dling the bulb. Never touch the glass
envelope. Touching the glass could sig-
nificantly affect bulb life and/or head-
light performance.
The operational range of the keyfob
extends to approximately 33 ft (10 m)
from the vehicle. This range may vary
with conditions.
● High pressure halogen gas is sealed
inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may
break if the glass envelope is scratched
or the bulb is dropped.
FCC Notice:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to op-
erate the equipment.
Replacing the halogen headlight bulb
The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type which
uses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb. Be-
cause the headlight assembly must be removed
from the vehicle for bulb replacement, see your
NISSAN dealer.
● Use the same number and wattage as
originally installed:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry
Canada.
Low beam:
Wattage: 55
Bulb no.: H1*
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undes-
ired operation of the device.
CAUTION
High beam:
Wattage: 60
Bulb no.: HB3 (9005)*
● Aiming is not necessary after replacing
the bulb. When aiming adjustment is
necessary, contact a NISSAN dealer.
*: Always check with the Parts Depart-
ment at a NISSAN dealer for the latest
parts information.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FRONT PARK/TURN/SIDEMARKER
LIGHT
Bulb replacement requires the removal of the
headlight assembly. If replacement is required,
see your NISSAN dealer.
FOG LIGHTS (if so equipped)
Replacing the fog light bulb
CAUTION
● High pressure halogen gas is sealed
inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may
break if the glass envelope is scratched
or the bulb is dropped.
WDI0262
WDI0232
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery cable.
●
●
●
Disconnect the fog light electrical connector
A
.
᭺
● When handling the bulb, do not touch
the glass envelope.
2. Remove the two splash shield screws (see
illustration).
Rotate the fog light bulb counterclockwise
B
and pull it out of the fog light assembly
.
᭺
3. Position the splash shield aside to allow
access to the fog light bulb.
Follow the instructions in reverse order to
install a new bulb.
8-32 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS
Item
Wattage (W)
Bulb No.*
Headlight assembly
Low (Halogen)
Low (Xenon)
High
Park/Turn
Front fog light
Step light
55
(special)
60
27/8
55
H1
D2R
HB3 (9005)
1157NA
H11
—
158
Rear combination light
Tail/Stop
8/27
27
13
5
3157
3156
912
Turn
Backup (reversing)
Sidemarker
168
License plate light
High-mounted stop light
Inside
5
W5W
18
921
See a NISSAN dealer
Spoiler (if so equipped)
for assistance.
Interior light
Map light
Trunk light
8
68
10
3.4
3.4
578
158
658
Glove box light
* Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Map light
2. Interior light
3. Step light
4. Fog light (if so equipped)
5. Rear combination light
6. License plate light
7. Trunk light
8. High-mount stoplight (if so equipped)
9. Headlamp assembly
LDI0419
8-34 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WDI0233
WDI0234
Interior light
to protect the interior light hous-
Step light
1
Use a cloth
ing.
᭺
WDI0263
Replacement procedures
All other lights are either type A, B, C or D. When
replacing a bulb, first remove the lens, lamp
and/or cover.
Indicates bulb removal
Indicates bulb installation
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WDI0235
License plate light
8-36 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WDI0451
Map light - Models with sunroof
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WDI0237
Map light - Models without sunroof
8-38 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear combination light
To access the bulbs in the rear combination light:
1
Remove the 2 fasteners. Carefully push back
the carpet.
᭺
2
Remove the 2 nuts and pull out the rear
combination light.
᭺
3
Rotate the bulb(s) counterclockwise and
pull out to remove:
᭺
A
Turn signal light
᭺
B
Sidemarker light
᭺
C
Tail/stop light
᭺
D
Backup light
᭺
WDI0238
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHEELS AND TIRES
If you have a flat tire, see the “In case of
emergency” section of this manual.
TIRE PRESSURE
Tire inflation pressure
Check the tire pressures (including the
spare) often and always prior to long dis-
tance trips. The recommended tire pres-
sure specifications are shown on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. label or the Tire
and Loading Information label under the
ЉCold Tire PressureЉ heading. The Tire
and Loading Information label is affixed to
the driver side center pillar. Tire pressures
should be checked regularly because:
WDI0320
WDI0343
Trunk light
High-mounted stop light (Rear window)
● Most tires naturally lose air over time.
● Tires can lose air suddenly when
driven over potholes or other objects
or if the vehicle strikes a curb while
parking.
The tire pressures should be checked
when the tires are cold. The tires are
considered COLD after the vehicle has
8-40 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate
speeds.
● The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) is located on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. label. The
vehicle weight capacity is indi-
cated on the Tire and Loading
● Do not drive your vehicle over 85
MPH (137 km/h) unless it is
equipped with high speed rated
tires. Driving faster than 85 MPH
(137 km/h) may result in tire fail-
ure, loss of control and possible
injury.
If the tires are used at speeds above 100
mph (162 km/h) where it is legal to do so
(on a race track for example), the cold tire
inflation pressure must be increased. Re-
fer to ЉChecking tire pressureЉ later in this
section.
Information
label
(if
so
equipped). Do not load your ve-
hicle beyond this capacity. Over-
loading your vehicle may result in
reduced tire life, unsafe operat-
ing conditions due to premature
tire failure, or unfavorable han-
dling characteristics and could
also lead to a serious accident.
Loading beyond the specified ca-
pacity may also result in failure of
other vehicle components.
● Increase the cold tire inflation
pressure as indicated in ؆Check-
ing tire pressure؆ later in this sec-
tion when using the tires speci-
fied by NISSAN above 100 MPH
(162 km/h) where it is legal to do
so (on a race track for example).
Failure to increase the cold tire
inflation pressure may result in
tire failure, loss of control and
possible injury. After such use,
readjust tire pressure.
Set the tire pressure to the normal cold
tire inflation pressure when the vehicle
speed or load is reduced.
Incorrect tire pressure, including un-
der inflation, may adversely affect
tire life and vehicle handling.
● Before taking a long trip, or
whenever you heavily load your
vehicle, use a tire pressure gauge
to ensure that the tire pressures
are at the specified level.
WARNING
● For additional information re-
garding tires, refer to “Important
Tire Safety Information” (US) or
● Improperly inflated tires can fail
suddenly and cause an accident.
“Tire
Safety
Information”
(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-
mation Booklet.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6
᭺
7
and
Spare tire size or compact
᭺
spare tire size (if so equipped).
LDI0392
4
Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires to
this pressure when the tires are cold.
Tires are considered COLD after the
vehicle has been parked for 3 or more
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6
km) at moderate speeds. The recom-
mended cold tire inflation is set by the
manufacturer to provide the best bal-
ance of tire wear, vehicle handling,
driveability, tire noise, etc., up to the
vehicle’s GVWR.
Tire and loading information label
᭺
1
᭺
Seating capacity: The maximum num-
ber of occupants that can be seated
in the vehicle.
2
᭺
Vehicle load limit: See loading infor-
mation in the “Technical and con-
sumer information” section.
3
᭺
Original tire size: The size of the tires
originally installed on the vehicle at
the factory.
5
᭺
Tire size – refer to “Tire labeling” later
in this section.
8-42 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge
stem and compare to the specifica-
tion shown on the Tire and Loading
Information label.
5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too
much air is added, press the core of
the valve stem briefly with the tip of
the gauge stem to release pressure.
Recheck the pressure and add or
release air as needed.
6. Install the valve stem cap.
LDI0393
7. Check the pressure of all other tires,
including the spare.
Checking tire pressure
1. Remove the valve stem cap from the
tire.
2. Press the pressure gauge squarely
onto the valve stem. Do not press too
hard or force the valve stem side-
ways, or air will escape. If the hissing
sound of air escaping from the tire is
heard while checking the pressure,
reposition the gauge to eliminate this
leakage.
3. Remove the gauge.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Size
Cold Tire Inflation High Speed/
Pressure
Maximum Load
Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
Front Original Tire
Rear Original Tire
Spare Tire
P215/60/R16 94T
200 kPa, 29 PSI 240 kPa, 35 PSI
P215/55R17 93H
P215/55R17 93V
240 kPa, 35 PSI
230 kPa, 33 PSI
P225/45R18 91Y
P215/60R16 94T
240 kPa, 35 PSI 260 kPa, 38 PSI
200 kPa, 29 PSI 240 kPa, 35 PSI
P215/55R17 93H
P215/55R17 93V
240 kPa, 35 PSI
210 kPa, 30 PSI
WDI0394
Example
P225/45R18 91Y
240 kPa, 35 PSI 260 kPa, 38 PSI
TIRE LABELING
T135/70R16
T135/90R16
T155/80R17
420 kPa, 60 PSI
N/A
Federal law requires tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This information iden-
tifies and describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also pro-
vides the tire identification number (TIN)
for safety standard certification. The TIN
can be used to identify the tire in case of a
recall.
8-44 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. H: Tire speed rating. You should not
drive the vehicle faster than the tire
speed rating.
WDI0395
Example
1
᭺
4. R: The ЉRЉ stands for radial.
Tire size (example: P215/65R15 95H)
5. Two-digit number (15): This number
is the wheel or rim diameter in inches.
1. P: The ЉPЉ indicates the tire is de-
signed for passenger vehicles (not all
tires have this information).
6. Two- or three-digit number (95): This
number is the tire’s load index. It is a
measurement of how much weight
each tire can support. You may not
find this information on all tires be-
cause it is not required by law.
2. Three-digit number (215): This num-
ber gives the width in millimeters of
the tire from sidewall edge to side-
wall edge.
3. Two-digit number (65): This number,
known as the aspect ratio, gives the
tire’s ratio of height to width.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The number of layers or plies of rubber-
coated fabric in the tire. Tire manufactur-
ers also must indicate the materials in the
tire, which include steel, nylon, polyester,
and others.
4
Maximum permissible inflation pres-
᭺
sure
This number is the greatest amount of air
pressure that should be put in the tire. Do
not exceed the maximum permissible in-
flation pressure.
WDI0396
5
᭺
Maximum load rating
Example
2
4. Three-digit code: Tire type code
(Optional)
TIN (Tire Identification Number) for a
This number indicates the maximum load
in kilograms and pounds that can be car-
ried by the tire. When replacing the tires
on the vehicle, always use a tire that has
the same load rating as the factory in-
stalled tire.
᭺
new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX
XXXX)
5. Three-digit code: Date of Manufac-
ture
1. DOT: Abbreviation for the ЉDepart-
ment Of Transportation.Љ The symbol
can be placed above, below or to the
left or right of Tire Identification Num-
ber.
6. Four numbers represent the week
and year the tire was built. For ex-
ample, the numbers 3103 means the
31st week of 2003. If these numbers
are missing, then look on the other
sidewall of the tire.
6
᭺
Term of ”tubeless” or ”tube type”
Indicates whether the tire requires an in-
ner tube (“tube type”) or not (“tubeless”).
2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s
identification mark
7
᭺
The word ”radial”
3
᭺
Tire ply composition and material
3. Two-digit code: Tire size
8-46 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The word ЉradialЉ is shown if the tire has
radial structure.
TYPES OF TIRES
Summer tires
NISSAN specifies summer tires on some models
to provide superior performance on dry roads.
Summer tire performance is substantially re-
duced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not have
the tire traction rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall.
WARNING
8
᭺
Manufacturer or brand name
● When changing or replacing tires, be
sure all four tires are of the same type
(i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) and
construction. A NISSAN dealer may be
able to help you with information about
tire type, size, speed rating and
availability.
Manufacturer or brand name is shown.
Other Tire-related Terminology
If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy
conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of
SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four
wheels.
In addition to the many terms that are
defined throughout this section, Intended
Outboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall that
contains a whitewall, bears white lettering
or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or
model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same molding on the
other sidewall of the tire, or (2) the out-
ward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical
tire that has a particular side that must
always face outward when mounted on a
vehicle.
● Replacement tires may have a lower
speed rating than the factory equipped
tires, and may not match the potential
maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed
the maximum speed rating of the tire.
Snow tires
If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select
tires equivalent in size and load rating to the
original equipment tires. If you do not, it can
adversely affect the safety and handling of your
vehicle.
● For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-
formation”(US) or “Tire Safety Informa-
tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-
tion Booklet.
Generally, snow tires have lower speed ratings
than factory equipped tires and may not match
the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never ex-
ceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.
All season tires
If you install snow tires, they must be the same
size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all
four wheels.
NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some mod-
els to provide good performance all year, includ-
ing snowy and icy road conditions. All Season
tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&S
on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snow
traction than All Season tires and may be more
appropriate in some areas.
For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires
may be used. However, some U.S. states and
Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check
local, state and provincial laws before installing
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of
studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.
recommended by the tire chain manufacturer to
ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain
must be secured or removed to prevent the pos-
sibility of whipping action damage to the fenders
or underbody. If possible, avoid fully loading your
vehicle when using tire chains. In addition, drive
at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may
be damaged and/or vehicle handling and perfor-
mance may be adversely affected.
TIRE CHAINS
CAUTION
Tire chains/cables cannot be installed on
P225/45R18 size tires. Installation of the
tire chains/cables on P225/45R18 size
tires will cause damage to the vehicle. If
you plan to use tire chains/cables, you
should install P215/55R17 size tires on
your vehicle.
Tire chains must be installed only on the
front wheels and not on the rear wheels.
Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire.
WDI0258
Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving with
chains in such conditions can cause damage to
the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to
some overstress.
Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to
location. Check the local laws before installing
tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure
they are the proper size for the tires on your
vehicle and are installed according to the chain
manufacturer’s suggestions. Use only SAE
class “S” chains. Class ЉSЉ chains are used on
vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance.
Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains are de-
signed to meet the minimum clearances between
the tire and the closest vehicle suspension or
body component required to accommodate the
use of a winter traction device (tire chains or
cables). The minimum clearances are determined
using the factory equipped tires. Other types may
damage your vehicle. Use chain tensioners when
CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES
Tire rotation
NISSAN recommends rotating the tires
every 7,500 miles (12,000 km).
See “Flat tire” in the “In case of emer-
gency” section of this manual for tire re-
placing procedures.
As soon as possible, tighten the
wheel nuts to the specified torque
with a torque wrench.
8-48 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
80 ft-lb (108 N·m)
● The original tires have built-in
tread wear indicators. When the
wear indicators are visible, the
tire(s) should be replaced.
The wheel nuts must be kept tight-
ened to specifications at all times. It
is recommended that wheel nuts be
tightened to specification at each
tire rotation interval.
● Tires degrade with age and use.
Have tires, including the spare,
over 6 years old checked by a
qualified technician because
some tire damage may not be ob-
vious. Replace the tires as neces-
sary to prevent tire failure and
possible personal injury.
WARNING
● After rotating the tires, check and
adjust the tire pressure.
● Retighten the wheel nuts when
the vehicle has been driven for
600 miles (1,000 km) (also in
cases of a flat tire, etc.).
WDI0259
● Improper service of the spare tire
may result in serious personal in-
jury. If it is necessary to repair the
spare tire, contact a NISSAN
dealer.
1. Wear indicator
2. Location mark
Tire wear and damage
● Do not include the spare tire in
the tire rotation.
● For additional information re-
garding tires, refer to “Important
Tire Safety Information” (US) or
WARNING
● For additional information re-
garding tires, refer to “Important
Tire Safety Information” (US) or
● Tires should be periodically in-
spected for wear, cracking, bulg-
ing or objects caught in the tread.
If excessive wear, cracks, bulging
or deep cuts are found, the tire(s)
should be replaced.
“Tire
Safety
Information”
(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-
mation Booklet.
“Tire
Safety
Information”
(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-
mation Booklet.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacing wheels and tires
Wheel balance
● If the wheels are changed for any rea-
son, always replace with wheels which
have the same off-set dimension.
Wheels of a different off-set could
cause premature tire wear, degrade ve-
hicle handling characteristics and/or
When replacing a tire, use the same size, tread
design, speed rating and load carrying capacity
as originally equipped. Recommended types and
sizes are shown in “Wheels and tires” in the
“Technical and consumer information” section of
this manual.
Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling
and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can get
out of balance. Therefore, they should be bal-
anced as required.
interference
with
the
brake
Wheel balance service should be per-
formed with the wheels off the vehicle.
Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle
could lead to mechanical damage.
discs/drums. Such interference can
lead to decreased braking efficiency
and/or early brake pad/shoe wear. Re-
fer to “Wheels and tires” in the “Techni-
cal and consumer information” section
of this manual for wheel off-set
dimensions.
WARNING
● The use of tires other than those recom-
mended or the mixed use of tires of
different brands, construction (bias,
bias-belted or radial), or tread patterns
can adversely affect the ride, braking,
handling, ground clearance, body-to-
tire clearance, tire chain clearance,
speedometer calibration, headlight aim
and bumper height. Some of these ef-
fects may lead to accidents and could
result in serious personal injury.
●
For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety
Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor-
mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In-
formation Booklet .
● Do not install a deformed wheel or tire
even if it has been repaired. Such
wheels or tires could have structural
damage and could fail without warning.
Care of wheels
●
Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle
to maintain their appearance.
● The use of retread tires is not
recommended.
●
Clean the inner side of the wheels when the
wheel is changed or the underside of the
vehicle is washed.
● For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-
formation”(US) or “Tire Safety Informa-
tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-
tion Booklet.
●
●
Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing
the wheels.
Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or
corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of
pressure or poor seal at the tire bead.
8-50 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
NISSAN recommends waxing the road
wheels to protect against road salt in areas
where it is used during winter.
● When driving on roads covered with
snow or ice, the TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire should be used on the
rear wheels and the original tire used
on the front wheels (drive wheels). Use
tire chains only on the front (original)
tires.
● Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLY
spare tire is smaller than the original
tire, ground clearance is reduced. To
avoid damage to the vehicle, do not
drive over obstacles. Also, do not drive
the vehicle through an automatic car
wash since it may get caught.
Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLY
spare tire)
Observe the following precautions if the TEM-
PORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be used.
Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged or
involved in an accident:
● Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster rate
than the standard tire. Replace the
spare tire as soon as the tread wear
indicators appear.
WARNING
● Do not use the spare tire on other
vehicles.
● The spare tire should be used for emer-
gency use only. It should be replaced
with the standard tire at the first oppor-
tunity to avoid possible tire or differen-
tial damage.
● Do not use more than one spare tire at
the same time.
● Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPO-
RARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed.
● Drive carefully while the TEMPORARY
USE ONLY spare tire is installed. Avoid
sharp turns and abrupt braking while
driving.
CAUTION
● Do not use tire chains on a TEMPO-
RARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire chains
will not fit properly and may cause dam-
age to the vehicle.
● Periodically check spare tire inflation
pressure. Always keep the pressure of
the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire
at 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 bar).
● With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare
tire installed do not drive the vehicle at
speeds faster than 50 MPH (80 km/h).
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MEMO
8-52 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Recommended SAE viscosity number . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil
recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
When traveling or registering your vehicle in
Air conditioner specification label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11
Installing front license plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12
Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12
Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12
Vehicle load capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-14
Loading tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-15
Measurement of weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-16
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-16
Maximum load limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-16
Towing load/specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19
Towing safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19
Flat towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23
Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24
Emission control system warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25
Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25
Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test . . . . .9-25
Event data recorders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26
Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order information . . .9-27
In the event of a collision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27
another country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Vehicle identification number
(chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Engine serial number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . .9-10
Emission control information label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11
Tire and loading information label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED
FUEL/LUBRICANTS
The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the procedure
described in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.
Capacity (Approximate)
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
US measure Imp measure
Liter
75.6
Fuel
20 gal
16-5/8 gal
Unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (RON 91)*1
Engine oil *9
Drain and Refill
With oil fil-
ter change
QR25DE
VQ35DE
QR25DE
VQ35DE
4-1/2 qt
4-1/2 qt
4-1/4 qt
4-1/4 qt
3-3/4 qt
3-3/4 qt
3-1/2 qt
3-1/2 qt
4.2
4.2
4.0
4.0
QR25DE engine
• API Certification Mark *2 *3
• API grade SG/SH Energy Conserving II or API grade SJ or SL, Energy Conserving *2 *3
• ILSAC grade GF-II or GF-III*2 *3
VQ35DE engine
• API Certification Mark *2 *3
Without oil
filter change
• API grade SG/SH, Energy Conserving I & II or API grade SJ or SL, Energy Conserving *2 *3
• ILSAC grade GF-I, GF-II, or GF-III*2 *3
Cooling system
With reservoir
QR25DE
VQ35DE
2 gal
2-1/8 gal
2-3/8 qt
1-5/8 gal
1-3/4 gal
2 qt
7.6
8.2
2.2
50% Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant or equivalent
50% Demineralized or distilled water
Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85 or API GL-4, Viscosity SAE 75W-85
Manual transmission gear oil
Automatic transmission fluid
4 Speed
Refill to the proper level according to the
instructions in the “Maintenance and do-
it-yourself” section.*10
Genuine NISSAN Matic D ATF (Continental U.S. and Alaska) or Canada NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid.*4
Genuine NISSAN Matic K ATF *5
5 Speed
Power steering fluid (PSF)
Brake and clutch fluid
Multi-purpose grease
Air conditioning system refrigerant
Air conditioning system oil
Windshield washer fluid
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent.*6
Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid*7 or equivalent DOT 3
NLGI No. 2 (Lithium Soap base)
HFC-134a (R-134a)*8
NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S or equivalent*8
Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze fluid or equivalent
*1: For further details, see “Fuel recommendation.”
*2: For further details, see “Engine oil and oil filter recommendations.”
*3: For further details, see “Recommended SAE viscosity number.”
*4: DEXRON™ III/MERCON™ or equivalent may also be used. Outside the Continental United States and Alaska contact a NISSAN dealership for more information regarding suitable fluids, including
recommended brand(s) of DEXRON™ III/MERCON™ Automatic Transmission Fluid.
*5: Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic K ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission,
which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.
*6: For Canada, NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF), DEXRON™ III/MERCON™, or equivalent ATF may also be used.
*7: Available in mainland USA through your NISSAN dealer.
*8: For further details, see “Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations.”
*9: For further details, see “Engine Oil” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.
*10: See you NISSAN dealer for service.
9-2 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
patibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily de-
termined. If in doubt, ask your service station
manager.
FUEL RECOMMENDATION
● Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle.
Your vehicle is not designed to run on
E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can damage
the fuel system components and is not
covered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim-
ited warranty.
For 2.5L engine
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane
rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num-
ber (Research octane number 91).
If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please take
the following precautions as the usage of such
fuels may cause vehicle performance problems
and/or fuel system damage.
For 3.5L
Gasoline specifications
●
The fuel should be unleaded and have
an octane rating no lower than that
recommended for unleaded gasoline.
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane
rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num-
ber (Research octane number 91).
NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meets
the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) specifi-
cations where it is available. Many of the automo-
bile manufacturers developed this specification
to improve emission control system and vehicle
performance. Ask your service station manager if
the gasoline meets the WWFC specifications.
●
If an oxygenate-blend other than
methanol blend is used, it should con-
tain no more than 10% oxygenate.
(MTBE may, however, be added up to
15%.)
For improved vehicle performance, NISSAN rec-
ommends the use of unleaded premium gasoline
with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI number
(Research octane number 96).
Reformulated gasoline
●
If a methanol blend is used, it should
contain no more than 5% methanol
(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It
should also contain a suitable amount
of appropriate cosolvents and corro-
sion inhibitors. If not properly formu-
lated with appropriate cosolvents and
corrosion inhibitors, such methanol
blends may cause fuel system damage
and/or vehicle performance problems.
At this time, sufficient data is not avail-
able to ensure that all methanol blends
are suitable for use in NISSAN ve-
hicles.
CAUTION
Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformu-
lated gasolines. These gasolines are specially
designed to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSAN
supports efforts towards cleaner air and sug-
gests that you use reformulated gasoline when
available.
● Using a fuel other than that specified
could adversely affect the emission
control system, and may also affect the
warranty coverage.
● Under no circumstances should
leaded gasoline be used, because this
will damage the three-way catalyst.
a
Gasoline containing oxygenates
Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxy-
genates such as ethanol, MTBE and methanol
with or without advertising their presence.
NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels of
which the oxygenate content and the fuel com-
Technical and consumer information 9-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If any driveability problems such as engine stall-
ing and difficult hot-starting are experienced after
using oxygenate-blend fuels, immediately
change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a
low blend of MTBE.
Octane rating tips
CAUTION
Using unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating lower than recommended can cause
persistent, heavy “spark knock.” (“Spark
knock” is a metallic rapping noise.) If se-
vere, this can lead to engine damage. If you
detect a persistent heavy spark knock even
when using gasoline of the stated octane
rating, or if you hear steady spark knock
while holding a steady speed on level
roads, have a NISSAN dealer correct the
condition. Failure to correct the condition
is misuse of the vehicle, for which NISSAN
is not responsible.
● Your vehicle is not designed to run on
E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel in a vehicle
not specifically designed for E-85 fuel
can damage fuel system components
and is not covered by the NISSAN new
vehicle limited warranty.
Take care not to spill gasoline during refu-
eling. Gasoline containing oxygenates can
cause paint damage.
● E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85%
fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded
gasoline.
E–85 fuel
E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel
ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-85 can
only be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do
not use E-85 in your vehicle. U.S. government
regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing
pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange
and black label with the common abbreviation or
the appropriate percentage for that region.
● U.S. government regulations require
ethanol dispensing pumps to be identi-
fied by a small, square, orange and
black label with the common abbrevia-
tion or the appropriate percentage for
that region.
Incorrect ignition timing may result in spark
knock, after-run and/or overheating, which may
cause excessive fuel consumption or engine
damage. If any of the above symptoms are en-
countered, have your vehicle checked at a
NISSAN dealer.
Aftermarket fuel additives
NISSAN does not recommend the use of any
aftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel injec-
tor cleaner, octane booster, intake valve deposit
removers, etc.) which are sold commercially.
Many of these additives intended for gum, varnish
or deposit removal may contain active solvents or
similar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuel
system and engine.
However, now and then you may notice
light spark knock for a short time while
accelerating or driving up hills. This is not a
cause for concern, because you get the
greatest fuel benefit when there is light
spark knock for a short time under heavy
engine load.
9-4 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Oil viscosity
The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes
with temperature. Because of this, it is important
to select the engine oil viscosity based on the
temperatures at which the vehicle will be oper-
ated before the next oil change. The chart “Rec-
ommended SAE viscosity number” shows the
recommended oil viscosities for the expected
ambient temperatures. Choosing an oil viscosity
other than that recommended could cause seri-
ous engine damage.
Selecting the correct oil filter
Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a
high-quality genuine NISSAN oil filter. When re-
placing, use a genuine NISSAN oil filter or its
equivalent for the reason described in “Change
intervals”.
WTI0082
Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE vis-
cosity standard. These oils have the API certifica-
tion mark on the front of the container. Oils which
do not have the specified quality label should not
be used as they could cause engine damage.
ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER
RECOMMENDATION
Selecting the correct oil
Change intervals
It is essential to choose the correct grade, quality
and viscosity engine oil to ensure satisfactory Oil additives
The oil and oil filter change intervals for your
engine are based on the use of the specified
quality oils and filters. Using engine oil and filters
that are not of the specified quality, or exceeding
recommended oil and filter change intervals
could reduce engine life. Damage to the engine
caused by improper maintenance or use of incor-
rect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is not
covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited war-
ranty.
engine life and performance. See ЉCapacities
NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil
and recommended fuel/lubricantsЉ earlier in this
section. NISSAN recommends the use of an
energy conserving oil in order to improve fuel
economy.
additives. The use of an oil additive is not neces-
sary when the proper oil type is used and main-
tenance intervals are followed.
Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been
previously used should not be used.
Select only engine oils that meet the American
Petroleum Institute (API) certification or Interna-
tional Lubricant Standardization and Approval
Technical and consumer information 9-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your engine was filled with a high-quality engine
oil when it was built. You do not have to change
the oil before the first recommended change
interval. Oil and filter change intervals depend
upon how you use your vehicle.
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
REFRIGERANT AND OIL
RECOMMENDATIONS
The air conditioner system in your NISSAN
vehicle must be charged with the refriger-
ant HFC-134a (R-134a) and the oil, NISSAN
A/C system oil Type S or the exact equiva-
lents.
Operation under the following conditions may
require more frequent oil and filter changes:
●
repeated short distance driving at cold out-
side temperatures
CAUTION
●
●
●
●
driving in dusty conditions
extensive idling
The use of any other refrigerant or oil will
cause severe damage to the air condition-
ing system and will require the replace-
ment of all air conditioner system
components.
towing a trailer
stop and go commuting
Refer to the ЉNISSAN Service and Maintenance
The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your
NISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth’s ozone
layer. Although this refrigerant does not affect the
earth’s atmosphere, certain government regula-
tions require the recovery and recycling of any
refrigerant during automotive air conditioner sys-
tem service. A NISSAN dealer has the trained
technicians and equipment needed to recover
and recycle your air conditioner system refriger-
ant.
GuideЉ for the maintenance schedule.
ATI1028
RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY
NUMBER
●
SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil is preferred for all
Contact a NISSAN dealer when servicing your air
conditioner system.
temperatures. SAE 10W-30 or SAE
10W-40 viscosity oils may be used if the
ambient temperature is above 0°F (-18°C).
9-6 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SPECIFICATIONS
ENGINE
Model
QR25DE
VQ35DE
Type
Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC
4-cylinder in-line
Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC
6-cylinder, V-block, Slanted at 60°
3.760 x 3.205 (95.5 x 81.4)
213.45 (3,498)
Cylinder arrangement
Bore x Stroke
Displacement
Firing order
in (mm) 3.5 x 3.9 (89.0 x 100.0)
cu in (cm3) 151.82 (2,488)
1–3–4–2
1–2–3–4–5–6
Idle speed
M/T
A/T (in “N” position)
See the “Emission Control Information label” on the underside of the hood.
Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle
speed)
CO % at idle
Standard PLFR5A-11
PLFR5A-11
Spark plug
Hot PLFR4A-11
Cold PLFR6A-11
PLFR4A-11
PLFR6A-11
Spark plug gap (Nominal)
Camshaft operation
in (mm) 0.043 (1.1)
Timing chain
0.043 (1.1)
Timing chain
The spark ignition system of this vehicle meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.
Technical and consumer information 9-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHEELS AND TIRES
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
Wheel type
Steel
Size
Offset in (mm)
1.57 (40)
Overall length
in (mm)
192.3(4,884)
192.5(4,889)SE-R
70.4(1,788)
16 x 6.5JJ
16 x 6.5JJ
17 x 7JJ
18 x 8JJ
16 x 4T
Aluminum
Aluminum
Aluminum
T type (Spare)
1.57 (40)
Overall width
Overall height
in (mm)
in (mm)
1.77 (45)
57.9(1,471)
1.77 (45)
57.4(1,459)SE-R
61.0(1,549)
1.57 (40)
Front tread
Rear tread
Wheelbase
in (mm)
in (mm)
in (mm)
61.2(1,554)
Tire size
P215/60R16 94T
P215/55R17 93H
P215/55R17 93V
P225/45R18 91Y
T135/70R16
110.2(2,799)
Gross vehicle weight rat-
ing
lb (kg)
See the “F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
certification label” on the center
pillar between the driver’s side
front and rear doors.
Gross axle weight rating
Spare tire
Front
Rear
lb (kg)
lb (kg)
T135/90R16
T155/80R17
9-8 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING
YOUR VEHICLE IN ANOTHER
COUNTRY
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
When planning to drive your NISSAN ve-
hicle in another country, you should first find
out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehi-
cle’s engine.
Using fuel with an octane rating that is too low
may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles
must be operated with unleaded gasoline. There-
fore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas where
appropriate fuel is not available.
When transferring the registration of your
vehicle to another country, state, province
or district, it may be necessary to modify the
vehicle to meet local laws and regulations.
LTI0025
WTI0037
The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emis-
sion control and safety standards vary according
to the country, state, province or district; there-
fore, vehicle specifications may differ.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
(VIN) PLATE
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
(chassis number)
The vehicle identification number (VIN) plate is
attached as shown. This number is the identifica-
tion for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle
registration.
The vehicle identification number is located as
shown.
When any vehicle is to be taken into an-
other country, state, province or district
and registered, its modifications, transpor-
tation, and registration are the responsibil-
ity of the user. NISSAN is not responsible
for any inconvenience that may result.
Technical and consumer information 9-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WTI0096
WTI0049
LTI0026
QR25DE engine
VQ35DE engine
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
CERTIFICATION LABEL
ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER
The number is stamped on the engine as shown.
The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certification la-
bel is affixed as shown. This label contains valu-
able vehicle information, such as: Gross Vehicle
Weight Ratings (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR), month and year of manufacture,
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), etc. Review
it carefully.
9-10 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LTI0027
LTI0120
LTI0028
EMISSION CONTROL
INFORMATION LABEL
TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION
LABEL
AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION
LABEL
The emission control information label is at-
tached as shown.
The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label. The label is located as
shown.
The air conditioner specification label is affixed as
shown.
Technical and consumer information 9-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE
VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION
WARNING
1
Make a shallow hole in each plastic finisher
at the location mark (small dimple) using a
0.31 in (8 mm) drill. To avoid damaging the
threads behind the finisher, apply only light
pressure to the drill.
᭺
● It is extremely dangerous to ride
in a cargo area inside a vehicle. In
a collision, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
2
Mount the license plate bracket using two of
the four 8 mm slotted hex head screws.
᭺
● Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and seat
belts.
3. Use the remaining two 8 mm slotted hex
head screws to mount the license plate to
the license plate bracket.
● Be sure everyone in your vehicle
is in a seat and using a seat belt
properly.
TERMS
It is important to familiarize yourself with
the following terms before loading your
vehicle:
● Curb Weight (actual weight of your
vehicle) - vehicle weight including:
standard and optional equipment, flu-
ids, emergency tools, and spare tire
assembly. This weight does not in-
clude passengers and cargo.
LTI0109
Use the following steps to mount the front license
plate:
9-12 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
● GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb
weight plus the combined weight of
passengers and cargo.
weight of occupants and cargo that
can be loaded into the vehicle. If the
vehicle is used to tow a trailer, the
trailer tongue weight must be in-
cluded as part of the cargo load. This
information is located on the Tire and
Loading Information label (if so
equipped).
● GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-
ing)
-
maximum total combined
weight of the unloaded vehicle, pas-
sengers, luggage, hitch, trailer
tongue load and any other optional
equipment. This information is lo-
cated on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
label.
● Cargo capacity - permissible weight
of cargo, the subtracted weight of
occupants from the load limit.
● GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) -
maximum weight (load) limit specified
for the front or rear axle. This informa-
tion
is
located
on
the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. label.
● GCWR (Gross Combined Weight
rating) - The maximum total weight
rating of the vehicle, passengers,
cargo, and trailer.
● Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit,
Total load capacity - maximum total
weight limit specified of the load
(passengers and cargo) for the ve-
hicle. This is the maximum combined
Technical and consumer information 9-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY
Do not exceed the load limit of your ve-
hicle shown as ЉThe combined weight of
occupants and cargoЉ on the Tire and
Loading Information label (if so
equipped). Do not exceed the number of
occupants shown as ЉSeating CapacityЉ
on Tire and Loading Information label (if
so equipped).
To get Љthe combined weight of occu-
pants and cargoЉ, add the weight of all
occupants, then add the total luggage
weight. Examples are shown in the follow-
ing illustration.
LTI0152
Example
9-14 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.
Steps for determining correct load
limit
LOADING TIPS
● The GVW must not exceed GVWR
or GAWR as specified on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification
label.
1. Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
● Do not load the front and rear axle to
the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the
GVWR.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be trans-
ferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this re-
duces the available cargo and lug-
gage load capacity of your vehicle.
2. Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
WARNING
3. Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg
or XXX lbs.
● Properly secure all cargo with
ropes or straps to help prevent it
from sliding or shifting. Do not
place cargo higher than the seat-
backs. In a sudden stop or colli-
sion, unsecured cargo could
cause personal injury.
Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm
that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle.
See “Measurement of Weights” later in
this section.
4. The resulting figure equals the avail-
able amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if the
XXX amount equals 1400 lbs. and
there will be five 150 lb. passengers
in your vehicle, the amount of avail-
able cargo and luggage load capac-
ity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 X 150)
= 650 lbs) or (640-340 (5 X 70) =
300 kg.)
● Do not load your vehicle any
heavier than the GVWR or the
maximum front and rear GAWRs.
If you do, parts of your vehicle
can break, tire damage could oc-
cur, or it can change the way your
vehicle handles. This could result
in loss of control and cause per-
sonal injury.
Also check tires for proper inflation pres-
sures. See the Tire and Loading Informa-
tion label.
Technical and consumer information 9-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TOWING A TRAILER
MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS
Maximum trailer loads
WARNING
● Overloading not only can shorten
the life of your vehicle and the
tire, but can also cause unsafe
vehicle handling and longer brak-
ing distances. This may cause a
premature tire failure which
could result in a serious accident
and personal injury. Failures
caused by overloading are not
Overloading or improper loading of a
trailer and its cargo can adversely affect
vehicle handling, braking and perfor-
mance and may lead to accidents.
Never allow the total trailer load to exceed the
value
specified
in
the
“Towing
Load/Specification” chart found later in this sec-
tion. The total trailer load equals trailer weight
plus its cargo weight.
CAUTION
●
When towing a trailer load of 1,000 lbs.
(454 kg) or more, trailers with a brake
system must be used.
● Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy load
for the first 500 miles (800 km). Your
engine, axle or other parts could be
damaged.
covered
by
the
vehicle’s
warranty.
MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS
● For the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full
throttle. This helps the engine and other
parts of your vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
Secure loose items to prevent weight
shifts that could affect the balance of your
vehicle. When the vehicle is loaded, drive
to a scale and weigh the front and the rear
wheels separately to determine axle
loads. Individual axle loads should not ex-
ceed either of the gross axle weight rat-
ings (GAWR). The total of the axle loads
should not exceed the gross vehicle
weight rating (GVWR). These ratings are
given on the vehicle certification label. If
weight ratings are exceeded, move or re-
move items to bring all weights below the
ratings.
Your new vehicle was designed to be used pri-
marily to carry passengers and cargo. Remember
that towing a trailer places additional loads on
your vehicle’s engine, drive train, steering, brak-
ing and other systems.
A NISSAN Towing Guide (U.S. only) is available
on the website at www.nissanusa.com. This
guide includes information on trailer towing ca-
pability and the special equipment required for
proper towing.
9-16 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
temperatures on graded roads can affect engine
performance and cause overheating. The engine
protection mode, which helps reduce the chance
of engine damage, could activate and automati-
cally decrease engine power. Vehicle speed may
decrease under high load. Plan your trip carefully
to account for trailer and vehicle load, weather
and road conditions.
WARNING
Overheating can result in reduced engine
power and vehicle speed. The reduced
speed may be lower than other traffic,
which could increase the chance of a col-
lision. Be especially careful when driving.
Pull to the side of the road to a safe area.
Allow the engine to cool and return to
normal operation. See “If your vehicle
overheats” in the “In case of emergency”
section of this manual.
LTI0164
WTI0160
The GCWR equals the combined weight of the
towing vehicle (including passengers and cargo)
plus the total trailer load. Towing loads greater
than these or using improper towing equipment
could adversely affect vehicle handling, braking
and performance.
Tongue load
Keep the tongue load between 10 - 15 percent of
the total trailer load within the maximum tongue
load limits shown in the following “Towing
Load/Specification” chart. If the tongue load be-
comes excessive, rearrange cargo to allow for
proper tongue load.
CAUTION
The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is not
only related to the maximum trailer loads, but also
the places you plan to tow. Tow weights appro-
priate for level highway driving may have to be
reduced for low traction situations (for example,
on slippery boat ramps).
Vehicle damage resulting from improper
towing procedures is not covered by
NISSAN warranties.
Temperature conditions can also affect towing.
For example, towing a heavy trailer in high outside
Technical and consumer information 9-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Towing capacities are calculated assuming a
base vehicle with driver and any options required
to achieve the rating. Additional passengers,
cargo and/or optional equipment, such as the
trailer hitch, will add weight to the vehicle and
reduce your vehicle’s maximum towing capacity
and trailer tongue load.
cargo, that are normally in the trailer when it is
towed. Make sure the Gross Trailer Weight is not
more than the Gross Trailer Weight Rating shown
on the trailer and is not more than the calculated
available maximum towing capacity.
Also weigh the front and rear axles on the scale to
make sure the Front Gross Axle Weight and Rear
Gross Axle Weight are not more than Front
Gross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight
on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.
The cargo in the trailer and vehicle may need to
be moved or removed to meet the specified rat-
ings.
The vehicle and trailer need to be weighed to
confirm the vehicle is within the GVWR, Front
GAWR, Rear GAWR, Gross Combined Weight
Rating (GCWR) and Towing capacity.
All vehicle and trailer weights can be measured
using platform type scales commonly found at
truck stops, highway weigh stations, building
supply centers or salvage yards.
TI1012M
Example:
Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight
(GVW)/Maximum Gross Axle Weight
(GAW)
●
●
●
Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) as weighed
on a scale - including passengers, cargo and
hitch - 3,961 lb. (1796 kg).
To determine the available payload capacity for
tongue load, use the following procedure.
The GVW of the towing vehicle must not exceed
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification
label. The GVW equals the combined weight of
the unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage,
hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional
equipment. In addition, front or rear GAW must
not exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
certification label.
1. Locate
the
GVWR
on
the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) from
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label -
4,203 lb. (1906 kg).
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.
2. Weigh your vehicle on the scale with all of
the passengers and cargo that are normally
in the vehicle when towing a trailer.
Maximum Towing Load from “Towing
Load/SpecificationЉ chart - 1,000 lb. (454
kg).
3. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the
GVWR. The remaining amount is the avail-
able maximum tongue load.
To determine the Gross Trailer Weight, weigh
your trailer on a scale with all equipment and
9-18 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
●
Choose the proper class hitch ball based on
the trailer weight.
TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION
4,203 lb. (1906 kg)
GVWR
GVW
– 3,961 lb. (1796 kg)
The diameter of the threaded shank of the
hitch ball must be matched to the ball mount
hole diameter. The hitch ball shank should
be no more than 1/16” smaller than the hole
in the ball mount.
TOWING LOAD / SPECIFICATION
= 242 lb. (109 kg)
Available for tongue
weight
UNIT: lb (kg)
MAXIMUM TOWING
1,000 (454)
LOAD
1,000 lb. (454 kg) Capacity available for
towing
MAXIMUM TONGUE
100 (45)
●
The threaded shank of the hitch ball must be
long enough to be properly secured to the
ball mount. There should be at least 2
threads showing beyond the lock washer
and nut.
LOAD
242 lb. (109 kg) Available tongue weight
TOWING SAFETY
Trailer hitch
/ 1,000 lb. (454 kg)
=
Available capacity
24 % tongue weight
Sway control device
Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and trailer.
A genuine NISSAN trailer hitch is available from
your NISSAN dealer (Canada only). Make sure
the trailer hitch is securely attached to the ve-
hicle, to help avoid personal injury or property
damage due to sway caused by crosswinds,
rough road surfaces or passing trucks.
In this case, more tongue weight capacity is
available than is needed to pull the maximum
weight trailer. Remember to keep trailer tongue
weight between 10 – 15 % of the trailer weight. If
the tongue load becomes excessive, rearrange
cargo to allow for proper tongue load. Always
verify that available capacities are under the re-
quired ratings.
Sway control devices are used to help control the
effects of sudden maneuvers, wind gusts, and
buffeting caused by other vehicles. Make sure the
sway control device is compatible with the trail-
er’s brake system.
Class I hitch
Hitch ball
Class I trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball
mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers
of a maximum weight of 2,000 lb (909 kg).
Choose a hitch ball of the proper size and weight
rating for your trailer:
●
The required hitch ball size is stamped on
most trailer couplers. Most hitch balls also
have the size printed on the top of the ball.
You may add Class I trailer hitch equipment to the
vehicle that has a 2,000 lb (909 kg) maximum
weight rating, but your vehicle is only capable of
Technical and consumer information 9-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
towing the maximum trailer weights shown in the
Towing Load/Specification Chart earlier in this
section.
Tire pressures
Trailer lights
● When towing a trailer, inflate the ve-
hicle tires to the recommended cold
tire pressure indicated on the Tire
and Loading Information label.
CAUTION
When splicing into the vehicle electrical
system, a commercially available power-
type module/converter must be used to
provide power for all trailer lighting. This
unit uses the vehicle battery as a direct
power source for all trailer lights while
using the vehicle tail light, stoplight and
turn signal circuits as a signal source. The
module/converter must draw no more
that 15 milliamps from the stop and tail
lamp circuits. Using a module/converter
that exceeds these power requirements
may damage the vehicle’s electrical sys-
tem. See a reputable trailer dealer to ob-
tain the proper equipment and to have it
installed.
CAUTION
● Do not use axle-mounted hitches.
● The hitch should not be attached to or
affect the operation of the impact-
absorbing bumper.
● Trailer tire condition, size, load rating
and proper inflation pressure should
be in accordance with the trailer and
tire manufacturer’s specifications.
● Do not modify the vehicle exhaust sys-
tem, brake system, etc. to install a
trailer hitch.
Safety chains
● To reduce the possibility of additional
damage if your vehicle is struck from
the rear, where practical, remove the
hitch and/or receiver when not in use.
Always use suitable safety chains between your
vehicle and the trailer. The safety chains should
be crossed and should be attached to the hitch,
not to the vehicle bumper or axle. Be sure to leave
enough slack in the chains to permit turning
corners.
● After the hitch is removed, seal the bolt
holes to prevent exhaust fumes, water
or dust from entering the passenger
compartment.
Trailer lights should comply with federal and/or
local regulations. For assistance in hooking up
trailer lights, contact a NISSAN dealer or repu-
table trailer dealer.
● Regularly check that all trailer hitch
mounting bolts are securely mounted.
Trailer brakes
If your trailer is equipped with a braking system,
make sure it conforms to federal and/or local
regulations and that it is properly installed.
9-20 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
●
●
Be certain your rearview mirrors conform to
all federal, state or local regulations. If not,
install any mirrors required for towing before
driving the vehicle.
trailer to go. Make small corrections and
back up slowly. If possible, have someone
guide you when you are backing up.
WARNING
Never connect a trailer brake system di-
rectly to the vehicle brake system.
Always block the wheels on both vehicle and
trailer when parking. Parking on a slope is not
recommended; however, if you must do so:
Pre-towing tips
Determine the overall height of the vehicle
and trailer so the required clearance is
known.
●
Be certain your vehicle maintains a level
position when a loaded and/or unloaded
trailer is hitched. Do not drive the vehicle if it
has an abnormal nose-up or nose-down
condition; check for improper tongue load,
overload, worn suspension or other possible
causes of either condition.
CAUTION
Trailer towing tips
If you move the shift selector lever to the P
(Park) position before blocking the
wheels and applying the parking brake,
transmission damage could occur.
In order to gain skill and an understanding of the
vehicle’s behavior, you should practice turning,
stopping and backing up in an area which is free
from traffic. Steering stability and braking perfor-
mance will be somewhat different than under
normal driving conditions.
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
●
●
Always secure items in the trailer to prevent
load shift while driving.
2. Have someone place blocks on the down hill
side of the vehicle and trailer wheels.
Keep the cargo load as low as possible in
the trailer to keep the trailer center of gravity
low.
●
Always secure items in the trailer to prevent
load shift while driving.
3. After the wheel blocks are in place, slowly
release the brake pedal until the blocks ab-
sorb the vehicle load.
●
Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a pin or
lock to prevent the coupler from inadvert-
ently becoming unlatched.
●
●
Load the trailer so approximately 60% of the
trailer load is in the front half and 40% is in
the back half. Also make sure the load is
balanced side to side.
4. Apply the parking brake.
5. Shift the transmission into P (Park).
6. Turn off the engine.
●
●
●
Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops.
Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.
Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure, ve-
hicle tire pressure, trailer light operation, and
trailer wheel lug nuts every time you attach a
trailer to the vehicle.
To drive away:
Always drive your vehicle at a moderate
speed.
1. Start the vehicle.
●
When backing up, hold the bottom of the
steering wheel with one hand. Move your
hand in the direction in which you want the
2. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the transmission into gear.
Technical and consumer information 9-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Release the parking brake.
●
●
For the first 500 miles (805 km) that you do
tow, do not drive over 50 MPH (80 km/h).
3. Try to rearrange the trailer load so it is bal-
anced as described earlier in this section.
5. Drive slowly until the vehicle and trailer are
clear from the blocks.
Have your vehicle serviced more often than
at intervals specified in the recommended
Maintenance Schedule in the “NISSAN Ser-
vice and Maintenance Guide”.
●
Be careful when passing other vehicles.
Passing while towing a trailer requires con-
siderably more distance than normal pass-
ing. Remember, the length of the trailer must
also pass the other vehicle before you can
safely change lanes.
6. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
7. Have someone retrieve and store the blocks.
●
●
When making a turn, your trailer wheels will
be closer to the inside of the turn than your
vehicle wheels. To compensate for this,
make a larger than normal turning radius
during the turn.
●
When going down a hill, shift into a lower
gear and use the engine braking effect.
When going up a long grade, downshift the
transmission to a lower gear and reduce
speed to reduce chances of engine over-
loading and/or overheating. However, for
long steep grades, do not stay in 1st gear
when driving above 35 MPH (56 km/h) or
2nd gear when driving above 58 MPH (93
km/h).
●
Down shift the transmission to a lower gear
for engine braking when driving down steep
or long hills. This will help slow the vehicle
without applying the brakes.
Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely
affect vehicle/trailer handling, possibly caus-
ing vehicle sway. When being passed by
larger vehicles, be prepared for possible
changes in crosswinds that could affect ve-
hicle handling.
●
●
To maintain engine braking efficiency and
electrical charging performance, do not use
overdrive.
Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long
or too frequently. This could cause the
brakes to overheat, resulting in reduced
braking efficiency.
●
If the engine coolant rises to an extremely
high temperature when the air conditioner
system is on, turn off the air conditioner.
Coolant heat can be additionally vented by
opening the windows, switching the fan
control to high and setting the temperature
control to the HOT position.
Do the following if the trailer begins to sway:
1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal to
allow the vehicle to coast and steer as
straight ahead as the road conditions allow.
This combination will help stabilize the ve-
hicle
●
Increase your following distance to allow for
greater stopping distances while towing a
trailer. Anticipate stops and brake gradually
- Do not correct trailer sway by steering or
applying the brakes.
●
●
Trailer towing requires more fuel than normal
circumstances.
●
●
Do not use cruise control while towing a
trailer.
2. When the trailer sway stops, gently apply the
brakes and pull to the side of the road in a
safe area.
Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle’s first
500 miles (805 km).
Some states or provinces have specific
regulations and speed limits for vehicles that
9-22 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
are towing trailers. Obey the local speed
limits.
tral for two minutes. Failure to idle the engine
after every 500 miles (805 km) of towing
may cause damage to internal transmission
parts.
CAUTION
● Failure to follow these guidelines can
result in severe transmission damage.
●
●
●
●
Check your hitch, trailer wiring harness con-
nections, and trailer wheel lug nuts after 50
miles (80 km) of travel and at every break.
● Whenever flat towing your vehicle, al-
ways tow forward, never backward.
When stopped in traffic for long periods of
time in hot weather, put the vehicle in the P
(Park) position.
● DO NOT tow any automatic transmis-
sion vehicle with all four wheels on the
ground (flat towing). Doing so WILL
DAMAGE internal transmission parts
due to lack of transmission lubrication.
When launching a boat, don’t allow the wa-
ter level to go over the exhaust tail pipe or
rear bumper.
● For emergency towing procedures refer
to “Towing recommended by NISSAN”
in the “In case of emergency”section of
this manual.
Make sure you disconnect the trailer lights
before backing the trailer into the water or
the trailer lights may burn out.
Automatic Transmission
When towing a trailer, final drive gear oil
should be replaced and transmission
oil/fluid should be changed more fre-
quently. For additional information, see the
“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section
earlier in this manual.
To tow a vehicle equipped with an automatic
transmission, an appropriate vehicle dolly MUST
be placed under the towed vehicle’s drive
wheels. Always follow the dolly manufacturer’s
recommendations when using their product.
FLAT TOWING
Manual Transmission
Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the
ground is sometimes called flat towing. This
method is sometimes used when towing a vehicle
behind a recreational vehicle, such as a motor
home.
●
Always tow with the manual transmission in
Neutral.
●
After towing 500 miles (805 km), start and
idle the engine with the transmission in Neu-
Technical and consumer information 9-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
DOT (Department of Transportation) Quality
Grades: All passenger car tires must conform to
federal safety requirements in addition to these
grades.
WARNING
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
The temperature grade for this tire is es-
tablished for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
under-inflation, or excessive loading, ei-
ther separately or in combination, can
cause heat build-up and possible tire
failure.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
Temperature A, B and C
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the
generation of heat, and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the
tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and exces-
sive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of perfor-
mance which all passenger car tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than
the minimum required by law.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified gov-
ernment test course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times
as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, however,
and may depart significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA, A, B and C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the
tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as mea-
sured under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and con-
crete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
9-24 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
WARRANTY
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (US
only)
READINESS FOR INSPECTION/
MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST
Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the following
emission warranties:
Due to legal requirements in some states and
Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may be re-
quired to be in what is called the “ready condi-
tion” for an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of
the emission control system.
If you believe that your vehicle has a de-
fect which could cause a crash or could
cause injury or death, you should immedi-
ately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addi-
tion to notifying NISSAN.
For USA
1. Emission Defects Warranty
2. Emissions Performance Warranty
The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” when it
is driven through certain driving patterns. Usually,
the ready condition can be obtained by ordinary
usage of the vehicle.
Details of these warranties may be found with
other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Infor-
mation Booklet which comes with your NISSAN
vehicle. If you did not receive a Warranty Informa-
tion Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a re-
placement by writing to:
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot be-
come involved in individual problems be-
tween you, your dealer, or NISSAN.
If a powertrain system component is repaired or
the battery is disconnected, the vehicle may be
reset to a “not ready” condition. Before taking the
●
Nissan North America, Inc.
Consumer Affairs Department
P.O. Box 191
I/M
test,
check
the
vehicle’s
inspection/maintenance test readiness condi-
tion. Turn the ignition switch ON without starting
the engine. If the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds and then
blinks for 10 seconds , the I/M test condition is
Љnot readyЉ. If the MIL does not blink after 20
seconds, the I/M test condition is Љready.Љ If the
MIL indicates the vehicle is in a Љnot readyЉ con-
dition, drive the vehicle through the following
pattern to set the vehicle to the ready condition. If
you cannot or do not want to perform the driving
pattern, a NISSAN dealer can conduct it for you.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Ve-
hicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-
327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go
to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh
Street, SW., Washington, D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other information
about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
Gardena, CA 90248-0191
For Canada
Emission Control System Warranty
Details of these warranties may be found with
other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Infor-
mation Booklet which comes with your NISSAN
vehicle. If you did not receive a Warranty Informa-
tion Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a re-
placement by writing to:
You may notify NISSAN by contacting our
Consumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at
1-800-NISSAN-1.
●
Nissan Canada Inc.
5290 Orbitor Drive
Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5
Technical and consumer information 9-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EVENT DATA RECORDERS
8. Stop the vehicle. Place the transmission se-
lector lever in the P (Park) or N (Neutral)
position.
Your vehicle is equipped with a variety of comput-
ers that monitor and control a number of systems
to optimize performance and help service techni-
cians with diagnosis and repair. Some of the
computers monitor emission control systems,
braking systems, engine systems, transmission
systems, tire pressure systems, and airbag sys-
tems. Some data about vehicle operation may be
stored in the computers for use during servicing.
Other data may be stored if a crash event occurs.
For example, vehicle speed, brake application,
steering angle, air bag readiness, air bag perfor-
mance, and seat belt use by the driver or passen-
ger may be recorded. These types of systems are
sometimes called Event Data Recorders.
WARNING
Always drive the vehicle in a safe and
prudent manner according to traffic con-
ditions and obey all traffic laws.
9. Turn the engine off.
10. Repeat steps 1 - 8 at least one more time.
1. Start the engine when the engine coolant
temperature gauge needle points to C. Al-
low the engine to idle until the gauge needle
points between the C and H (normal oper-
ating temperature).
If steps 1 through 7 are interrupted, repeat the
preceding step. Any safe driving mode is accept-
able between steps. Do not stop the engine until
step 7 is completed.
2. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88
km/h), then quickly release the accelerator
pedal completely and keep it released for at
least 10 seconds.
Special equipment can be used to access the
electronic data that may be stored in the vehicle’s
computers (sounds are not recorded). NISSAN
and NISSAN dealers have equipment to access
some of this data; others may also have this
equipment. The data may be retrieved during
routine vehicle servicing or for special research. It
might also be accessed with the consent of the
vehicle owner or lessee, in response to a request
by law enforcement, or as otherwise required or
permitted by law.
3. Quickly depress the accelerator pedal for a
moment, then drive the vehicle at a speed of
53 - 60 MPH (86 - 96 km/h) for at least 9
minutes.
4. Stop the vehicle.
5. Accelerate the vehicle to 35 MPH (55 km/h)
and maintain the speed for 20 seconds.
6. Repeat steps 4 through 5 at least 10 times.
7. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88 km/h)
and maintain the speed for at least 3 min-
utes.
9-26 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE
MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION
A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best
source of service and repair information for your
vehicle. Filled with wiring diagrams, illustrations
and step-by-step diagnostic and adjustment pro-
cedures, this manual is the same one used by the
factory-trained technicians working at NISSAN
dealerships. Also available are genuine NISSAN
Owner’s Manuals, and genuine NISSAN Service
and Owner’s Manuals for older NISSAN models.
Resolve Corporation
20770 Westwood Road
Strongsville, OH 44136
1-800-247-5321
only use Genuine NISSAN Collision Parts.
NISSAN does not warrant non-NISSAN parts,
nor does NISSAN’s warranty apply to damage
caused by a non-genuine part.
Using Genuine NISSAN Parts can help protect
your personal safety, preserve your warranty pro-
tection and maintain the resale value of your
vehicle. And if your vehicle was leased, using
Genuine NISSAN Parts may prevent or limit un-
necessary excess wear and tear expenses at the
end of your lease.
For Canada
To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN Ser-
vice Manual or Owner’s Manual please contact
your nearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone num-
ber and location of a NISSAN dealer in your area
call the NISSAN Information Center at 1-800-
387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN representa-
tive will assist you.
For USA
For current pricing and availability of genuine
NISSAN Service Manuals for the 2000 model
year and later contact:
NISSAN designs its hoods with crumple zones to
minimize the risk that the hood will penetrate the
windshield of your vehicle in an accident. Non-
genuine (imitation) parts may not provide such
built-in safeguards. Also, non-genuine parts of-
ten show premature wear, rust and corrosion.
Also available are genuine NISSAN Service and
Owner’s Manuals for older NISSAN models.
Tweddle Litho Company
1-800-450-9491
www.nissan-techinfo.com
IN THE EVENT OF A COLLISION
Unfortunately, accidents do occur. In this unlikely
event, there is some important information you
should know.
Why should you take a chance?
For current pricing and availability of genuine
NISSAN Service Manuals for the 1999 model
year and prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:
In over 40 states, the law says you must be ad-
vised if non-genuine parts are used to repair your
vehicle. And some states have enacted laws that
restrict insurance companies from authorizing the
use of non-genuine collision parts during the new
vehicle warranty. These laws help protect you, so
you can take action to protect yourself.
Many insurance companies routinely authorize
the use of non-genuine collision parts in order to
cut costs, among other reasons.
Resolve Corporation
20770 Westwood Road
Strongsville, OH 44136
1-800-247-5321
Insist on the use of genuine NISSAN
collision parts!
If you want your vehicle to be restored using parts
made to NISSAN’s original exacting specifica-
tions – if you want to help it to last and hold its
resale value, the solution is simple. Tell your
insurance agent and your repair shop to
It’s your right!
For current pricing and availability of genuine
NISSAN Owner’s Manuals for this model year
and prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:
If you should need further information visit us at:
www.nissanusa.com.
Technical and consumer information 9-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MEMO
9-28 Technical and consumer information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10 Index
Compact Disc (CD) changer . . . . . . .4-38
FM-AM radio with compact disc (CD)
changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-30
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-23
Autolight switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22
Automatic
Brightness control
A
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24
Brightness/contrast button. . . . . . . . . . .4-10
Bulb check/instrument panel. . . . . . . . . .2-11
Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-33
Active head restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-8
Air bag (See supplemental restraint
system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-34
Air bag system
Front (See supplemental front impact air
bag system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-42
Air bag warning light. . . . . . . . . . .1-49, 2-13
Air cleaner housing filter . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22
Air conditioner
Automatic power window switch . . . . .2-39
Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) . . . .8-14
Automatic transmission position indicator
light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Transmission selector lever lock
C
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-42
Cargo (See vehicle loading information) . . .9-12
CD care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . .4-40, 4-40
CD changer (See audio system). . . . . . . .4-38
Child restraint with top tether strap . . . . . .1-25
Child restraints . . . . . . .1-11, 1-12, 1-17, 1-24
Precautions on child restraints . . .1-17, 1-29
Top tether strap anchor point locations . .1-26
Child safety rear door lock. . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
Chimes, audible reminders. . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Cigarette lighter and ashtray . . . . . . . . . .2-29
Cleaning exterior and interior . . . . . . . . . .7-2
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-30, 4-41
(models with navigation system) . . . . . .4-8
Clutch
release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11
Air conditioner operation . . . . . .4-15, 4-15
Air conditioner service . . . . . . . . . . .4-22
Air conditioner specification label . . . . .9-11
Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil
recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-6
Heater and air conditioner
B
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18
Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Belts (See drive belts) . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20
Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-29
Brake
Anti-lock braking system (ABS) . . . . . .5-20
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17
Brake light (See stop light). . . . . . . . .8-33
Brake pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Brake wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Parking brake check . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26
Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Break-in schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11, 4-20
Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . .4-22
Air flow charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16
Alarm system
(See vehicle security system) . . . . . . . . .2-16
Anchor point locations . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-26
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-41
Anti-lock brake warning light. . . . . . . . . .2-11
Anti-lock braking system (ABS) . . . . . . . .5-20
Armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7
Audible reminders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-23
Clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17
C.M.V.S.S. certification label. . . . . . . . . .9-10
Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Console box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33
Control panel buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2
Brightness/contrast button. . . . . . . . .4-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Clock set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8
English/metric button . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8
Enter button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2
Fuel econ button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
Maint (maintenance) button . . . . . . . . .4-4
Prev button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3, 4-3
Setting button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6
Startup screen . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3, 4-3
Trip button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
Driving
Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
F
Driving with manual transmission . . . . .5-12
Precautions when starting and driving . . .5-2
Flashers
(See hazard warning flasher switch). . . . . .2-26
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2
Floor mat positioning aid. . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5
Fluid
E
Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) . . . .8-14
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17
Capacities and recommended
Economy - fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Emission control information label . . . . . . .9-11
Emission control system warranty . . . . . . .9-25
Engine
Controls
Heater and air conditioner
controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11, 4-20
Coolant
fuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17
Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16
Window washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18
F.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . .9-10
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25
Front air bag system
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Changing engine coolant. . . . . . . . . .8-10
Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
Changing engine oil filter. . . . . . . . . .8-13
Checking engine coolant level. . . . . . . .8-9
Checking engine oil level. . . . . . . . . .8-10
Engine compartment check locations. . . .8-9
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-8
Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . .9-5
Engine oil pressure warning light . . . . .2-12
Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5
Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10
Engine specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7
Engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9
English/metric button . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8
Enter button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2
Event data recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26
Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . .5-2
Eyeglass case. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Changing engine coolant. . . . . . . . . .8-10
Checking engine coolant level. . . . . . . .8-9
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-8
Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32
(See supplemental restraint system) . . . . .1-42
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Fuel
Capacities and recommended
D
fuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8
Fuel octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4
Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3
Fuel-filler door and cap. . . . . . . . . . .3-12
Fuel-filler door lock opener lever. . . . . .3-12
Fuel consumption gauge . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Fuel econ button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
Daytime running light system
(Canada only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24
Defroster switch
Rear window and outside mirror defroster
switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Dimensions and weights. . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8
Dimmer switch for instrument panel . . . . . .2-24
Display controls (see control panel buttons) . .4-2
Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
Door open warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Drive belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20
10-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hood release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26
G
L
Garage door opener, HomeLinkா Universal
Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42
Gas cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12
Gauge
Labels
Air conditioner specification label . . . . .9-11
C.M.V.S.S. certification label. . . . . . . .9-10
Emission control information label . . . . .9-11
Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10
F.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . .9-10
Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . .9-9
Warning labels (for SRS). . . . . . . . . .1-49
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)
System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24
License plate
I
Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4
Immobilizer system. . . . . . . . . .2-17, 3-2, 5-5
Important vehicle information label. . . . . . .9-10
In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22
Increasing fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Indicator lights and audible reminders
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-8
Engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . .2-9
Fuel consumption gauge . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
Trip odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33
Glove box lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33
Grocery hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36
(See warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11
Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . .2-24
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2, 2-2
Instrument panel dimmer switch . . . . . . . .2-24
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40
Interior trunk lid release. . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11
ISOFIX child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24
Installing the license plate . . . . . . . . .9-12
Light
Air bag warning light. . . . . . . . .1-49, 2-13
Brake light (See stop light). . . . . . . . .8-33
Bulb check/instrument panel. . . . . . . .2-11
Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-33
Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25
Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . .2-21
Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . .2-21
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40
Light bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-31
Low washer fluid warning light. . . . . . .2-13
Passenger air bag and status light. . . . .1-43
Spotlights (See map light) . . . . . . . . .2-41
Trunk light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42
Warning/indicator lights and audible
J
H
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-6
Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . .2-26
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7
Active head restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-8
Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . . . .2-21
Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21
Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27
Heater
K
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
Keyfob battery replacement . . . . . . . . . .8-30
Keyless entry system
reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11
Lights
(See remote keyless entry system) . . . . . . .3-5
Heater and air conditioner
controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11, 4-20
Heater operation . . . . . . .4-14, 4-14, 4-21
HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver . . . . . . .2-42
Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41
Lock
Child safety rear door lock. . . . . . . . . .3-5
10-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
Fuel-filler door lock opener lever. . . . . .3-12
Glove box lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33
Trunk lid lock opener lever . . . . . . . . .3-10
Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Low washer fluid warning light. . . . . . . . .2-13
Luggage (See vehicle loading information) . .9-12
Precautions on child restraints . . .1-17, 1-29
Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . . .1-9
Precautions on supplemental restraint
O
Octane rating (See fuel octane rating) . . . . .9-4
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Oil
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-34
Precautions when starting and driving . . .5-2
Prev button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3, 4-3
Programmable features . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6
Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
Changing engine oil filter. . . . . . . . . .8-13
Checking engine oil level. . . . . . . . . .8-10
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . .9-5
Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5
Overheat
If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . .6-8
Owner’s manual order form . . . . . . . . . .9-27
Owner’s manual/service manual order
information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27
M
R
Maint (maintenance) button . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
Maintenance
Radio
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
Inside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3
Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . .8-5
Outside the vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . .1-16
Under the hood and vehicle . . . . . . . . .8-4
Malfunction indicator light . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41
Map pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30
Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3, 2-3
Instrument brightness control . . . . . . .2-24
Mirror
Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . .4-42
Compact Disc (CD) changer . . . . . . .4-38
FM-AM radio with compact disc (CD)
changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-30
Readiness for inspection maintenance (I/M)
test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25
Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38
Rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6
Rear window and outside mirror defroster
switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Recorders
Event data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26
Refrigerant recommendation . . . . . . . . . .9-6
Registering your vehicle in another country. . .9-9
Remote keyless entry system . . . . . . . . . .3-5
Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . . . .9-25
P
Parking
Parking brake check . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26
Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . .5-18, 5-18
Power
Power outlet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28
Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38
Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16
Power steering system . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37
Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38
Precautions
Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14
Multi-remote control system
(See remote keyless entry system) . . . . . . .3-5
N
S
NISSAN vehicle immobilizer
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17, 3-2, 5-5
Safety
Child safety rear door lock. . . . . . . . . .3-5
Child seat belts . . . . . . . . . . .1-17, 1-29
Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . .8-5
10-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . .9-25
Seat adjustment
Front manual seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-2
Front power seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-4
Rear seat adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6
Seat belt
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Spotlights (See map light) . . . . . . . . . . .2-41
SRS warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-49
Starting
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-6
Precautions when starting and driving . . .5-2
Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8
Startup screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3, 4-3
Steering
Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16
Power steering system . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Stop light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-33
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30
Storage tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34
Sunglasses case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31
Sunglasses holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39
Supplemental air bag warning light. . .1-49, 2-13
Supplemental front impact air bag system . .1-42
Supplemental restraint system
Traction control system (TCS) off
switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28
Turn signal switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-19
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-11
Infants and small children . . . . . . . . .1-12
Injured Person. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13
Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12
Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . . .1-9
Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13
Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16
Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . .1-16
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-9
Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . .1-15
Three-point type with retractor. . . . . . .1-13
Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Seatback pockets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30
Seats
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27
Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-2
Rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6
Security system (NISSAN vehicle immobilizer
system), engine start. . . . . . . . .2-17, 3-2, 5-5
Service manual order form . . . . . . . . . . .9-27
Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . .4-22
Setting button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6
Shift lock release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11
Shifting
T
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
Temperature gauge
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-8
Theft (NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system),
engine start. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17, 3-2, 5-5
Three-way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
Tire
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2
Spare tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3, 8-51
Tire chains. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-48
Tire placard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11
Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-40
Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-48
Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-47
Uniform tire quality grading. . . . . . . . .9-24
Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-40
Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8
Top tether strap child restraint . . . . . . . . .1-25
Towing
Flat towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23
Tow truck towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9
Towing load/specification . . . . . . . . .9-19
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-16
Traction control system (TCS) off switch . . .2-28
Transceiver
Information and warning labels. . . . . . .1-49
Precautions on supplemental restraint
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-34
Supplemental restraint system
(Supplemental air bag system). . . . . . . . .1-34
Switch
Autolight switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22
Automatic power window switch . . . . .2-39
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25
Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . .2-26
Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . .2-21
Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . .2-21
Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4
Rear window and outside mirror defroster
switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Automatic transmission. . . . . . . . .5-8, 5-8
Manual transmission . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . . . .1-15
Spark plug replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21
HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver . . . . .2-42
Transmission
Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) . . . .8-14
10-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving with manual transmission . . . . .5-12
Selector lever lock release . . . . . . . . .5-11
Travel (See registering your vehicle in another
country) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9
Trip button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
Trip odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Trunk access through the rear seat . . . . . . .1-6
Trunk lid lock opener lever . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
Trunk light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42
Turn signal switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25
Wiper
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-19
Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25
W
Warning
Air bag warning light. . . . . . . . .1-49, 2-13
Anti-lock brake warning light. . . . . . . .2-11
Battery charge warning light . . . . . . . .2-12
Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Door open warning light . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Engine oil pressure warning light . . . . .2-12
Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . .2-26
Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Low washer fluid warning light. . . . . . .2-13
Passenger air bag and status light. . . . .1-43
Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Vehicle security system. . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Warning labels (for SRS). . . . . . . . . .1-49
Warning/indicator lights and audible
U
Uniform tire quality grading. . . . . . . . . . .9-24
reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11
Warning lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11
Washer switch
V
Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14
Vehicle dimensions and weights . . . . . . . .9-8
Vehicle electronic system . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
(Chassis number). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9
Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . .9-9
Vehicle loading information. . . . . . . . . . .9-12
Vehicle recovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12
Vehicle security system. . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Vehicle security system (NISSAN vehicle
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-19
Weights (See dimensions and weights) . . . .9-8
Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-40
Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8
When traveling or registering your vehicle
in another country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9
Window washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18
Windows
Locking passengers’ windows . . . . . . .2-38
Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37
Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . .2-19
immobilizer system), engine start . .2-17, 3-2, 5-5
Ventilators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
10-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GAS STATION INFORMATION
●
5W-30 Viscosity preferred
RECOMMENDED FUEL:
● Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle.
Your vehicle is not designed to run on
E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can damage
the fuel system components and is not
covered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim-
ited warranty.
See “Engine oil and oil filter recommendation” in
the “Technical and consumer information” sec-
tion of this manual.
For 2.5L engine
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane
rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num-
ber (Research octane number 91).
TIRE COLD PRESSURE:
See tire placard.
For 3.5L engine
For additional information, see “Capacities and
recommended fuel/lubricants in the “Technical
and consumer information” section.
RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLE
BREAK-IN PROCEDURE:
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane
rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num-
ber (Research octane number 91).
RECOMMENDED ENGINE OIL:
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of vehicle
use, follow the recommendations outlined in the
“BREAK-IN SCHEDULE” information found in
the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.
Follow these recommendations for the future re-
liability and economy of your new vehicle. Failure
to follow these recommendations may result in
vehicle damage or shortened engine life.
For improved performance, NISSAN recom-
mends the use of unleaded premium gasoline
with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI number
(Research octane number 96).
QR25DE Engine
●
●
API Certification Mark
API grade SG/SHEnergy Conserving II or
API grade SJ or SL, Energy conserving
CAUTION
●
●
ILSAC grade GF-II or GF-III
5W-30 Viscosity preferred
● Using a fuel other than that specified
could adversely affect the emission
control system, and may also affect the
warranty coverage.
See “Engine oil and oil filter recommendation” in
the “Technical and consumer information” sec-
tion of this manual.
● Under no circumstances should
a
leaded gasoline be used, because this
will damage the three-way catalyst.
VQ35DE Engine
●
●
API Certification Mark
API grade SG/SHEnergy Conserving I & II or
API grade SJ or SL Energy conserving
●
ILSAC grade GF-I, GF-II or GF-III
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
QUICK REFERENCE
1.
2.
3.
4.
Engine coolant 8-9
Window washer fluid 8-18
Engine oil 8-10
Passenger supplemental front impact air bag
1-34
5.
6.
Audio system 4-23, 4-25, 4-30; Air condi-
tioner 4-11, 4-20
Supplemental side-impact air bag
(if so equipped) 1-34
7.
8.
9.
Front seats 1-2
Spare tire 6-2
Fuel-filler door release 3-12; Fuel recom-
mendation 9-3
10. Keys 3-2
11. Supplemental side-impact air bag
(if so equipped) 1-34
12. Seat belts 1-9
13. Trunk release 3-10
14. Supplemental curtain side-impact air bag
(if so equipped) 1-34
15. Driver supplemental front impact air bag
1-34
16. Hood release 3-9
17. Meters and gauges 2-3
WGS0016
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
